Garmin | G500 TXi | Garmin G500 TXi G500(H)/G600/G700 TXi Pilot's Guide

Garmin G500 TXi G500(H)/G600/G700 TXi Pilot's Guide
G500(H)/G600/G700 TXi
Pilot's Guide
© 2019
Garmin International, Inc., or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied,
transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose
without the express prior written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to
download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or
other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to print one copy of this manual or of any
revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must
contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized
commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
This manual reflects the operation of system software v3.01. Some differences in operation
may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to later software versions.
SkyWatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications.
© 2019 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio, Sirius, SXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks
of SiriusXM Radio Inc. All other marks and logos are property of their respective owners. All
rights reserved.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International or its
subsidiaries. Connext™, Garmin Pilot™, G5™, GDU™, GTN™, and Smart Airspace™ are
trademarks of Garmin International or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used
without the express permission of Garmin.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
© 2019 SD® is a registered trademark of SD-3C, LLC. All rights reserved.
Iridium® is a registered trademark of Iridium Communications, Inc. All rights reserved.
The term Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance®.
For information regarding the Aviation Limited Warranty, refer to Garmin’s website.
For aviation product support, visit flyGarmin.com.
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN
("THE GARMIN PRODUCT"), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries ("Garmin") grants you a limited license to use the
software embedded in the Garmin Product (the "Software") in binary executable form in the
normal operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property rights
in and to the Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You acknowledge
that the Software is the property of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and is protected
under the United States of America copyright laws and international copyright treaties. You
further acknowledge that the structure, organization, and code of the Software are valuable
trade secrets of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and that the Software in source code
form remains a valuable trade secret of Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You agree not
to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify, reverse assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to
human readable form the Software or any part thereof or create any derivative works based on
the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to any country in violation of
the export control laws of the United States of America.
Table of Contents
1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................... 1-1
System Overview ..................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1 Display Layout ........................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Display Configurations .............................................................................. 1-4
1.3 System Functions ...................................................................................... 1-7
Pilot Interface ........................................................................................................................................1-8
1.4 Unit Power ................................................................................................ 1-8
1.4.1 Power Off Options ............................................................................. 1-8
1.5 SD Card Slot ............................................................................................. 1-9
1.6 Touchscreen ........................................................................................... 1-10
1.6.1 Keys ................................................................................................. 1-11
1.6.2 Menus .............................................................................................. 1-12
1.6.3 Lists ................................................................................................. 1-13
1.6.4 Tabs ................................................................................................. 1-13
1.6.5 Keypads ........................................................................................... 1-14
1.7 Control Knobs ........................................................................................ 1-15
1.7.1 Knob Function Indicators .................................................................. 1-16
1.7.2 Screen Captures ............................................................................... 1-17
1.8 Color Conventions .................................................................................. 1-18
Databases ..............................................................................................................................................1-19
1.9 Database Effective Cycles ........................................................................ 1-20
1.10 Active and Standby Databases .............................................................. 1-21
1.11 Manual Updates ................................................................................... 1-21
1.11.1 Database Update Page ................................................................... 1-21
1.12 Automatic Updates ............................................................................... 1-23
1.13 Database Concierge .............................................................................. 1-24
1.14 Database SYNC ..................................................................................... 1-26
1.15 Chart Streaming ................................................................................... 1-27
Connectivity .........................................................................................................................................1-28
1.16 Flight Stream 510 Setup ........................................................................ 1-28
1.17 Bluetooth Setup .................................................................................... 1-29
1.17.1 Managing Paired Devices ................................................................ 1-29
1.18 Wi-Fi Setup ........................................................................................... 1-30
1.18.1 Connecting to Wi-Fi ....................................................................... 1-30
1.18.2 Viewing Wi-Fi Information .............................................................. 1-31
Pilot Settings ........................................................................................................................................1-32
1.19 Display Brightness Control .................................................................... 1-32
1.19.1 Automatic Brightness Control ......................................................... 1-32
1.19.2 Manual Brightness Control ............................................................. 1-32
1.20 System Status Page ............................................................................... 1-33
1.21 Click Volume ........................................................................................ 1-33
1.22 Clock .................................................................................................... 1-33
1.23 Weather Display Shortcut ...................................................................... 1-33
1.24 Unit Selections ...................................................................................... 1-34
Crew Profiles .......................................................................................................................................1-35
1.25 Crew Profile Settings ............................................................................. 1-35
1.25.1 Crew Profile Management .............................................................. 1-37
System Messages ...............................................................................................................................1-39
1.26 Alerts Types .......................................................................................... 1-39
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
i
Table of Contents
1.26.1 Warnings & Cautions ..................................................................... 1-39
1.26.2 System & Function Advisories ......................................................... 1-39
1.26.3 Alert Annunciations ........................................................................ 1-40
1.26.4 Pop-up Alerts ................................................................................. 1-41
1.26.5 Aural Alerts .................................................................................... 1-43
1.27 Advisories ............................................................................................. 1-44
1.27.1 Audio Advisories ............................................................................ 1-45
1.27.2 Battery Advisories ........................................................................... 1-45
1.27.3 Database Advisories ....................................................................... 1-46
1.27.4 Emergency Descent Mode Advisories .............................................. 1-47
1.27.5 Engine System Advisories ............................................................... 1-48
1.27.6 Terrain Advisories ........................................................................... 1-49
1.27.7 Traffic System Advisories ................................................................ 1-50
1.27.8 Satellite Service Advisories .............................................................. 1-51
1.27.9 PFD Advisories ................................................................................ 1-51
1.27.10 System Hardware Advisories ......................................................... 1-54
1.27.11 Weather Service Advisories ........................................................... 1-55
1.28 LRU Failure Annunciations ..................................................................... 1-56
1.28.1 PFD Failure Annunciations .............................................................. 1-56
1.28.2 EIS Failure Annunciations ................................................................ 1-57
Logs ...........................................................................................................................................................1-58
1.29 Flight Data Logging ............................................................................... 1-58
1.29.1 Exporting to SD Card ...................................................................... 1-60
1.29.2 Streaming to Garmin Pilot .............................................................. 1-62
1.30 Exceedance Logging ............................................................................. 1-63
1.30.1 Exceedance Alerts .......................................................................... 1-65
1.30.2 Exceedance Details ......................................................................... 1-66
1.30.3 Exporting to SD Card ...................................................................... 1-66
Compatible Equipment ..................................................................................................................1-67
1.31 Line Replaceable Units .......................................................................... 1-67
1.31.1 LRU Status ...................................................................................... 1-68
1.31.2 Integrated Standby Instrument - Piston Aircraft .............................. 1-68
1.31.3 Standby Instruments ....................................................................... 1-69
1.31.4 PFD Controller ................................................................................ 1-70
1.31.5 Backup Battery ............................................................................... 1-71
1.31.6 ADC & AHRS .................................................................................. 1-71
1.31.7 PFD Adapter ................................................................................... 1-72
1.31.8 Autopilot ........................................................................................ 1-72
1.31.9 Weather & Music ........................................................................... 1-75
1.31.10 Engine Monitoring ....................................................................... 1-78
1.31.11 Magnetometer ............................................................................. 1-79
1.31.12 Navigation/FMS ............................................................................ 1-79
1.31.13 Temperature Probe ....................................................................... 1-79
1.31.14 Radar Altimeter ............................................................................ 1-80
1.31.15 Traffic .......................................................................................... 1-81
2 PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY ............................................................................................ 2-1
PFD Setup .................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.1 Synchronization Options ........................................................................... 2-5
2.2 Reference Bugs and Controls .................................................................... 2-6
ii
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Table of Contents
Flight Instruments ................................................................................................................................2-9
2.3 Attitude Indicator .................................................................................... 2-11
2.3.1 Attitude Sync, Rotorcraft Only .......................................................... 2-13
2.4 Extreme Attitude Indications ................................................................... 2-14
2.5 VNAV Guidance Indications .................................................................... 2-16
2.6 Airspeed Indicator ................................................................................... 2-17
2.6.1 Reference Markings .......................................................................... 2-19
2.6.2 Reference Speeds ............................................................................. 2-20
2.6.3 Fast/Slow Indicator ........................................................................... 2-21
2.7 Barometric Altimeter ............................................................................... 2-21
2.7.1 Adjusting Barometric Pressure .......................................................... 2-24
2.7.2 Adjusting Selected Altitude .............................................................. 2-25
2.7.3 Temperature Compensation Minimums ............................................ 2-26
2.7.4 MDA/DH Alerting ............................................................................. 2-27
2.8 VSI .......................................................................................................... 2-28
2.8.1 Selected Vertical Speed .................................................................... 2-30
2.9 Horizontal Situation Indicator .................................................................. 2-31
2.9.1 Setting the Heading Bug .................................................................. 2-33
2.9.2 HSI Annunciations ............................................................................ 2-34
2.10 CDI ....................................................................................................... 2-37
2.10.1 Course Pointer Types ...................................................................... 2-38
2.10.2 Cross Track Error Indication ........................................................... 2-38
2.10.3 CDI Source Selection ...................................................................... 2-39
2.10.4 Selected Course with VOR/LOC ..................................................... 2-40
2.10.5 Selected Course with GPS .............................................................. 2-40
2.10.6 Automatic Source Selection ............................................................ 2-41
2.10.7 Auto-Slewing ................................................................................. 2-42
2.11 LDI ........................................................................................................ 2-43
2.11.1 Reverse Sensing Correction ............................................................ 2-43
2.12 VDI ....................................................................................................... 2-44
2.12.1 VNAV Deviation Indications ........................................................... 2-45
2.13 CDI/VDI Preview .................................................................................... 2-46
Supplemental Flight Data ............................................................................................................2-49
2.14 Bearing Pointers .................................................................................... 2-49
2.15 GPS NAV Status Field ............................................................................ 2-51
2.16 Relative Wind Data ............................................................................... 2-52
2.17 Temp/DALT Display ............................................................................... 2-53
2.18 DME Display ......................................................................................... 2-54
2.19 Marker Beacon Symbols ........................................................................ 2-55
2.20 Radar Altitude ....................................................................................... 2-55
2.20.1 RA Test .......................................................................................... 2-56
2.21 Clock/Timer .......................................................................................... 2-56
3 ADVANCED FEATURES .................................................................................................... 3-1
HSI Map .....................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1 HSI Map Overlays ...................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.1 Overlay Status Icons ........................................................................... 3-6
Map Display, GDU 700L ....................................................................................................................3-7
3.2 GDU 700L Map Overlays ........................................................................... 3-9
3.2.1 Overlay Controls ............................................................................... 3-10
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
iii
Table of Contents
3.2.2 Overlay Status Icons ......................................................................... 3-11
SVT .............................................................................................................................................................3-12
3.3 SVT Setup ............................................................................................... 3-12
3.4 SVT Features ........................................................................................... 3-13
3.4.1 Pitch Scale Expansion ....................................................................... 3-13
3.4.2 Zero-Pitch Line ................................................................................. 3-14
3.4.3 Flight Path Marker ............................................................................ 3-14
3.4.4 SVT Terrain and Obstacles ................................................................ 3-15
3.4.5 SVT Runways .................................................................................... 3-17
3.4.6 SVT Traffic ........................................................................................ 3-17
3.4.7 Selectable Display Features ............................................................... 3-18
Autopilot ................................................................................................................................................3-20
3.5 GPSS ....................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.1 GPSS Mode Icons ............................................................................. 3-21
3.6 Flight Director ......................................................................................... 3-22
3.6.1 Command Cues ............................................................................... 3-22
3.7 Altitude Preselect Functions .................................................................... 3-24
3.7.1 Arming Altitude Capture .................................................................. 3-24
3.7.2 Enabling Vertical Speed Control ....................................................... 3-24
3.8 Low Bank Mode ...................................................................................... 3-25
3.9 Servo Heading Reference ........................................................................ 3-25
3.10 Mode Annunciations ............................................................................. 3-26
3.10.1 AP Basic Mode Annunciations ........................................................ 3-26
3.10.2 AP Lateral & Vertical Mode Annunciations ...................................... 3-27
3.10.3 Autopilot Alerts .............................................................................. 3-28
3.11 Autopilot Preflight Test ......................................................................... 3-30
4 MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY .......................................................................................... 4-1
MFD Setup ................................................................................................................................................4-3
4.1 Nearest Airport Criteria ............................................................................. 4-4
4.2 MFD Resize Option ................................................................................... 4-4
Map ..............................................................................................................................................................4-5
4.3 Map Interactions ....................................................................................... 4-8
4.4 Map Overlays ......................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.1 Overlay Controls ............................................................................... 4-11
4.4.2 Overlay Status Icons ......................................................................... 4-13
4.5 Map Detail .............................................................................................. 4-14
4.6 Map Setup .............................................................................................. 4-15
4.6.1 Map Selections ................................................................................. 4-16
4.6.2 Aviation Selections ........................................................................... 4-20
4.6.3 Smart Airspace ................................................................................. 4-22
4.6.4 SafeTaxi ........................................................................................... 4-23
4.6.5 Land Selections ................................................................................ 4-25
4.6.6 Traffic Selections .............................................................................. 4-26
4.6.7 Weather Selections ........................................................................... 4-26
Charts .....................................................................................................................................................4-27
4.7 Chart Setup ............................................................................................ 4-28
4.8 Chart Selection ....................................................................................... 4-30
4.9 Aircraft Position Icon ............................................................................... 4-31
Active Flight Plan ..............................................................................................................................4-32
iv
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Table of Contents
4.10 Edit Data Fields ..................................................................................... 4-33
4.11 Collapse All Airways .............................................................................. 4-34
4.12 Flight Plan Map Indications ................................................................... 4-35
Waypoints ..............................................................................................................................................4-38
4.13 Waypoint Information ........................................................................... 4-38
4.14 Waypoint Selection ............................................................................... 4-41
4.14.1 Waypoint Autofill ........................................................................... 4-41
4.14.2 Search Tabs .................................................................................... 4-41
SiriusXM Audio Entertainment ..................................................................................................4-43
4.15 SiriusXM Audio Activation ..................................................................... 4-44
4.16 Browse Music Channels ........................................................................ 4-44
4.16.1 Audio Category Selection ............................................................... 4-44
4.16.2 Direct Channel Tuning .................................................................... 4-45
External Video ....................................................................................................................................4-46
4.17 SD Video Setup ..................................................................................... 4-47
4.17.1 Settings Key ................................................................................... 4-47
5 WEATHER AWARENESS .................................................................................................. 5-1
Weather Display ...................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1 Weather Products ..................................................................................... 5-3
Datalink Weather .................................................................................................................................5-5
5.2 Weather Page Interactions ........................................................................ 5-6
5.3 Weather Product Age ............................................................................... 5-8
5.4 Precipitation .............................................................................................. 5-9
5.4.1 NEXRAD ............................................................................................. 5-9
5.4.2 Connext ........................................................................................... 5-11
5.5 Echo Tops ............................................................................................... 5-12
5.6 Clouds .................................................................................................... 5-12
5.6.1 Cloud Tops ....................................................................................... 5-12
5.6.2 IR Satellite ........................................................................................ 5-13
5.7 Lightning ................................................................................................ 5-13
5.8 METARs and TAFs ................................................................................... 5-14
5.9 Cell Movement ....................................................................................... 5-15
5.10 AIRMETs ............................................................................................... 5-16
5.10.1 Textual AIRMETs ............................................................................. 5-16
5.10.2 Graphical AIRMETs ......................................................................... 5-17
5.11 Center Weather Advisory ...................................................................... 5-18
5.12 SIGMETs ............................................................................................... 5-18
5.13 County Warnings .................................................................................. 5-19
5.14 Cyclone/Hurricane Track ....................................................................... 5-19
5.15 AIREP/PIREPs ......................................................................................... 5-20
5.16 Surface Analysis .................................................................................... 5-21
5.17 City Forecast ......................................................................................... 5-21
5.18 Winds Aloft .......................................................................................... 5-22
5.19 Icing ..................................................................................................... 5-23
5.20 Turbulence ............................................................................................ 5-24
5.21 Freezing Levels ...................................................................................... 5-25
5.22 TFRs ...................................................................................................... 5-26
5.23 SiriusXM ............................................................................................... 5-27
5.23.1 SiriusXM Weather Setup ................................................................. 5-28
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
v
Table of Contents
5.23.2 Activating Services .......................................................................... 5-29
5.23.3 SiriusXM Weather Products ............................................................ 5-29
5.24 FIS-B Weather ....................................................................................... 5-30
5.24.1 FIS-B Data Transmission Limitations ................................................ 5-30
5.24.2 FIS-B Weather Setup ....................................................................... 5-32
5.24.3 Raw Text Reports ........................................................................... 5-33
5.24.4 FIS-B Ground Reception Status ....................................................... 5-33
5.25 Connext Weather ................................................................................. 5-34
5.25.1 Activating Connext Services ............................................................ 5-34
5.25.2 Deactivating Connext Unit Registration .......................................... 5-35
5.25.3 Connext Weather Product Age ....................................................... 5-35
5.25.4 Connext Weather Setup ................................................................. 5-36
5.25.5 Connext Data Requests .................................................................. 5-37
Stormscope ...........................................................................................................................................5-39
5.26 Stormscope Page .................................................................................. 5-39
5.27 Stormscope Setup ................................................................................. 5-40
5.27.1 Stormscope Modes & Symbols ........................................................ 5-40
5.27.2 Views ............................................................................................. 5-41
Airborne Weather Radar ...............................................................................................................5-42
5.28 Weather Radar Page ............................................................................. 5-42
5.29 Weather Radar Setup ............................................................................ 5-44
5.29.1 Sector Scan .................................................................................... 5-44
5.29.2 Stabilization ................................................................................... 5-45
5.29.3 WATCH .......................................................................................... 5-45
5.29.4 Weather Alert ................................................................................ 5-46
5.29.5 Altitude Compensated Tilt .............................................................. 5-46
5.29.6 Turbulence Detection ..................................................................... 5-47
5.29.7 Ground Clutter Suppression ........................................................... 5-47
5.30 Radar Modes ........................................................................................ 5-48
5.30.1 Mode Key ...................................................................................... 5-48
5.31 Radar Controls ...................................................................................... 5-52
5.31.1 Show Bearing/Tilt ........................................................................... 5-52
5.31.2 Bearing .......................................................................................... 5-52
5.31.3 Tilt ................................................................................................. 5-53
5.31.4 Scan ............................................................................................... 5-54
5.31.5 Gain ............................................................................................... 5-55
5.32 Radar Alerts .......................................................................................... 5-56
6 TRAFFIC AWARENESS ...................................................................................................... 6-1
Traffic Display ........................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1 Traffic Page ............................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Traffic Setup ............................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.1 Traffic Test ......................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.2 Altitude Filtering ................................................................................. 6-6
Traffic Types ...........................................................................................................................................6-7
6.3 TIS-A ......................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.1 TIS-A Setup Selections ........................................................................ 6-7
6.3.2 TIS-A Traffic Symbols .......................................................................... 6-8
6.3.3 TIS-A Status Indications ...................................................................... 6-8
6.4 TAS/TCAS I ............................................................................................... 6-9
vi
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Table of Contents
6.4.1 TAS/TCAS I Setup Selections ............................................................... 6-9
6.4.2 TAS/TCAS I Traffic Symbols ................................................................. 6-9
6.4.3 TAS/TCAS I Status Indications ........................................................... 6-10
6.5 TCAS II .................................................................................................... 6-11
6.5.1 TCAS II Status Indications ................................................................. 6-11
6.5.2 TCAS II Alerts ................................................................................... 6-12
6.5.3 TCAS II Traffic Symbols ..................................................................... 6-14
6.5.4 TCAS II with ADS-B .......................................................................... 6-14
6.6 ADS-B ..................................................................................................... 6-15
6.6.1 ADS-B Setup Selections .................................................................... 6-15
6.6.2 ADS-B Traffic Symbols ...................................................................... 6-16
6.6.3 ADS-B Traffic Applications ................................................................ 6-17
6.6.4 Motion Vectors ................................................................................ 6-18
6.6.5 ADS-B Status Indications .................................................................. 6-18
6.6.6 ADS-B Traffic Interactions ................................................................. 6-19
6.7 Traffic Alerts ........................................................................................... 6-20
7 TERRAIN AWARENESS ..................................................................................................... 7-1
Terrain Configurations ......................................................................................................................7-2
7.1 GPS Altitude for Terrain ............................................................................ 7-2
7.1.1 GSL Altitude & Indicated Altitude ....................................................... 7-3
7.2 Database Limitations ................................................................................. 7-4
Terrain Display ......................................................................................................................................7-5
7.3 Terrain Page .............................................................................................. 7-5
7.4 Terrain Setup ............................................................................................ 7-7
7.5 Terrain Proximity ....................................................................................... 7-8
7.5.1 Terrain Elevation Depictions ................................................................ 7-9
7.5.2 Obstacle Elevation Depictions ........................................................... 7-11
Terrain Alerting ..................................................................................................................................7-13
7.6 Alert Types .............................................................................................. 7-13
7.6.1 Alerting Thresholds .......................................................................... 7-15
7.6.2 Inhibiting TAWS and Terrain-FLTA Alerts .......................................... 7-18
7.7 Terrain-FLTA ........................................................................................... 7-19
7.7.1 Reduced Protection Mode, Rotorcraft Only ....................................... 7-19
7.7.2 Terrain-FLTA Alerts ........................................................................... 7-20
7.8 TAWS-B .................................................................................................. 7-23
7.8.1 TAWS-B Alerts .................................................................................. 7-23
7.9 External TAWS/HTAWS ........................................................................... 7-27
7.9.1 TAWS-A ........................................................................................... 7-28
7.9.2 TAWS-A Alerts ................................................................................. 7-29
8 FUEL & ENGINE INDICATING SYSTEM .................................................................... 8-1
Reciprocating Engines ......................................................................................................................8-2
8.1 EIS Display ................................................................................................ 8-2
8.2 EIS Setup .................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 EIS Functions ............................................................................................. 8-6
8.4 Gauges ..................................................................................................... 8-8
8.4.1 Gauge Types ...................................................................................... 8-8
8.4.2 Markings & Indications ..................................................................... 8-10
8.4.3 Gauge Interactions ........................................................................... 8-13
8.5 Lean Assist Mode .................................................................................... 8-15
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
vii
Table of Contents
8.5.1 Lean Mode Key ................................................................................ 8-15
8.5.2 Peak Temperature Indications ........................................................... 8-16
8.6 EIS Operations ........................................................................................ 8-19
8.6.1 Initial Setup ...................................................................................... 8-19
8.6.2 Preflight ........................................................................................... 8-20
8.6.3 En Route .......................................................................................... 8-20
8.6.4 Post Flight ........................................................................................ 8-21
8.7 Engine Advisories .................................................................................... 8-21
Turbine Engines .................................................................................................................................8-22
8.8 EIS Display .............................................................................................. 8-22
8.9 EIS Setup ................................................................................................ 8-24
8.10 EIS Functions ......................................................................................... 8-25
8.11 Gauges ................................................................................................. 8-26
8.11.1 Gauge Types .................................................................................. 8-26
8.11.2 Timers ............................................................................................ 8-31
8.11.3 Counters ........................................................................................ 8-35
8.11.4 Dynamic Markings and Indications ................................................. 8-36
8.11.5 Gauge Interactions ......................................................................... 8-39
8.12 EIS Operations ...................................................................................... 8-40
8.12.1 Initial Setup .................................................................................... 8-40
8.12.2 Preflight ......................................................................................... 8-41
8.12.3 En Route ........................................................................................ 8-42
8.12.4 Post Flight ...................................................................................... 8-42
8.13 Engine Advisories .................................................................................. 8-42
Electrical ................................................................................................................................................8-43
8.14 Electrical Gauges ................................................................................... 8-43
Fuel ...........................................................................................................................................................8-44
8.15 Fuel Computer ...................................................................................... 8-44
8.15.1 Preset Fuel Quantities ..................................................................... 8-45
8.15.2 Fuel Flow Calibration ...................................................................... 8-46
Engine Alerts ........................................................................................................................................8-47
9 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS ............................................................................................. 9-1
Backup Instruments ............................................................................................................................9-2
9.1 Display Backup .......................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.1 Standby PFD Display Options .............................................................. 9-3
9.1.2 Composite Display Backup Mode ....................................................... 9-4
9.2 Backup Battery .......................................................................................... 9-9
9.2.1 Battery Status Indications ................................................................. 9-11
9.2.2 Battery Alerts ................................................................................... 9-13
9.3 AHRS & ADC Failures .............................................................................. 9-14
9.3.1 AHRS and ADC Sensor Selection ...................................................... 9-15
9.3.2 AHRS Operating In Reversionary Mode ............................................. 9-17
9.3.3 GPS Failure ....................................................................................... 9-17
9.3.4 AHRS Alerts ...................................................................................... 9-18
9.3.5 Miscompare & No Compare ............................................................. 9-20
9.4 HSI Failure Modes ................................................................................... 9-21
9.4.1 GPS Failure ....................................................................................... 9-23
9.4.2 Backup GPS ...................................................................................... 9-24
9.5 Emergency Descent Mode ....................................................................... 9-25
viii
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Table of Contents
9.5.1 EDM Activation ................................................................................ 9-25
9.5.2 EDM Inhibit ...................................................................................... 9-27
9.5.3 EDM Override ................................................................................... 9-29
9.5.4 EDM Active Discrete Output ............................................................. 9-30
10 QUALIFICATION ..............................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Glove Qualification ............................................................................... 10-1
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
ix
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
x
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
WARNING
DO NOT USE TERRAIN AVOIDANCE DISPLAYS AS THE SOLE SOURCE OF INFORMATION
FOR MAINTAINING SEPARATION FROM TERRAIN AND OBSTACLES. GARMIN OBTAINS
TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE DATA FROM THIRD PARTY SOURCES AND CANNOT
INDEPENDENTLY VERIFY THE ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION.
WARNING
ALWAYS REFER TO CURRENT AERONAUTICAL CHARTS AND NOTAMS FOR
VERIFICATION OF DISPLAYED AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION. DISPLAYED
AERONAUTICAL DATA MAY NOT INCORPORATE THE LATEST NOTAM INFORMATION.
WARNING
DO NOT USE GEOMETRIC ALTITUDE FOR COMPLIANCE WITH AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL
ALTITUDE REQUIREMENTS. THE PRIMARY BAROMETRIC ALTIMETER MUST BE USED
FOR COMPLIANCE WITH ALL AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL ALTITUDE REGULATIONS,
REQUIREMENTS, INSTRUCTIONS, AND CLEARANCES.
WARNING
DO NOT USE BASEMAP INFORMATION (LAND AND WATER DATA) AS THE SOLE MEANS
OF NAVIGATION. BASEMAP DATA IS INTENDED ONLY TO SUPPLEMENT OTHER
APPROVED NAVIGATION DATA SOURCES AND SHOULD BE CONSIDERED ONLY AN AID
TO ENHANCE SITUATIONAL AWARENESS.
WARNING
DO NOT RELY SOLELY UPON THE DISPLAY OF TRAFFIC INFORMATION TO
ACCURATELY DEPICT ALL OF THE TRAFFIC WITHIN RANGE OF THE AIRCRAFT. DUE TO
LACK OF EQUIPMENT, POOR SIGNAL RECEPTION, AND/OR INACCURATE
INFORMATION FROM AIRCRAFT OR GROUND STATIONS, TRAFFIC MAY BE PRESENT
THAT IS NOT REPRESENTED ON THE DISPLAY.
WARNING
DO NOT USE DATALINK WEATHER INFORMATION FOR MANEUVERING IN, NEAR, OR
AROUND AREAS OF HAZARDOUS WEATHER. INFORMATION CONTAINED WITHIN
DATALINK WEATHER PRODUCTS MAY NOT ACCURATELY DEPICT CURRENT WEATHER
CONDITIONS.
WARNING
DO NOT USE THE INDICATED DATALINK WEATHER PRODUCT AGE TO DETERMINE
THE AGE OF THE WEATHER INFORMATION SHOWN BY THE DATALINK WEATHER
PRODUCT. DUE TO TIME DELAYS INHERENT IN GATHERING AND PROCESSING
WEATHER DATA FOR DATALINK TRANSMISSION, THE WEATHER INFORMATION
SHOWN BY THE DATALINK WEATHER PRODUCT MAY BE OLDER THAN THE
INDICATED WEATHER PRODUCT AGE.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
xi
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
WARNING
ALWAYS REFER TO CURRENT AERONAUTICAL CHARTS FOR APPROPRIATE MINIMUM
CLEARANCE ALTITUDES. THE DISPLAYED MSAs ARE ONLY ADVISORY IN NATURE AND
SHOULD NOT BE RELIED UPON AS THE SOLE SOURCE OF OBSTACLE AND TERRAIN
AVOIDANCE INFORMATION.
WARNING
DO NOT USE GPS TO NAVIGATE TO ANY ACTIVE WAYPOINT IDENTIFIED AS A “NON
WGS84 WPT” BY A SYSTEM MESSAGE. “NON WGS84 WPT” WAYPOINTS ARE DERIVED
FROM AN UNKNOWN MAP REFERENCE DATUM THAT MAY BE INCOMPATIBLE WITH
THE MAP REFERENCE DATUM USED BY GPS (KNOWN AS WGS84) AND MAY BE
POSITIONED IN ERROR AS DISPLAYED.
WARNING
DO NOT RELY SOLELY UPON THE DISPLAY OF TRAFFIC INFORMATION FOR COLLISION
AVOIDANCE MANEUVERING. THE TRAFFIC DISPLAY DOES NOT PROVIDE COLLISION
AVOIDANCE RESOLUTION ADVISORIES AND DOES NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES
OR CONDITIONS RELIEVE THE PILOT’S RESPONSIBILITY TO SEE AND AVOID OTHER
AIRCRAFT.
WARNING
DO NOT RELY ON THE ACCURACY OF ATTITUDE AND HEADING INDICATIONS IN
GEOGRAPHIC AREAS WHERE VARIATION IN THE EARTH’S MAGNETIC FIELD EXISTS.
THIS INCLUDES: NORTH OF 72° NORTH LATITUDE AT ALL LONGITUDES; SOUTH OF 70°
SOUTH LATITUDE AT ALL LONGITUDES; NORTH OF 65° NORTH LATITUDE BETWEEN
LONGITUDE 75° W. AND 120° W. (NORTHERN CANADA); NORTH OF 70° NORTH
LATITUDE BETWEEN LONGITUDE 70° W. AND 128° W. (NORTHERN CANADA); NORTH
OF 70° NORTH LATITUDE BETWEEN LONGITUDE 85° E. AND 114° E. (NORTHERN
RUSSIA); SOUTH OF 55° SOUTH LATITUDE BETWEEN LONGITUDE 120° E. AND 165° E.
(REGION SOUTH OF AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND).
WARNING
DO NOT RELY SOLELY UPON DATALINK SERVICES TO PROVIDE TFR INFORMATION.
ALWAYS CONFIRM TFR INFORMATION THROUGH OFFICIAL SOURCES SUCH AS
FLIGHT SERVICE STATIONS OR AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL.
WARNING
DO NOT RELY ON INFORMATION FROM A LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM DISPLAY AS
THE SOLE BASIS FOR HAZARDOUS WEATHER AVOIDANCE. RANGE LIMITATIONS AND
INTERFERENCE MAY CAUSE THE SYSTEM TO DISPLAY INACCURATE OR INCOMPLETE
INFORMATION. REFER TO DOCUMENTATION FROM THE LIGHTNING DETECTION
SYSTEM MANUFACTURER FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT THE SYSTEM.
xii
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
WARNING
USE APPROPRIATE PRIMARY SYSTEMS FOR NAVIGATION, AND FOR TERRAIN,
OBSTACLE, AND TRAFFIC AVOIDANCE. GARMIN SVT IS INTENDED AS AN AID TO
SITUATIONAL AWARENESS ONLY AND MAY NOT PROVIDE EITHER THE ACCURACY OR
RELIABILITY UPON WHICH TO SOLELY BASE DECISIONS AND/OR PLAN MANEUVERS
TO AVOID TERRAIN, OBSTACLES, OR TRAFFIC.
WARNING
DO NOT USE THE GARMIN SVT RUNWAY DEPICTION AS THE SOLE MEANS FOR
DETERMINING THE PROXIMITY OF THE AIRCRAFT TO THE RUNWAY OR FOR
MAINTAINING THE PROPER APPROACH PATH ANGLE DURING LANDING.
WARNING
DO NOT USE TAWS INFORMATION FOR PRIMARY TERRAIN OR OBSTACLE AVOIDANCE.
TAWS IS INTENDED ONLY TO ENHANCE SITUATIONAL AWARENESS.
CAUTION
DO NOT CLEAN DISPLAY SURFACES WITH ABRASIVE CLOTHS OR CLEANERS
CONTAINING AMMONIA. THEY WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING.
CAUTION
ENSURE THAT ANY UNIT REPAIRS ARE MADE BY AN AUTHORIZED GARMIN
SERVICE CENTER. UNAUTHORIZED REPAIRS OR MODIFICATIONS COULD VOID
BOTH THE WARRANTY AND AFFECT THE AIRWORTHINESS OF THE AIRCRAFT.
NOTE
Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT
display or may appear as a partial symbol.
NOTE
All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images
of the system panel and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect
the most current system and aviation databases. Depictions of equipment
may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
xiii
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
NOTE
The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is
solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is
subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance of all
GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVAID. Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the
system can be misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause
an intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on
the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards away from the source
of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE
Use of polarized eye wear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or
blank.
NOTE
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm.
This notice is being provided in accordance with California’s Proposition 65.
If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer
to our website at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE
Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or
electromagnetic fields can cause sensor differences that may result in
nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut down, or while
taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation
indicates no comparison is possible.
NOTE
The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within
that procedure in the Navigation Database. Differences in system operation
may be observed among similar types of procedures due to differences in the
Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
xiv
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
NOTE
The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin
database-dependent avionics of the following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and
advisory guidance and information related to the use of databases in the
National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained
from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that
have a Type 2 LOA from the FAA are assured compliance with all data quality
requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each
applicable database and can be viewed at flyGarmin.com by selecting
“Aviation Database Declarations.”
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment
is required for compliance with established FAA regulatory guidance, but
does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures that
may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in
accordance with established AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations
as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE
The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database
exclusion list as discussed in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be
incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at flyGarmin.com by
selecting “Database Exclusions List.”
NOTE
The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts
and consider their impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database
alerts can be viewed at flyGarmin.com by selecting “Aviation Database
Alerts.”
NOTE
If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin
Product Support.
NOTE
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to
database information. These discrepancies could come in the form of an
incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and fixes; or any
other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on
the ground. Visit flyGarmin.com and select “Aviation Data Error Report.”
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
xv
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
NOTE
When using autopilot to fly an approach with vertical guidance, the autopilot
will not level the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the
altitude preselect.
NOTE
Information obtained solely through FIS-B does not replace a thorough
preflight briefing. NOTAMs received via FIS-B uplink may not be a complete
listing. Active NOTAMs are removed from the FIS-B data stream 30 days after
issuance. FIS-B uplink is not an FAA approved source for NOTAMs.
NOTE
When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in
addition to nearby thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in
the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more discharge points
in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points
reappear after the screen has been cleared.
NOTE
The navigation databases used in Garmin navigation systems contain Special
Procedures. Prior to flying these procedures, pilots must have specific FAA
authorization, training, and possession of the corresponding current, and
legitimately-sourced chart (approach plate, etc.). Inclusion of the Special
Procedure in the navigation database DOES NOT imply specific FAA
authorization to fly the procedure.
xvi
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
About This Guide
Record of Revision
xvii
REVISION
DATE
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
A
05/19/17
Initial Release.
B
01/16/18
Production Release.
C
01/18/18
Minor edits.
D
01/24/18
Minor edits.
E
08/17/18
Updates for software v2.20.
F
10/16/18
Updates for software v2.30.
G
03/14/19
Updates for software v3.00.
H
05/21/19
Updates for software v3.01.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
About This Guide
Change Summary
SECTION
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
• Added MFD Resize key to “Common Commands” topic
• Added “Emergency Descent Mode Advisories” section
• Added brightness control information for turboprop aircraft
1
• Added flight data and exceedance logging information to
“Logs” section
• Added lighting control information to “PFD Controller”
section
• Modified CDI Source key label
2
3
• Added standard rate turn indicator information
• Added information about selected altitude behavior during
emergency descent mode
• Added “AP Engaged Indication” topic to “Flight Director”
section
• Added low bank mode information
4
Added “MFD Resize Option” section.
Added information about the following turbine EIS features.
• Customizable EIS gauge labels
• Digital fuel totalizer gauge fields
8
• Text lamps
• Exceedance timers
• Counters
• Dynamic gauge markings and gauge preview option
9
Added emergency descent mode information.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
xviii
Acronyms and Initialisms
Layout
SECTION
TITLE
1
System Description
2
Primary Flight Display
3
Advanced Features
4
Multi-function Display
5
Weather Awareness
6
Traffic Awareness
7
Terrain Awareness
8
Fuel & Engine
Indicating System
9
Abnormal Operations
10
Qualification
The layout and design of this guide is
to provide clear, concise sections
written in the logical order of a pilot’s
flight instrument and systems scan.
Electronic Document Features
Versions of this guide are saved in Adobe Acrobat and are available for download at:
garmin.com/manuals
xix
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Acronyms and Initialisms
Acronyms and Initialisms
A
ACT
Altitude Compensated Tilt
ADAHRS
Air Data/Attitude & Heading Reference System
ADC
Air Data Computer
ADF
Automatic Direction Finding Equipment
ADI
Attitude and Direction Indicator
ADIZ
Air Defense Identification Zone
ADS-B
Automatic Dependent Surveillance Broadcast
AFM
Aircraft Flight Manual
AFMS
Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement
AGL
Above Ground Level
AHRS
Attitude Heading Reference System
AIM
Airman’s Information Manual
AIRB
Basic Airborne Application
ALT
Altitude Hold
AP
Autopilot
ATC
Air Traffic Control
ATCRBS
Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System
ATK
Along Track
C
CAT
Carburetor Air Temperature
CDI
Course Deviation Indicator
CDU
Control and Display Unit
CHT
Cylinder Head Temperature
CRS
Course
CTAF
Common Traffic Advisory Frequency
CWA
Center Weather Advisory
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
xx
Acronyms and Initialisms
D
DG
Directional Gyro
DH
Decision Height
DME
Distance Measuring Equipment
E
EDM
Emergency Descent Mode
ECR
Excessive Closure Rate
EDR
Excessive Descent Rate
EGT
Exhaust Gas Temperature
EIS
Engine Information System
ENR
En Route
ESP
Electronic Stability and Protection
F
FAF
Final Approach Fix
FDC
Flight Data Center
FIS-B
Flight Information Services Broadcast
FIT
Flight Into Terrain
FLTA
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
FMS
Flight Management System
FPM
Feet Per Minute
FS
Flight Stream
G
GCS
Ground Clutter Suppression
GDC
Garmin Air Data Computer
GDL
Garmin Data Link
GDU
Garmin Display Unit
GEA
Garmin Engine and Airframe
GFC
Garmin Flight Controller
GP
Glidepath
xxi
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Acronyms and Initialisms
GPS
Global Positioning System
GPSS
Global Positioning System Steering
GPWS
Ground Proximity Warning System
GRS
Garmin Reference System
GS
Glideslope
GSL
Geometric Sea Level
GSU
Garmin Sensing Unit
GTP
Garmin Temperature Probe
GWX
Garmin Weather Radar
H
HDG
Heading
HOT
Hazardous Obstacle Transmission
HSI
Horizontal Situation Indicator
HTAWS
Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning System
I
IAF
Initial Approach Fix
IAS
Indicated Airspeed
IAT
Induction Air Temperature
IFR
Instrument Flight Rules
IGRF
International Geomagnetic Reference Field
ILI
Imminent Line Impact
ILS
Instrument Landing System
ITT
Interstage Turbine Temperature
IOI
Imminent Obstacle Impact
ISA
International Standard Atmosphere
ITI
Imminent Terrain Impact
K
KIAS
Knots Indicated Airspeed
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
xxii
Acronyms and Initialisms
L
LDI
Lateral Deviation Indicator
LOA
Letter of Authorization
LOC
Localizer
LRU
Line Replaceable Unit
M
MAP
Missed Approach Point
MAHP
Missed Approach Holding Point
MDA
Minimum Descent Altitude
METAR
Meteorological Terminal Aviation Routine Weather Report
MFD
Multi-Function Display
MGT
Measured Gas Temperature
MOA
Military Operations Area
MSL
Mean Sea Level
N
NAVAID
Navigation Aid
NCR
Negative Climb Rate
NDB
Non-Directional Beacon
NEXRAD
Next-Generation Radar
NRST
Nearest
O
OAT
Outside Air Temperature
OBS
Omni Bearing Selector
OCN
Oceanic
P
PCL
Pilot Controlled Lighting
PDA
Premature Descent Alert
PFD
Primary Flight Display
PVT
Position, Velocity, and Time
xxiii
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Acronyms and Initialisms
R
RLC
Reduced Line Clearance
ROC
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
RTC
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
S
SAT
Static Air Temperature
SBAS
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
SD
Secure Datacard
SSID
Service Set Identifier
SURF
Surface Situation Awareness
SVT
Synthetic Vision Technology
SXM
SiriusXM Weather
T
TA
Traffic Advisory
TAF
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
TAS
Traffic Advisory System
TAT
Total Air Temperature
TAWS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
TCAD
Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance Devices
TCAS
Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System
TERM
Terminal
TFR
Temporary Flight Restriction
TIS
Traffic Information Service
TIT
Turbine Inlet Temperature
TSO
Technical Standard Order
U
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
xxiv
Reference Documentation
V
VDI
Vertical Deviation Indicator
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VLOC
VOR/Localizer
VNAV
Vertical Navigation
VOR
Very High Frequency Omni-directional Range
VRP
Visual Reporting Point
VS
Vertical Speed
VSI
Vertical Speed Indicator
W
WAAS
Wide Area Augmentation System
WATCH
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
WP
Waypoint
xxv
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Reference Documentation
DOCUMENT
P/N
GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions
190-00355-04
Reference Websites
WEBSITE
ADDRESS
Aviation Limited Warranty https://www.garmin.com/en-US/legal/aviation-limited-warranty
Database Concierge
Go to http://www.flygarmin.com/support and select Database
Management.
ADS-B Academy
https://www.garmin.com/us/intheair/ads-b
Connext
http://www.garmin.com/connext
xxvi
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1
System Description
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1
1.2
1.3
Display Layout .......................................................................................1-3
Display Configurations...........................................................................1-4
System Functions ...................................................................................1-7
PILOT INTERFACE
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Unit Power ............................................................................................1-8
SD Card Slot ..........................................................................................1-9
Touchscreen ........................................................................................1-10
Control Knobs .....................................................................................1-15
Color Conventions...............................................................................1-18
DATABASES
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
Database Effective Cycles.....................................................................1-20
Active and Standby Databases .............................................................1-21
Manual Updates ..................................................................................1-21
Automatic Updates..............................................................................1-23
Database Concierge ............................................................................1-24
Database SYNC ...................................................................................1-26
Chart Streaming ..................................................................................1-27
CONNECTIVITY
1.16
1.17
1.18
Flight Stream 510 Setup ......................................................................1-28
Bluetooth Setup ..................................................................................1-29
Wi-Fi Setup..........................................................................................1-30
PILOT SETTINGS
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
Display Brightness Control ...................................................................1-32
System Status Page..............................................................................1-33
Click Volume .......................................................................................1-33
Clock...................................................................................................1-33
Weather Display Shortcut ....................................................................1-33
Unit Selections.....................................................................................1-34
CREW PROFILES
1.25
Crew Profile Settings ...........................................................................1-35
SYSTEM MESSAGES
1.26
1.27
1.28
Alerts Types .........................................................................................1-39
Advisories ............................................................................................1-44
LRU Failure Annunciations ...................................................................1-56
LOGS
1.29
1.30
Flight Data Logging .............................................................................1-58
Exceedance Logging ............................................................................1-63
COMPATIBLE EQUIPMENT
1.31
Line Replaceable Units .........................................................................1-67
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-1
System Description
System Overview
The G500(H)/G600/G700 TXi is a display and sensor system available in three display
options.
• GDU 1060 – 10”display
• GDU 700P – 7”portrait display
• GDU 700L – 7”landscape display
Depending on system specifics one or more of the following functions may apply:
• Primary Flight Display (PFD) – provides attitude, heading, air data, and
navigation information to the pilot
• Multi-Function Display (MFD) – provides pilot awareness of factors that may
affect the overall conduct of a flight
• Engine Indicating System (EIS) – provides engine and airframe operating
parameters to the pilot
GDU 1060 PFD/MFD, EIS OPTION
The GDU 1060 is a PFD/MFD display, with an optional EIS function. Each function is
designated to a portion of the display. The MFD can be selectively hidden or shown.
When hidden, the PFD expands into the MFD space. If installed, the EIS function
always shows and occupies either the left or right edge of the display.
GDU 700P PFD, MFD, EIS, MFD/EIS
The GDU 700P provides a single PFD, MFD, EIS, or, in single-engine piston EIS, a
combined MFD/EIS function. In some installations, it provides backup PFD or EIS
information in the event that the primary PFD or EIS display fails or malfunctions.
When configured as an MFD/EIS display, engine instruments are dedicated to 40% of
the screen. The remaining screen portion displays all configured MFD options using a
pilot-selectable menu.
GDU 700L PFD, EIS, OR MFD/EIS
The GDU 700L provides a single PFD, piston EIS, or in single-engine piston EIS,
MFD/EIS combined function. When configured as an MFD/EIS display, engine
instruments are dedicated to 40% of the screen. The remaining screen portion
displays all configured MFD options using a pilot-selectable menu.
1-2
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.1
Display Layout
Power Key
Bezel
Photocell
Top SD
Card Slot
Bottom SD
Card Slot
Left Inner
& Outer
Knobs
Right Inner
& Outer
Knobs
Garmin Display Units
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-3
System Description
DISPLAY HARDWARE DESCRIPTIONS
Bezel
Includes the Power key, mechanical knobs, photocell, and
SD card slots. Ledges provide hand stability when performing
data entry and making selections.
Touchscreen
Multi-touch display provides controls for unit operation.
Power Key
Powers the unit on or off. Allows manual transition into display
backup mode.
Photocell
Measures cockpit ambient light level to automatically adjust
display brightness for day and night.
SD Card Slots
Each unit has two SD card slots. Each slot’s purpose depends
on display type.
Inner & Outer
Knobs
Units have a dual concentric knob near the bottom of bezel.
GDU 1060 has two, one on each side. Inner and outer knob
functionality differs according to display features.
1.2
Display Configurations
GDU 1060 DISPLAY CONFIGURATIONS
MFD (40%)/PFD (60%)
MFD (60%)/PFD (40%)
PFD Only
PFD/EIS
MFD/PFD/EIS
1-4
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
GDU 700P DISPLAY CONFIGURATIONS
[1]
EIS Only
PFD Only
MFD Only
EIS/MFD [1]
Single-engine piston EIS only.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-5
System Description
GDU 700L DISPLAY CONFIGURATIONS
Piston EIS Only
PFD Only
Single Engine Piston EIS/MFD
1-6
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.3
System Functions
PFD
MFD
EIS [2]
GDU 700( )/1060
GDU 700P/1060 [3]
GDU 700( )/1060 [3]
• Attitude
• Navigation Map
• Fuel Qty (Main, Aux)
• Airspeed
• Traffic [1]
• RPM/Tach
• Altitude
• Terrain
• Propeller Sync Display
• Vertical Speed
• Charts
• Manifold Pressure
• Turn Coordinator
• Flight Plan
• Oil Pressure
• HSI
• Weather [1]
• Oil Temperature
• HSI Map [4]
• Waypoint
Information
• Fuel Flow
• Lateral and Vertical
Deviation Indicators
• Music Services [1]
• Fuel Calculations
• Terrain Avoidance [1]
• Datalink Weather
Display [1]
• Engine Data [1]
• System Advisories
• Cylinder Operating
Temperatures
(CHT, EGT)
• Radar Altimeter [1]
• Video [1]
• TIT
• Clock
• Autopilot
Annunciations [1]
• Fuel Pressure
• Lean Assist Mode
• Carburetor Air
Temperature
• Flight Director [1]
• Synthetic Vision [1]
• Flight Path Marker
[1]
• Intercooler
Temperatures
(IAT, CDT, Difference)
• System Advisories
• Amps/Volts
• Safety Monitors [1]
• User Selectable Fields
• GPS NAV Status
• User Adjustable
Advisories
• Display Backup [1] [4]
• Torque [5]
• Terrain Avoidance [1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
• TurbineTemperature[5]
Function availability dependent upon aircraft interfaces or enablement.
Displayed engine operating parameters dependent upon configuration.
GDU 700( ) MFD/EIS provides the same MFD and EIS functionality listed with the exception of
weather radar and multi-engine.
Not available for GDU 700L.
Turboprop only.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-7
System Description
Pilot Interface
1.4
Unit Power
The GDU receives power directly from the aircraft’s electrical system. To ensure safe
operation, continuous built-in test features exercise the unit’s processor, memory,
external inputs, and outputs.
System failure annunciations typically disappear within the first 30 seconds after
power-up. Upon power-up, the bezel key backlight momentarily illuminates.
On MFD: The start-up screen presents the unit software version, the name and
status of all installed databases, and controls for selecting a crew profile.
1.4.1
Power Off Options
WARNING
NEVER ATTEMPT TO POWER OFF THE UNIT WHILE AIRBORNE UNLESS
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES DICTATE.
Pushing the Power key once opens a pop-up
menu. Selectable display options allow you to:
• Power off unit
• Close the menu (cancels shutdown)
• Change operating mode to display backup
(if available)
Pushing and holding the Power key for
4 seconds powers off the unit without
safeguards. Shutdown occurs once the timer
reaches zero.
1-8
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.5
SD Card Slot
NOTE
Do not remove or insert an SD card while in flight. Always verify the system
is powered off before inserting or removing an SD card.
Determine which card slot is appropriate for the task.
SD CARD SLOT
TASK
GDU 1060
GDU 700P
GDU 700L
Exporting data logs
Top
Top
Left
Saving system
configurations
Top
Top
Left
Transferring crew profiles
Top
Top
Left
Capturing screen images [1]
Top
Top
Left
Upgrading software [4]
Top
Top
Left
Enabling Flight Stream 510
connectivity [2]
Bottom
Bottom
Right
Updating databases [3]
Top or bottom
Top or bottom
Left or right
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Screen images save to the bottom/right card when the top/left card is unavailable.
Install Flight Stream 510 in a GTN, if available.
While either slot may be used, the bottom/left slot has a faster transfer rate and is
recommended for all database-related tasks.
In software v3.00 and later, an installer unlock card must be present in the bottom/right card
slot to perform a software update.
INSERT AN SD CARD
When inserting an SD card:
1. Verify unit power if off and the slot is empty.
2. Hold card in the proper orientation.
• GDU 1060/700P: label faces left edge of display screen
• GDU 700L: label faces top edge of display screen
3. Ensure back edge of card is flush with display bezel after insertion.
EJECT AN SD CARD
1. Power off the unit.
2. Release the spring latch by pressing lightly on exposed edge of card.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-9
System Description
1.6
Touchscreen
GESTURES
TAP
Touching the screen briefly with a single finger.
Use this gesture for:
• Opening a page or menu
• Activating a command key or data entry field
• Displaying map feature information
• Selecting an option within an application
TAP AND HOLD
Certain momentary controls (e.g., directional arrow
keys) provide a secondary tap and hold function.
Tap the key and hold your finger in place until the
desired action occurs.
Use this gesture for:
• Scrolling with arrow keys
• Enabling Caps Lock
• Increasing/decreasing values continuously
SWIPE
A smooth motion that involves touching an object,
then sliding your finger across the screen and lifting up.
Use this gesture for:
• Viewing and scrolling lists
• Panning across a map or chart display
• Zooming HSI map or rotorcraft PFD VFR map
display (upward and downward swipes only)
FLICK
Swiping the screen in a quick upward or downward
motion. Information moves at a fast speed (faster than
by holding the arrow key), then slows to a stop.
Use this gesture for:
• Scrolling an item list
PINCH & STRETCH
Touch any map or chart with two fingers at the same
time, then bring the fingers close together (pinch) or
spread them apart (stretch). Just remember: stretch to
zoom in and pinch to zoom out.
Use this gesture for:
• Magnifying map features
• Identifying multiple objects in close proximity
• Reading details on a chart
• Magnifying a video image
1-10
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.6.1
Keys
COMMON COMMANDS
Displays Advisories page.
Blinking icon indicates
unread system advisories.
Inputs specified value.
Displays context menus.
Scrolls up.
Returns to previous page.
Scrolls down.
Cancels current function
without inputting data.
Indicates corresponding
item is selected
(e.g., database update)
Allows resizing of the
MFD and PFD screens
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
GDU 1060 MFD/PFD only.
Software version 3.00 and later.
FUNCTION KEYS
Toggle keys turn a specific function on or
off. The current state of the function is
indicated below the key label.
On
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Off
Pilot’s Guide
1-11
System Description
1.6.2
Menus
Fly-out menus and slide over windows group related controls into an expandable
pane, allowing access to multiple functions on a single page.
Fly-out menus slide out from the right side of
the display when an object or menu item is
selected on the underlying page.
Underlying
Page
Hidden
Menu Controls
Underlying
Page
Hidden
1-12
Slide over windows slide up
from the bottom of display.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.6.3
Lists
Scrollable lists group control keys related to a single
function (e.g., selectable range options). When scrolling,
all keys in the list are inactive.
Scroll Bar
Popup lists open to the default
or previously selected value.
Default or Current Setting
1.6.4
Tabs
Tabs group information into
individual panes. Content
includes scrolling lists, data
fields, function keys, or a
combination of controls.
Tabs are located along the
left side or bottom edge of
a pane.
Inactive
Tabs
Lists containing a combination of controls
typically appear within a tab and open to
the first list item.
Toggle
Keys
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Toggle keys either enable or disable list
items. In some cases, Settings or Range
keys provide access to selectable setting
options.
Pilot’s Guide
1-13
System Description
1.6.5
Keypads
The GDU employs multiple keypad types to
serve specific settings and functions.
Numeric
Tapping Layout
changes the format
between ABCDE
and QWERTY.
Alphanumeric
QWERTY
1-14
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.7
Control Knobs
Inner and outer knobs offer an alternative method for
selecting and modifying data without the use of touch keys.
GDU 1060: Each dual-concentric knob serves its own PFD or
MFD display. When the PFD is in full-screen mode, both sets
of dual-concentric knobs serve the PFD.
Outer
Inner
PFD KNOB FUNCTIONS
• Selecting reference controls
Outer Knob
• Cursor placement and initial field/page selections
• Moving cursor forward or backward within data field
Inner Knob
(Turn)
• Selecting reference values
• Inputting data
• Modifying individual characters in data entry field
• Entering current or specified numerical value
Inner Knob
(Push)
• Synchronizing PFD reference to its current value
• Alternating between standard and pilot set barometric
pressure
MFD KNOB FUNCTIONS
• Selecting a page shortcut
Outer Knob
• Cursor placement and initial field/page selections
• Moving cursor forward or backward within data field
• Inputting data
Inner Knob
(Turn)
• Modifying individual characters in data entry field
• Zooming
• Controlling weather radar range
Inner Knob
(Push)
• Entering a specified numerical value
EIS KNOB FUNCTIONS
Outer Knob
• Cursor placement and initial field/page selections
• Moving cursor forward or backward within data field
Inner Knob
(Turn)
• Inputting data
Inner Knob
(Push)
• Entering a specified numerical value
190-01717-10 Rev. H
• Modifying individual characters in data entry field
Pilot’s Guide
1-15
System Description
1.7.1
Knob Function Indicators
A locater bar works in conjunction with the outer knob providing quick access to the
indicated MFD page and/or PFD bug.
MFD
Map
Engine
Traffic
Weather
Terrain
Chart
PFD
Heading
Available pages and
options are dependent
upon configuration.
Barometric Setting
Altitude
Selected Course
Vertical Speed
Indicated Airspeed
Turning the outer knob clockwise or counter-clockwise moves the locater through
displayed menu options. Changes in the current screen configuration may result in a
change of menu options.
Additional icons located to the left or right of the bar indicate available knob
functions for the associated display.
MFD: Active page name is in cyan.
Active MFD
Page
PFD: Selecting any PFD field displays a control menu.
Active
PFD Control
Menu
Selected Field
(Active)
1-16
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.7.2
Screen Captures
Save images to an SD card at any time using a screen capture. Images automatically
save to the “print” folder in the SD card root directory.
1. Insert an SD card into the top or left card slot.
2. Push and hold the right inner knob.
3. With knob depressed, push and release the Power key.
A camera icon momentarily shows in the annunciator bar indicating a successful
screen capture. To view saved images, remove the SD card and open the “print”
folder on a computer.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-17
System Description
1.8
Color Conventions
Red
• Warning conditions
• Operating limits
Yellow
• Cautionary conditions
• Conditional operating ranges
Green
• Safe operating conditions
• Normal operating ranges
• VOR/localizer data
• Engaged modes
White
• Scales and markings
• Current data and values
• Armed modes
Magenta
• GPS data
• Active flight plan legs
• VNAV data
Cyan
• Pilot-selectable references
Gray
• Missing or expired data
• Product unavailable
Blue
• Sky
• Water
Brown
• Ground
1-18
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
Databases
NOTE
The GDU supports SD cards in the FAT32 format only, with capacities
ranging between 8 GB and 32 GB.
Databases are stored in the internal memory of each display. To view update cycles,
or to purchase individual databases or database packages, go to flyGarmin.com.
The TXi system offers three methods for loading and updating databases:
1. Load databases via SD card. The card can be removed after loading.
2. Transfer databases from a GTN or another GDU using Database SYNC.
3. Transfer databases from a mobile device using Database Concierge and a
Flight Stream 510 wireless datacard.
SUPPORTED DATABASES
Airport Directory
Airport facility and FBO information
Basemap
Bodies of water, geopolitical boundary, and road
information
ChartView [1]
Jeppesen terminal procedures
FliteCharts
AeroNav terminal procedures
IGRF [2] [3]
Internal ADAHRS and external AHRS correct for variations
in the earth’s magnetic field by applying calculations
derived from the IGRF database
Navigation
Airport, NAVAID, waypoint, and airspace information
(Garmin or Jeppesen)
Obstacles
Obstacle and wire data
SafeTaxi
Airport surface diagrams
Terrain
Terrain elevation data
[1]
[2]
[3]
Optional third party database.
When updated, the database is packaged with the Navigation database. Not available for
individual download.
For magnetic field model version and part number information, refer to the AHRS section of
the External LRUs page.
For information regarding third party databases, go to jeppesen.com.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-19
System Description
1.9
Database Effective Cycles
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
• External or internal GPS navigator for system to determine database
effectiveness
OR
• Flight Stream 510 wireless datacard
• Garmin Pilot app on a mobile device
FUNCTIONAL LIMITATIONS
• EIS units do not support database functionality
Most databases expire at regular intervals. Exceptions include Basemap and Terrain,
which neither expire nor update on a regular schedule. IGRF updates occur
approximately every five years. Failure to update a database can lead to errors in
heading information.
DATABASE EFFECTIVE STATUS
• Effective upon release
Databases with
no effective
date
Databases with
specified
effective dates
• Transfer occurs prior to database verification at system
start-up
• No automatic transfer if Flight Stream 510 is present
• Includes Basemap and Terrain
• No pilot confirmation or restart required
• Effective during a specific period
• GDU determines database status using the current date
and time from GPS
• Automatic activation occurs on the effective date
On MFD: The start-up page lists all
currently installed databases. Review
this list for current database types,
cycle numbers, and expiration dates.
Yellow text denotes when a
database is:
• Not available
• Installed before its effective
date
• Missing date information
• Past its expiration date
Expired database notifications indicate as system
advisories.
1-20
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.10 Active and Standby Databases
The GDU uses two types of databases: active and standby. Active databases are in
use by the system. Standby databases have not reached the effective date. During
normal operation, information about all active and standby databases are viewable
on the associated tab.
On MFD, tabs are located on System Status page. They are located on Databases
page of the PFD (GDU 700( ) only).
TAB
DISPLAYS
• Information about databases currently in use
ACTIVE
• Information about databases that are not yet effective
STANDBY
• If a standby database is not available, the “No standby
databases found” message displays in the Standby tab
1.11 Manual Updates
FUNCTIONAL LIMITATIONS
• The Database Update page is available only when the aircraft is on ground
1.11.1
Database Update Page
This page presents a list of all available databases. It is accessible at any time for
review purposes or manual database transfers.
To access the page, tap Update.
On MFD, this key resides in the System Status menu.
GDU 700( ) only: On PFD, it resides on the Databases page.
DATABASE SOURCE INDICATION
Connext Icon
A Connext icon indicates when a
database is from Garmin Pilot via
wireless transfer.
No indication means the database is either from an SD card or the unit’s internal
standby queue.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-21
System Description
SELECT ALL DATABASES
Select applicable database(s) for
transfer. If all listed databases
require updating, choose
Select All.
Tapping Select None deselects all
databases.
By default, this page displays only
the databases recommended for
update.
A message informs when no
recommended databases are
available.
After all selections are made, initiate the update process by tapping
Start. GDU automatically restarts once all updates are complete.
SHOW ALL DATABASES
Tapping Show All displays a
complete list of all databases,
including ones that are not yet
effective or that may be older than
the currently active database(s).
For more details about a specific
database, tap Error Info.
1-22
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.12 Automatic Updates
Automatic updates occur
when...
• A newer database is
detected on the SD card or in
the internal standby queue
• A newer database is within
its effective dates
• The aircraft is on ground
When a newer database is available,
follow the on-screen prompts to
complete the update process. PFD
issues a pop-up notification only on the
GDU 700( ). MFD automatically
redirects to the Database Update page.
A status page displays a progress bar
and the name of each database as it
uploads to the GDU. Terrain and chart
databases may require up to 5 minutes
each for transfer. Total transfer time
depends on the SD card type.
The unit automatically restarts once the update is complete. The update is indicated
in the list of currently installed databases.
INSTALL OR UPDATE A DATABASE USING AN SD CARD
1. Download a database onto an SD card.
2. Insert the SD card with the most recent database(s) into the top/right card slot.
3. Power on the GDU.
Selecting Update opens the Database Update
page. A list displays the newest databases
recommended for update.
All newer databases (effective and expired)
transfer from the SD card to the internal
standby queue.
BASEMAP, CHARTVIEW, AND TERRAIN UPDATES
These databases automatically transfer from an SD card without any prompting or
progress indications. They do not require pilot confirmation or a unit restart.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-23
System Description
1.13 Database Concierge
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Flight Stream 510 wireless datacard
• Garmin Pilot app on a mobile device
Database Concierge allows wireless transfer of databases
from a mobile device.
A pilot selects and downloads databases inside the Garmin
Pilot app. Transfers occur once Flight Stream 510 establishes a
wireless connection inside the aircraft.
Database Concierge Transfer Function
• Provides automatic updates for databases with effective dates
• Preloads databases that are not yet effective by placing them in the internal
standby queue
• Supports Database SYNC with capable Garmin avionics
• Displays database type, cycle, effective date, and transfer progress
• Allows manual operation via Start key
• Requires pilot confirmation
TRANSFER A DATABASE USING DATABASE CONCIERGE
1. Purchase database(s) from flyGarmin.com.
2. Open Garmin Pilot and follow the download instructions.
3. Install Flight Stream 510 into the GDU. If the system contains a GTN, install the
datacard into that unit instead.
4. Connect to Wi-Fi.
5. Follow the on-screen prompts.
1-24
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
Database Concierge transfers
databases from the app to
Flight Stream 510. A progress bar
shows when this process is
complete.
GDU either updates or preloads
databases based on their effective
date. A second progress bar
indicates upload status. The unit
automatically restarts upon
database activation.
Tapping Skip cancels any unfinished wireless transfers and initiates the update
process.
GDU activates any databases that completed transfer before the interruption.
Previously selected databases on an SD card or in the internal standby update as well.
The message “Transfers interrupted” displays if no databases are available.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-25
System Description
1.14 Database SYNC
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Not applicable to Terrain database
• Functionality not available for EIS-only configurations
Database SYNC minimizes database maintenance by synchronizing active and
standby databases across all configured LRUs. Once a standby database becomes
effective, each LRU automatically generates an update prompt.
For information regarding database packages, and individual database purchases,
visit flyGarmin.com.
TOGGLE DATABASE SYNC ON OR OFF
Toggling the function off disables Chart Streaming (if enabled).
From the 700P/1060 MFD home screen:
Tap System > System Status > Menu > Database SYNC
From the 700L MFD home screen:
Tap System > System Status > Database Information > Menu > Database
SYNC
From the 700( ) PFD home screen:
Tap Menu > System > PFD Setup > Database SYNC
Database SYNC Transfer Function
• Enables automatic database synchronization across all capable Garmin avionics
(e.g., GTN or G500/G600 legacy flight displays)
• Includes active and standby databases
• Informs you that enabling Database SYNC may overwrite any databases
currently in standby
• Prompts unit restart if a new database is effective and the aircraft is on ground
1-26
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.15 Chart Streaming
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available only when Database SYNC is active and a current chart database
is available
Chart Streaming allows streaming of individual charts on an as-needed basis until
database sync is complete. A typical chart database may take up to one hour to
synchronize across multiple LRUs.
Toggling the function off has no affect on Database SYNC.
Chart Streaming Transfer Function
• Enables automatic streaming of individual charts from the newest chart
database
• LRUs with chart streaming enabled display the most current chart information
• Current charts display on MFD Charts page; chart overlays are available for
display on Map page
• Chart database effective date displays on Charts page when chart expires
• Available for both ChartView and FliteCharts
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-27
System Description
Connectivity
Data logs transfer via Bluetooth® wireless technology. Databases
transfer over Wi-Fi.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Flight Stream 510 wireless datacard (installed in GTN, if available)
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• GDU allows pairing of up to 13 Bluetooth enabled devices, with two
simultaneous device connections
• Auto reconnect function is not available for Android devices
• GDU does not support Flight Stream 510 Phone/SMS and flight plan transfer
functionality
1.16 Flight Stream 510 Setup
Setup page features allow you to:
• View Flight Stream 510 product information
• Enable database updates
• Pair and manage Bluetooth enabled devices
• View and edit Bluetooth enabled device name and Wi-Fi information
Refer to the Information window
when contacting customer service
regarding Flight Stream 510.
Product information includes:
• Software version
• Part number
DATABASES
This feature allows automatic import of available database updates via
Database Concierge.
1-28
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.17 Bluetooth Setup
Depending on display type, Bluetooth device management options may reside on the
Flight Stream page or on a dedicated setup page. Pairing occurs only when the
Bluetooth Setup menu is opened.
Bluetooth Setup information
includes:
• Current Bluetooth device name
• MAC address
• Pairing mode status
BLUETOOTH NAME
This key allows you to enter the name of the Bluetooth enabled device.
PFD only displays: Use the control knobs to enter the device name. Keypad entry is
not available.
EIS only displays: The device name is set up using Garmin Pilot. Manual data entry
is not required.
1.17.1
Managing Paired Devices
To view a list of all paired devices
and their connection status, tap
Manage Paired Devices.
AUTO RECONNECT
This key enables automatic connection between the GDU and the paired device
when the two are within range.
REMOVE
Removing a device from the list means it is no longer paired with the GDU. This
action requires pilot confirmation.
Be sure to remove pairing on both devices before attempting to pair them again.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-29
System Description
1.18 Wi-Fi Setup
Wi-Fi setup information includes:
• Wi-Fi SSID
• Wi-Fi password
• MAC address of both Wi-Fi
module and connected device
(available only after launching
Garmin Pilot)
1.18.1
Connecting to Wi-Fi
Enter the required SSID and password using the provided setup keys.
PFD only displays: Use control knobs for SSID and password entry. Keypad entry is
not available.
1-30
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.18.2
Viewing Wi-Fi Information
Tapping WiFi Info opens an information page.
WI-FI INFO STATUS
Wi-Fi connection status annunciates on the key label when this page is not active.
Flight Stream 510 requires power up.
Wi-Fi is active, but the GDU is waiting to connect with a
paired device.
System detects a connection between the GDU and a paired
device.
Flight Stream 510 requires Garmin Pilot to be opened in
order for database transfer to commence.
This page is accessible from the
Database Update and start-up pages.
Information includes:
• Database Concierge
connection status
• Connected device name
• Database update availability
and instructions
• Wi-Fi SSID and password
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-31
System Description
Pilot Settings
1.19 Display Brightness Control
Turboprop Aircraft
Depending on installation, display
brightness control may transition
between lighting bus and
photocell during engine start.
When you engage the start
switch, display brightness control
switches to photocell. When you
disengage the switch, or after
60 seconds, brightness control
returns to the dimmer bus.
1.19.1
Depending on configuration, display
brightness is controlled using inputs from
the built in photocell, aircraft dimmer
bus, or both. Installer configured curves
determine the amount of change in
brightness that occurs in response to a
control adjustment
If brightness control is not
satisfactory, contact a Garmin
dealer to adjust the lighting curves.
Automatic Brightness Control
Dimming is limited to prevent on screen indications from becoming unreadable. The
built in photocell automatically controls display brightness based on ambient light
levels.
Backlight
Intensity
Level
During automatic control,
the pilot may still adjust
brightness using the
manual offset controls in
the System Backlight
page.
Manual
Offset
Indicator
Decrease
Backlight
1.19.2
Increase
Backlight
The GDU retains manual
offset settings over power
cycles.
Manual Brightness Control
Optionally, the TXi system is configurable to use an aircraft dimming bus for display
brightness control. Upon reaching minimum input level, display brightness reverts to
the photocell. This prevents the display from going black in the event of a dimmer
input failure.
1-32
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.20 System Status Page
The System Status page displays information specific to the GDU and its databases.
Refer to this page when contacting customer service. Information includes:
• Serial number
• System ID
• Main software version
• Database information
VIEW COPYRIGHTS
Tapping this key displays copyright
information for all installed databases.
1.21 Click Volume
If the GDU is wired for audio output, set the click volume to the preferred level.
Percent of maximum volume
Decrease
Volume displays as a percentage of
the maximum volume, with 0%
being muted and 100% being
maximum volume.
Increase
1.22 Clock
Specify the time format and local offset. If a 12 hour or 24 hour clock is selected, tap
Local Offset, and specify the appropriate offset value from UTC. Options include
12 hour, 24 hour, and UTC.
1.23 Weather Display Shortcut
A knob shortcut option is available when there are two or more active weather
sources. Select a weather service and verify shortcut operation. Depending on
configuration, available shortcut options may include:
• Connext Weather
• FIS-B Weather
• SiriusXM Weather
• Stormscope
Weather
Radar
Shortcut
190-01717-10 Rev. H
• Radar
Selecting Radar changes the weather shortcut indicator
to reflect the weather radar option is active.
Pilot’s Guide
1-33
System Description
1.24 Unit Selections
NOTE
Engine gauge, airspeed, and altimeter units are not pilot selectable.
Interfaced equipment may contain unit settings independent of the TXi
system.
The System Units page displays a list of TXi system wide unit settings. Selections are
synchronized across all configured GDUs.
SPECIFY UNIT TYPE
1. Review the current unit selections.
2. Tap the applicable parameter key.
3. Select a unit type.
DISPLAY
SETTINGS
• BARO Pressure
• Distance
PFD
• NAV Angle
• Temperature
• Wind Speed
• Altitude
MFD
• Distance
• NAV Angle
• Temperature
• Distance
EIS [1]
• Fuel Computer [2]
• Temperature
[1]
[2]
1-34
Engine gauge units are not adjustable.
These units are not synchronized with other displays.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
Crew Profiles
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Requires MFD for creating crew profiles, modifications, and deletions
The Manage Crew Profile option allows you to:
• Save TXi system wide and display specific settings
• Create individual profiles for aircraft operated by multiple pilots
• Transfer profiles between aircraft
1.25 Crew Profile Settings
Crew profile settings include both system wide and display specific settings.
Specific display profile settings include the pilot adjustable parameters for each
configured display.
SYSTEM & DISPLAY PROFILE SETTINGS
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
SETTING
• Units
• Nearest Airport Criteria
• Click volume
• Chart Streaming
SYSTEM
• Recently used waypoint lists
• Weather knob shortcut
• Backlight manual offset
• Database SYNC
Synthetic Vision
• All
• HSI Map
HSI
• Map overlays
• Bearing pointers
• Wind Field
PFD
• Clock/Timer
Setup
• Menu Timeout
• CDI/VDI Preview
• BARO SYNC
• Airspeed reference bug status
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-35
System Description
SYSTEM & DISPLAY PROFILE SETTINGS
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
SETTING
• All
Map
• Motion vector
Traffic
• Altitude filter (ABV/BLW/NRM/UNR)
• View
Terrain
• Layers
• Column data fields
Flight Plan
• Map orientation
Datalink weather
products
(SXM, FIS-B, Connext)
MFD
• Layers
• Legend on/off
• FIS-B on/off
• View
Stormscope
• Mode
• Preset group selection
Music
• Music category selection
• EIS Lean Mode (ROP/LOP/TIT)
• Engine advisories (on/off states,
thresholds)
Engine
• Time format (UTC/local)
• Weather knob shortcut
System
• Outside Air Temperature units
• EIS Lean Mode (ROP/LOP/TIT) [1]
EIS
[1]
1-36
• Engine advisories (on/off states,
thresholds)
Engine
Lean mode is not applicable to turboprop installations.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.25.1
Crew Profile Management
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
The system stores a maximum of ten profiles. This includes nine user generated
profiles and one default profile. Both New Profile and Import Profile functions are
unavailable when this limit is reached. It is recommended to have all GDUs online
when managing crew profiles. Profile synchronization is delayed for any LRU not
online at the time a profile change occurs.
Profile management functions are provided in a fly-out menu on the Manage Crew
Profiles page. Available options are based on current profile selection.
Setting modifications are automatically stored within the active crew profile. If no
user generated profile is active, all adjustments are saved to the Default profile. The
Default option is automatically selected when no user-generated crew profile is
imported or defined. New and existing profiles are listed in the Manage Crew Profiles
page.
Delete a Profile
Default
Profile
(Active)
Removes a profile from
all configured units.
Reset Profile
Resets all settings for a
crew to factory default
values.
Create and import
profiles
CREATE NEW PROFILE
A profile name is required to complete operation.
1. Tap New Profile, enter desired profile name.
2. Tapping Create and Activate activates new profile and adds it to list.
User-generated profile
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-37
System Description
ADD CREW PROFILE TO A FULL PROFILE LIST
1. Delete an existing entry from the profile list.
2. Create or import the new profile.
IMPORT A PROFILE
1. Insert an SD card containing a new profile.
2. Tap Import Profile.
3. Select profile to import.
If an imported profile has the same name as the
existing entry, it is possible to overwrite the existing
entry or cancel request.
If imported profile has the same name as the active
profile, overwrite option is not given.
Acknowledge message, then activate a different
profile and try again.
If SD card does not contain importable profiles,
acknowledge message and replace SD card.
EXPORT A PROFILE
Export function writes a selected profile onto an SD card. This function overwrites
any profile on the SD card with the same name. Available options are based on
current profile selection.
ACTIVATE A PROFILE
Select a profile from list and tap Activate. When a profile is active:
• Name of profile turns green (active)
• All inactive profiles display in white text
• Name of active profile appears in Crew Profiles window on Setup page
1-38
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
System Messages
1.26 Alerts Types
The unit generates messages in response to various conditions that may occur.
Alert types are grouped according to the level of urgency and required response.
They display in order of priority, from highest to lowest.
1. Warnings
2. Cautions
3. System and function advisories
1.26.1
Warnings & Cautions
Warnings require immediate attention. A caution indicates the presence of an
abnormal condition that may require pilot action. A warning may follow a caution if
no attempt is made to correct the condition (e.g., altering the aircraft’s path toward
the alerted terrain or obstacle).
1.26.2
System & Function Advisories
Advisories provide status and operating
information.
System advisories display on a dedicated
page or slide over window. Depending on
the number of advisories, this list may be
scrollable.
Function or mode specific advisories
appear as unobstructed annunciations on
the associated display.
System Advisory Window
Mode Advisory Annunciation
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-39
System Description
1.26.3
Alert Annunciations
Alert annunciations are abbreviated messages that indicate an alerted function or
mode. The color of the annunciation depends on the alert type.
• Warnings display in white text on red
background
ALERT COLORS
WARNING
• Cautions display in black text on amber
background
CAUTION
• Function or mode specific advisories display in
black text on white background
ADVISORY
When an alert is triggered, the annunciation flashes by alternating text and
background colors. It turns solid after five seconds. All annunciations remain active
(solid) until the condition is resolved or no longer a threat.
GDU 700( ): Engine annunciations flash indefinitely unless acknowledged by the
pilot.
ANNUNCIATION LOCATION
The location of the annunciation varies according to display and function. On the
PFD, alerts annunciate to the right of the HSI. On the MFD, they annunciate in the
lower right corner of the page. PFD alerts show on all configured PFD units in the TXi
system.
PFD
MFD
Text
Annunciation
Text
Annunciation
Warning Annunciations
(Split Screen Mode)
Informational advisories pertaining to EIS modes and
functions appear in the annunciator bar along the bottom
of the screen.
1-40
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.26.4
Pop-up Alerts
If a warning or caution relating to terrain, traffic, or the backup battery occurs, a
pop-up window may display over the MFD. These pop-ups only appear if the alerted
function’s associated MFD page is not active.
Home Page
Active
PFD Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-up
Alert
Pop-up Alert, GDU 1060
GDU 1060: If the PFD is in full screen mode during an alert, a flashing page access
key (Terrain or Traffic) replaces the MFD key.
Terrain
Key
PFD Full Screen
Mode
Terrain
Warning
Annunciation
Warning Indications
(Full Screen Mode)
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-41
System Description
Each pop-up alert contains:
Pop-up Alert Priority
In the event of simultaneous
alerts, pop-up windows display in
the following order:
1. Terrain alerts
• Enlarged view of the alerted threat
location
• Alert annunciation
• Alert inhibit information, if applicable
• Control key for closing the pop-up
window
2. Traffic alerts
3. Battery alerts
• Direct access key to associated MFD page
Enlarged Map View
Threat Location
Indication
Alert Annunciation
Close Pop-up
Window Key
Go to <Page> Key
Alert Inhibit
Information
To open the indicated MFD page, tap Go to <Page>.
To acknowledge the alert and return to previous page view, tap Close.
BATTERY POP-UP ALERTS
These pop-ups alert to backup battery
status. Available options are dependent
on unit and alert type.
Tapping OK acknowledges the alert and
closes the pop-up.
GDU 700P/1060
1-42
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
GDU 700P/1060: The View Battery Status key provides direct access to the
External LRU page.
Battery charge and
temperature status display
at the top of the LRU list.
GDU 700L: On PFD, battery pop-up alerts display in one of two locations depending
on the state of the battery and the aircraft.
Cautions display vertically
along the left side of the
screen.
These alerts may occur in
flight. They do not display
when the PFD menu is
open.
Vertical Pop-up Alert
Loss of aircraft power
alerts display horizontally
in front of the HSI.
This alert occurs only on
ground. It displays
whether or not the menu
is open.
Horizontal Pop-up Alert
1.26.5
Aural Alerts
Some alerts are accompanied by an aural voice message. Voice gender is configured
during installation. To determine which alerts provide aural indications, refer to the
applicable alerts table.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-43
System Description
1.27 Advisories
Advisories are system-related messages that display across all connected GDUs in the
TXi system. The alert includes the ID relative to the display.
• Most recent advisories are at the top
of list
• View-once advisories remain in
queue until viewed by the pilot
• Persistent (or conditional) advisories
remain active until the indicated
condition is resolved
• Acknowledging an advisory on one
GDU automatically acknowledges
the message across all TXi units
All advisories are logged in the unit’s internal storage. This log may be viewed in
configuration mode and exported to an SD card.
ADVISORY KEY
Tapping the Advisory key once displays the advisory list. Tapping it
again acknowledges all active advisories and closes the list.
• Flashes in navigation bar when a new advisory is present
• Turns solid once all active advisories are acknowledged
• No longer displays after all active advisories are cleared
1-44
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.27.1
Audio Advisories
Contact the dealer for all audio related issues.
ADVISORY
CONDITION
A failure occurred with audio device.
Audio inoperative.
An audio clip does not play.
Communication with audio device is lost.
1.27.2
Battery Advisories
ADVISORY
CONDITION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Battery capacity test
failure.
Service required.
Acknowledge pop-up alert.
Contact dealer for support.
Annual capacity test
overdue.
Testing required.
Acknowledge pop-up alert.
Contact dealer for support.
<GDU> battery
unavailable:
communication lost.
Battery communication
is lost.
Service required.
Acknowledge pop-up alert.
Contact dealer for support.
<GDU> battery
unavailable: fault
detected.
A battery fault is
present.
Service required.
Acknowledge pop-up alert.
Contact dealer for support.
<GDU> battery
unavailable: power
output failed.
Battery power output
failure.
Service required.
Acknowledge pop-up alert.
Contact dealer for support.
<GDU> on battery
power for
<MM:SS>.
The indicated GDU is
operating in battery
mode.
Ensure that the aircraft is in a
safe state. Correct the issue
to restore electrical power to
the GDU.
<GDU> battery
unavailable:
capacity test
required.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-45
System Description
1.27.3
Database Advisories
ADVISORY
CONDITION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
AHRS 1/2 magnetic
model database
needs update.
AHRS 1/2 magnetic field
model database is out of
date. Occurs only when
the aircraft is on ground.
Update IGRF database
according to instructions in
the "Databases" section.
The indicated database
is approaching
expiration (PFD-only
displays).
If available, load the next
cycle of database into
standby.
The indicated database
is expired (PFD-only
displays).
Update indicated database, if
necessary.
<GDU>
<Navigation/
Terrain/Obstacle>
database
unavailable.
The indicated database
is unavailable or corrupt.
Re-download and install the
indicated database on the
GDU. Contact a Garmin
dealer for support.
<Navigation/
Terrain /Obstacle>
databases do not
match.
Two or more TXi GDUs
have a different version
of the indicated
database.
Update the indicated
database. For information
about all installed databases,
go to the System Status page.
<GDU>
<Navigation/
SafeTaxi/Obstacle>
database expires on
<date>.
<GDU> <SafeTaxi/
Basemap> database
unavailable.
The indicated database
is corrupt (PFD-only
displays).
The indicated database
is unavailable (PFD-only
displays).
Re-download and install the
indicated database, Contact a
Garmin dealer for support.
The charts database is
approaching expiration.
If available, load the next
cycle of the charts database
into standby.
The charts database is
expired
Appears only on units
with an MFD.
Update the database if
necessary for operation.
<GDU> Chart
database
incomplete. Some
charts unavailable.
Charts database
verification failure.
Re-download and install the
indicated database. Contact a
Garmin dealer for support.
Chart database
unavailable.
The configured charts
database is unavailable
(MFD displays).
Re-download and install the
indicated database, Contact a
Garmin dealer for support.
Chart database
expires on <date>.
1-46
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
ADVISORY
CONDITION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Chart streaming
unavailable. Using
installed chart
database.
Chart streaming is not
available. The GDU
reverted to the currently
installed charts.
Open the System Status page
and check database
synchronization status. If the
problem persists, contact a
Garmin dealer for support.
Database SYNC in
progress. View
System Status page
for more info.
Database
synchronization is in
progress.
Wait for database
synchronization to complete.
Restart the GDU before
attempting to use new
databases.
1.27.4
Emergency Descent Mode Advisories
ADVISORY
CONDITION
Emergency Descent
Mode ACTIVATE
switch inoperative.
EDM switch inoperative.
Emergency Descent
Mode automatic
activation
unavailable. Service
required.
EDM cabin pressurization
is enabled on GDU, but
GMC 605 is not
providing cabin pressure
altitude.
Emergency Descent
Mode unavailable.
Service required.
EDM is enabled on GDU,
but not supported by
GMC 605.
Emergency Descent
Mode automatic
activation is
inhibited.
Auto EDM toggle key in
the PFD Setup menu is
off.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Enable the Auto EDM
function. On PFD:
Tap Menu > Auto EDM.
1-47
System Description
1.27.5
Engine System Advisories
ADVISORY
CONDITION
<High/Low> <gauge
name> advisory
(e.g., High Oil
Temperature, Low
Battery Voltage).
The indicated engine
parameter exceeds
pilot-specified value.
EGT Difference
advisory. [1]
Pilot-specified EGT Diff is
exceeded by one or more
engines.
CHT Cooling
advisory. [1]
A cylinder’s cooling rate
is faster than
pilot-specified CHT
cooling rate.
Low EST Fuel
Remaining advisory.
Estimated fuel on board
is below pilot-specified
limit.
Low Endurance
advisory.
Remaining flight
endurance is below
pilot-specified limit.
[1]
1-48
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Verify that parameter is within
the operating limitations
defined in the POH.
Piston installations only.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.27.6
Terrain Advisories
ADVISORY
CONDITION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Terrain/TAWS alerting
configuration is invalid.
Service TAWS.
Invalid config.
Fixed-Wing/Rotorcraft
mismatch. The GDU’s
aircraft setting conflicts
with the current external
TAWS configuration.
Contact a Garmin dealer for
support.
SVT could not be
enabled.
The SVT feature cannot
be unlocked with the
current SD card.
Verify that the SVT feature
unlock card is inserted in the
GDU. If necessary, contact a
Garmin dealer for support.
SVT has been
successfully
enabled. Restart all
GDUs to complete
enablement.
The SVT feature is
enabled during the
current power cycle.
To complete feature
enablement, restart all
configured GDUs.
<GDU> terrain
database resolution
insufficient.
Terrain database
resolution does not
support the current
terrain alerting
configuration
(rotorcraft only).
Download and install the
2.9 arc-second Terrain
database.
SVT Disabled
Outside terrain database
coverage area.
Contact a Garmin dealer for
database options.
If SVT is desired, do one of
the following:
Terrain/SVT Free
Trial Flight time
remaining: XX HRS
Terrain Settings Menu
displays the flight hours
remaining in the
SVT free trial period.
• Contact a Garmin dealer
to complete feature
enablement within the
11 hour free trial period
• Visit flyGarmin.com and
purchase the feature
enablement
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-49
System Description
1.27.7
Traffic System Advisories
The following advisories pertain to various traffic system failures.
ADVISORY
CONDITION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1090ES traffic
receiver fault.
ADS-B LRU reports that
it is unable to receive
1090 Extended Squitter
traffic.
Service required. Contact
dealer for support.
ADS traffic alerting
function
inoperative.
The ADS-B LRU reports a
traffic alerting failure.
Service required. Contact
dealer for support.
ADS traffic function
inoperative.
The ADS-B LRU reports a
failure with the ADS-B
Traffic input.
Service required. Contact
dealer for support.
TAS/TCAS function
inoperative.
TAS/TCAS device reports
a traffic failure.
Communication with the
TAS/TCAS device is lost.
Reset the TCAS device.
Contact dealer for support.
The TAS/TCAS device is
in standby mode for
longer than 60 seconds
while airborne.
If traffic alerts are desired,
enable the operating mode
of the traffic device.
The ADS-B LRU reports a
critical fault and is
inoperative.
Service required. Contact
dealer for support.
Communication with the
ADS-B LRU is lost.
Service required. Contact
dealer for support.
UAT fault.
The UAT LRU reports a
low battery or fan fault.
Service required. Contact
dealer for support.
UAT traffic/data
receiver fault.
The ADS-B LRU reports
that it is unable to
receive UAT traffic and
FIS-B data.
Service required. Contact
dealer for service.
TCAS RA display
unavailable on VSI.
Expand <GDU> to
full screen mode to
restore. [1]
The GDU is operating in
display backup mode,
and the current VSI
format is not able to
display RAs.
Change the VSI type by
expanding the PFD using the
FULL key.
TAS/TCAS system in
standby.
Traffic/FIS-B
functions
inoperative.
[1]
1-50
TCAS II equipped aircraft only.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.27.8
Satellite Service Advisories
The following advisories pertain to various satellite service conditions and failures. For
support regarding all satellite service advisories, contact a Garmin dealer.
ADVISORY
CONDITION
Connext weather receiver
inoperative.
Communication with the GSR 56 is lost. The
satellite weather service is in operative.
Connext weather service not
registered.
GSR 56 weather service requires registration for
operation.
SiriusXM receiver inoperative.
1.27.9
SiriusXM receiver failure.
Communication with the GDL 69/69A is lost.
PFD Advisories
The following advisories pertain to various conditions and devices associated with the
PFD.
ADVISORY
ADC 1/2 error
correction
inoperative.
CONDITION
The indicated ADC
reports that airspeed
error correction is
unavailable.
The indicated ADC
reports that altitude
error correction (i.e.,
SSEC) is unavailable.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Contact dealer for service.
The primary ADS-B
traffic source is not
available. GDU is relying
on data from backup
source.
Contact a Garmin dealer for
support.
AHRS 1/2 not
receiving GPS
aiding.
The indicated AHRS is
not receiving GPS data
from any source.
Ensure that the navigator(s) is
on and receiving a GPS
signal.
Check the AFMS for
limitations.
Contact dealer for service.
<GDU> air data
input failure. VNE is
uncorrected.
The indicated GDU is not
receiving temperature or
pressure altitude data.
Applicable to rotorcraft
only.
Refer to airspeed limitations
placard for applicable VNE.
<GDU> ADS-B in
traffic does not
match
configuration.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-51
System Description
ADVISORY
<GDU> demo
mode, do not use in
flight.
CONDITION
The unit is in
demonstration mode.
The indicated GPS
source failed.
GPS 1/2 inoperative.
Communication with the
indicated GPS is lost.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
To exit demo mode:
Cycle power to the GDU. If
the problem persists, contact
dealer for service.
Operating the GDU in demo
mode during flight is
prohibited.
Ensure that the navigator(s) is
on and receiving a GPS
signal.
Switch to an alternate
navigation source.
Contact dealer for service.
NAV 1/2
inoperative.
The indicated NAV
source is failed, or input
data is not received.
Switch to an alternate
navigation source.
<LRU> reports
service required.
The indicated LRU
reports an internal fault
and requires service.
Appears only when the
aircraft is on ground.
Contact dealer for service.
Reset altitude
preselector to
enable VPATH
descent.
TOD ahead.
Vertical deviation is
available and the
selected altitude is
< 75 ft below current
altitude.
Appears only for aircraft
equipped with GFC 600.
Lower the selected altitude to
at least 75 ft below the
current aircraft altitude.
<GDU> backlight
calibration lost.
The GDU cannot read
LED calibration data, or
the data is corrupt.
Sunlight readability may
be degraded.
Appears only when the
aircraft is on ground.
Contact dealer for service.
<GDU> controller
unavailable.
Communication with
GCU 485 is lost. Appears
only when the aircraft is
on ground.
Operate the indicated GDU
using the touchscreen
controls.
1-52
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
ADVISORY
CONDITION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Service required.
The system or unit
requires service. Appears
only when the aircraft is
on ground.
Contact dealer for service.
Service soon.
The system or unit
detects an internal fault
but continues to
function. Appears only
when the aircraft is on
ground.
Contact dealer for service.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-53
System Description
1.27.10 System Hardware Advisories
ADVISORY
CONDITION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
The indicated key is
stuck on GCU 485.
Push the indicated key again.
If the key remains stuck, use
the corresponding
touchscreen controls.
Contact dealer for service.
<GDU> controller
<HDG/BARO/VS>
knob-push stuck.
The indicated knob is
stuck on GCU 485.
Push the indicated knob
again. If the knob remains
stuck, use the corresponding
touchscreen controls.
Contact dealer for service.
<GDU> controller
has multiple stuck
controls.
The unit detects multiple
stuck controls on the
GCU 485.
Use the touchscreen controls
for all manual operations.
Contact dealer for service.
<GDU> cooling fan
failed.
The indicated GDU
detects a cooling fan
fault.
PFD/MFD coloration may
be incorrect.
The backlight may dim
to reduce power and
heat.
Extended operation at high
temperatures is not
recommended as damage to
the unit may occur.
Contact dealer for service.
<GDU> display hot,
display dimmed.
Unit temperature
exceeds the over
temperature threshold.
Decrease cabin temperature
and increase cabin airflow
near the GDU. If the problem
persists, contact the dealer
for service.
<GDU>
<left/right/both>
knob-push stuck.
The indicated GDU
knob(s) is stuck.
Use the touchscreen controls
for all manual operations.
Electronic Stability
Protection failed.
Garmin Mode Controller
signals an ESP system
fault.
Consult the pilot’s guide for
the Garmin Mode Controller.
<GDU> controller
<ALT
ARM/GPSS/CDI/VS
ENG> key stuck.
1-54
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
ADVISORY
<GDU> unable to
read
<top/bottom/left/
right> datacard.
CONDITION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
The SD card in the
indicated slot is
unreadable or corrupt
(i.e., data is unavailable).
Reformat the SD card using
an external computer.
Re-insert the SD card in the
slot.
If the problem persists,
contact the dealer for service.
The SD card is missing
from the indicated slot.
Re-insert the SD card in the
slot.
User ejects Flight Stream
510 wireless datacard.
Network connection
lost.
Restart GDU to reconnect.
1.27.11 Weather Service Advisories
ADVISORY
Possible severe
weather ahead.
Check Weather
Radar.
Stormscope
inoperative.
CONDITION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Weather alert detected
within +/- 10 degrees of
the aircraft heading. This
advisory does not appear
when the Weather Radar
page is active on any TXi
unit.
To view information about
severe weather in the current
flight path, open the
Weather Radar page.
The GDU is not receiving
data from the
Stormscope unit.
Stormscope reports a
failure status.
Consult the appropriate
third-party documentation.
Weather radar
needs service.
Weather radar reports a
degraded or inoperative
condition exists.
Appears only when the
aircraft is on ground.
Contact dealer for service.
Weather radar
inoperative.
The unit is not receiving
weather radar data.
Contact dealer for service.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-55
System Description
1.28 LRU Failure Annunciations
LRU fail annunciations are designed to be immediately recognizable. If an LRU failure
occurs, a red or amber “X” appears over the associated flight instrument(s) or data
field(s). For additional information regarding pilot responses to LRU failures, consult
the AFMS.
The annunciation color is determined by instrument type.
• Red “X” displays over primary flight instruments and data fields
• Amber “X” displays over non-primary flight instruments
1.28.1
PFD Failure Annunciations
During power-up, certain flight instruments are invalid until the associated
equipment completes initialization. Data fields (e.g., TAS, GS, SAT) display only
dashes when the input source is not available.
Attitude Data
Invalid or
Unavailable
Altitude Data
Invalid or
Unavailable
Airspeed Data
Invalid or
Unavailable
Vertical Speed
Data Invalid or
Unavailable
Input Source
Unavailable
PFD
If an instrument remains flagged after one minute, check the status of the associated
LRU, then contact a Garmin dealer for additional support. For Garmin LRUs, go to
the External LRUs page and note any failed LRUs.
INDICATOR
ANNUNCIATION AND CONDITION
Airspeed
Annunciation: Red “X”
Condition: Display is not receiving airspeed data from ADC.
Altitude
Annunciation: Red “X”
Condition: Display is not receiving altitude data from ADC.
Attitude
Annunciation: Red “X”
Condition: Display is not receiving attitude and heading
information from the AHRS.
Vertical
Speed
Annunciation: Amber “X”
Condition: Display is not receiving vertical speed data from
ADC.
HDG FAIL
Annunciation: Red rectangle with white text “HDG FAIL”
Condition: AHRS indicates that the magnetic heading value is
invalid.
1-56
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.28.2
EIS Failure Annunciations
An LRU failure annunciates on the EIS when instrument sensory data become invalid
or unavailable.
Gauge values do not display
when the gauge is inactive.
Sensor Data Invalid
or Unavailable
In addition to an amber “X,”
voltage meters and fuel
management instruments
display a message if the
associated sensor requires
configuration or calibration.
Not Configured
Not Calibrated
EIS Gauge Strip
INDICATOR
ANNUNCIATION AND CONDITION
Annunciations: Amber “X”; SHUNT/BUS NOT CNFGD
Voltmeter
Condition: The shunt load meter is not configured for
operation.
Fuel
Quantity
Annunciations: Amber “X”; FUEL QTY NOT CALIB
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Condition: A fuel quantity calibration is required.
Pilot’s Guide
1-57
System Description
Logs
1.29 Flight Data Logging
The data logging function is capable of storing approximately
100 hours of flight data in the unit’s internal memory. This
information is available for export to an SD card for later analysis.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• SD card for external data logging
• Flight Stream 510 wireless datacard for data streaming
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Engine exceedance logs are available only for turbine aircraft
• External data logging stops when the SD card is full.
Data Logging Function
• Generates log files automatically upon unit power-up
• Records various parameters related to aircraft flight instruments, engine
indications, and configuration
• Streams logged flight and engine data to Garmin Pilot when Flight Stream 510
is present
• Writes logged data to an SD card if one is present in the top/left slot
• Overwrites oldest files when the internal log reaches capacity
• Saves files in the .csv format and stores them in the “data_log” folder
FILE NAMING CONVENTIONS
Log file names provide a useful reference to aid data analysis. They include:
• Log start date and time
• Identifier of the nearest waypoint at the indicated start time
log_YYMMDD_HHMMSS_WPT.csv
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Nearest Waypoint
Identifier
(at start of log)
Files with the name “log_000101_0000XX_____.csv” do not contain a valid date
and time stamp. These logs may include data recorded during installation.
1-58
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
Data Logging at a Glance
Flight Stream present
GDU streams data to
Garmin Pilot†
Flight Stream present
GTN streams data to
Garmin Pilot†
To automatically upload
data to flyGarmin:
Install Flight Stream into
GDU or GTN
Upon power up, the GDU...
• Begins logging flight and
engine data automatically
• Stores the data in its internal
memory
• Writes the data to an SD card
(if present in top/left slot)‡
If Flight Stream is present in GTN
• GDU transfers logs to GTN,
which then streams the
data to Garmin Pilot
• GTN is the preferred
location for Flight Stream
installation
† Pilot setup required. ‡ No action required.
What happens if there’s a power interruption?
Data logging stops if power is lost. All data recorded up to that point remains
stored in the internal memory. Data is not recorded for the duration of the outage.
When GDU reboots, logging automatically resumes with a new log file.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-59
System Description
1.29.1
Exporting to SD Card
NOTE
Do not eject the SD card while the export function is in progress. Wait until
the Export Data Log key is available before ejecting the card.
Exportable parameters are dependent on aircraft type.
1. Insert an SD card into top/left slot.
2. Power on GDU.
3. Go to the Logs page.
4. Tap Export Data Log.
During export, the Export Data Log key is
unavailable (gray). It becomes available once
export is complete.
Export in Progress
What if I forget to insert my SD card
before flight?
Internal flight and engine data logging occurs
regardless of whether an SD card is present.
After your flight, you may insert a card and
download log files using the Export Data Log
command.
With the aircraft safely on ground:
1. Power off unit.
2. Insert card.
3. Power on unit.
4. Tap System > Logs > Export Data Log.
Wait for the export to complete before
ejecting the SD card.
1-60
Pilot’s Guide
Once the files are exported
onto SD card, you may
transfer the log files to your
personal logbook on
flyGarmin.com.
Duration varies
depending on the
number of files present.
For lengthy transfers, it
may be necessary to run
the engine or operate
on ground power until
the export is complete.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
TRANSFER DATA FROM SD CARD TO YOUR ONLINE LOGBOOK
The Logbook tab provides functions for creating and
viewing multiple logbook entries.
To create a logbook and upload data:
1. Sign in to your flyGarmin.com account.
2. Select Logbook > Setup.
3. Select Add Aircraft Type.
4. Provide all necessary aircraft type details, then select Save Aircraft Type.
5. Provide all necessary settings and pilot information, then select Save Settings.
6. Select Import from Spreadsheet.
7. Download the provided spreadsheet templates in the appropriate format. Log
entries and aircraft type data each require a dedicated spreadsheet.
8. Transfer your data from the SD card to the spreadsheets.
9. Save each spreadsheet in the .csv format.
10.Upload each .csv file using the associated Import command.
To upload flight logs to an existing logbook entry:
1. Select Logbook > Entries > Upload Flight Logs.
2. Select and upload the log files according to the onscreen instructions.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-61
System Description
1.29.2
Streaming to Garmin Pilot
The unit automatically streams logged flight data to the
Garmin Pilot app when Flight Stream 510 is present and paired to
a supported tablet or phone.
The data uploads to
flyGarmin.com upon
connecting to Wi-Fi
with Internet.
Logged flight and
engine data streams
to Garmin Pilot.
Your portable device
downloads the data
upon connecting to
Flight Stream 510.
This includes any
previous flights not
already downloaded.
What happens if I forget to bring my tablet on the flight?
No need to worry. During flight, GDU records log data to the internal storage
and SD card (if present). The next time you fly with your tablet, the data will
stream to Garmin Pilot. This includes all previously recorded flights. The device
downloads the data upon connecting to Flight Stream 510.
1-62
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.30 Exceedance Logging
Unlike flight data logging, which records parameters at a specific
rate, exceedance logs record information about a specific gauge
when its value exceeds a threshold.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Turboprop EIS enablement
OR
• Fixed wing aircraft with variable VNE
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Engine exceedances apply to turboprop aircraft only
• Exceedance viewer can acknowledge entries on only one GDU at a time
Not all gauges have exceedance logging. Availability varies depending on airframe
and engine.
Exceedance Recording Function
• Generates an exceedance file after a gauge parameter exceeds its maximum
allowable time at an elevated level
• Engine exceedances record in-depth data about the exceeded gauge, and
contextual details about other parameters during that time
• Advisories notify 30 seconds after the exceedance ends (during flight), and
once the aircraft is on ground
• Entries are available for viewing on the dedicated summary page
Exceedances are installer configured to match the aircraft limitations in the POH.
Pilots are responsible for knowing and respecting all aircraft and engine
limitations.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-63
System Description
Exceedance Gauges
• Torque
• Prop RPM
• NG/N1
• Turbine Engine Temperature
• Oil Temperature
Many engine gauges have a maximum
allowable time limit that the parameter
may operate at an elevated level. This
"grace period" is indicated on the
gauge’s associated countdown timer.
Log entries do not generate until after
this timer expires.
The duration of the exceedance is the
amount of time that the indicated
parameter exceeds the limit, which
includes the grace period time.
• Oil Pressure
• Fuel Pressure
Parameter
Name
Each log entry includes the parameter
name, and the date, time, and
duration of the exceedance.
Date &
Time
Duration
Exceedances Summary Page
1-64
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
INCOMPLETE ENTRIES
If GDU loses power while recording
an exceedance, the system marks
the duration as “Unknown.”
Incomplete log files contain data recorded up until the time of the interruption.
Some fields are not available due to the GDU not having knowledge of parameters at
the end of the exceedance.
1.30.1
Exceedance Alerts
An advisory informs that an exceedance
alert is available for viewing in the data log.
These alerts occur 30 seconds after the
exceedance ends and upon landing.
Notifications persist until all exceedances
are acknowledged.
ACK Alert
UNACK Alert
Tapping this key acknowledges the
corresponding alert. An alert
symbol indicates acknowledgment
is required.
Tapping this key unacknowledges
the corresponding alert.
Unacknowledged entries rise to the
top of the summary page.
ACKNOWLEDGE AN EXCEEDANCE ALERT
To view and acknowledge the exceedance advisory:
1. Go to the Logs page.
2. Tap Exceedances.
3. Review the list of alert entries.
4. Tap ACK for each unacknowledged entry.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-65
System Description
1.30.2
Exceedance Details
Select an exceedance file to
view gauge details.
Duration and highest value
are useful for determining
whether maintenance
actions are required.
The provided values of
other engine parameters
may be useful when
determining if an
exceedance resulted from
sensor testing or failure.
Exceedance Log Data
• Gauge and exceeded parameter
• Date & time of occurrence
• Duration (total amount of time the
parameter exceeded the limit, which
includes the grace period time)
The GDU uses an internal
circular log to store
exceedances entries for
100 power cycles that have
had an exceedance. The
user should periodically
export the exceedance log
to SD card.
• Highest gauge value
• Power cycle
• Max parameter value during exceedance
period
• Parameter value at end of exceedance
• Value of other engine parameters at
beginning of exceedance
• Any interruptions (e.g., power loss)
• Completeness of data
• Alert state (i.e., acknowledged or
unacknowledged)
1.30.3
If date and time
parameters are not
available (e.g., during
engine start when the
navigator has yet to
acquire a GPS signal),
use the power cycle
parameter value to
narrow down the time
of occurrence.
Exporting to SD Card
Exportable parameters are dependent on aircraft type.
1. Insert an SD card into top/left slot.
2. Power on GDU.
3. Go to the Logs page.
4. Tap Export Data Log.
1-66
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
Compatible Equipment
1.31 Line Replaceable Units
SYSTEM REQUIRED LRUs (PFD)
ADAHRS or ADC with AHRS
GMU 44/44B
GTP 59
Garmin GPS navigator
The TXi system consists of multiple
LRUs, which are installed behind the
instrument panel or in a separate
avionics bay. Their modular design
aids system maintenance and unit
replacement.
SYSTEM OPTIONAL LRUs
Backup GPS antenna
GAD 43/43e adapter
GBB 54 battery
Optional LRUs may include
compatible equipment from either
Garmin or a third party
manufacturer.
GCU 485 PFD controller
GEA 110 engine airframe interface [1]
GEA 71 engine airframe interface [2]
OPTIONAL INTERFACES
Autopilot/flight director
GDL 69/69A SiriusXM data link
Some LRUs provide features that
require registration and/or
enablement prior to activation.
GDL 88/GTX 345 ADS-B transceiver
GSR 56 satellite data link
Radar altimeter
Stormscope
GTX 330 or
335 mode S transponder (TIS-A)
TAS/TCAS/TCAS II
Airborne weather radar
VHF NAV and glideslope receiver
DME
ADF
[1]
[2]
Piston aircraft only.
Turboprop aircraft only.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-67
System Description
1.31.1
LRU Status
Devices that interface to the system via Ethernet display product information on the
System Status page. Some interfaced equipment provide controls for product
registration, enablement or viewing detailed status information. For additional
information, touch More Info.
The device is configured and communicating properly
The device is not available and is not configured or it is not
communicating properly
1.31.2
Integrated Standby Instrument - Piston
Aircraft
An integrated standby instrument configuration consists of two GDU 700Ps, each
with separate AHRS/ADC sensors. One display serves as the PFD, the other as EIS,
MFD, or MFD/EIS. When activated, the display backup switch forces both displays
into their display backup mode of operation.
The GBB 54 backup battery provides power to the PFD and sensors in the event of
primary aircraft power failure. Both displays monitor and compare independent
attitude, altitude, and airspeed data. The EIS, MFD, or MFD/EIS automatically displays
its backup primary flight information when:
1. Either display detects a miscompare between attitude, altitude, or airspeed
parameters.
2. Communication between displays is lost.
3. The display backup toggle switch is active.
This configuration provides the following functionality, which satisfies the backup
instrumentation requirements.
The MFD, EIS, or MFD/EIS behaves as follows:
• An MFD will transition to a full-screen PFD display
• An EIS will transition to a split-screen PFD/EIS display
• An MFD/EIS will transition to a split-screen PFD/EIS display
1-68
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.31.3
Standby Instruments
Except for installations limited to VFR, PFD installations require standby attitude,
altitude, and airspeed instruments. Several types of standby instruments are
acceptable, including individual analog instruments and certain electronic standby
indicators.
STANDBY ATTITUDE INSTRUMENT
FUNCTIONAL LIMITATIONS
• Available functionality dependent upon installation and configuration
settings
• G5 standby (not part of GFC 500 system) synchronization functionality (an
optional capability) requires installation of GAD 29B adapter
GFC 500
Present
G5 FUNCTION
• Backup autopilot control and GPS coupling
• Standby attitude display
Not present • Standby attitude display
The G5 is an optional electronic flight instrument capable of operating as a
standalone flight display or as a fully integrated standby instrument.
G5 Standby Instrument Features
• Mirrors GDU control settings for Barometric Correction and Selected Course
G5 Features when Installed with GFC 500 system
• Automatic synchronization of the following PFD controls: Selected Airspeed,
Selected Altitude, Selected Heading, and Selected Vertical Speed
• Mirrors GDU control settings for Barometric Correction and Selected Course
• Displays CDI navigation source selection data received from the GDU
To initiate synchronization, set the G5 barometric pressure setting to match
corresponding control setting on the GDU. Both units remain in sync until the
barometric pressure setting is manually adjusted on the G5.
Synchronization occurs after a short delay. The duration of this delay varies
depending on which unit is attempting to sync.
CONDITION
SYNCING OCCURS...
Pilot adjusts barometric setting on G5 to
match corresponding correction control
setting on GDU.
After 5 seconds
Pilot adjusts barometric correction control
setting on GDU to match corresponding
setting on the G5.
After 1 minute
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-69
System Description
1.31.4
PFD Controller
FUNCTIONAL LIMITATIONS
• Applicable to PFD only
• Selecting a data field does not automatically open control menu
An optional GCU 485 PFD controller provides dedicated PFD controls. Although
control of PFD functions is available using the GDU knobs and touchscreen, the PFD
controller provides dedicated knobs for heading, altitude, vertical speed, airspeed,
and BARO setting. Dedicated keys are provided for CDI source selection, GPSS
emulation mode, altitude capture arming, and vertical speed mode engagement.
If configured, the PFD controller is used to control a Standby PFD.
GCU 485 Features
• Control knobs offer alternative ways to adjust reference bugs and barometric
settings
• Push button configuration depends on the interfacing autopilot: CDI, GPSS,
ARM, and ENG
• Lighting may be controlled by the aircraft lighting or the internal photocell
(dependent upon configuration)
PFD CONTROLLER OPTIONS
CONTROL
1-70
FUNCTION
ALT
Sets the selected altitude bug.
HDG
Sets the selected heading bug.
BARO
Sets the selected barometric pressure value. Pushing
the knob reverts the setting to standard.
IAS
Sets the selected indicated airspeed.
VS
Sets the selected vertical speed.
ARM
Arms the autopilot altitude capture function.
CDI
Changes the NAV source for the CDI.
ENG
Engages the autopilot vertical speed mode.
GPSS
Engages or disengages GPSS mode.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.31.5
Backup Battery
An optional GBB 54 backup battery provides emergency power to a GDU display,
integrated ADAHRS, and a single GEA 110. The backup battery is mounted remotely
and provides power when aircraft power is unavailable. This allows for continued
PFD, MFD, and EIS functionality when aircraft electrical power is lost.
LRU
DISPLAY
PFD
GBB 54
Alternate emergency
power source for
GDU 700( ).
1.31.6
FUNCTION
Battery availability and
charge/discharge status
MFD
EIS
ADC & AHRS
The ADC and AHRS sense air data and aircraft attitude for display and use by other
systems. AHRS units have a magnetometer interface for determining magnetic
heading. ADC units have an OAT probe interface for measuring outside air
temperature.
LRU
GDC 72
GDC 74
ADC
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
• Air temperature
PFD
• Airspeed
• Altitude
• Vertical speed
ADC
• Air temperature
• Airspeed
• Altitude
GSU 75/75B
Integrated ADAHRS
PFD
• Vertical speed
AHRS
• Attitude
• Heading
• Rate of turn
• Slip/skid/yaw
GRS 77
GRS 79
AHRS
190-01717-10 Rev. H
• Attitude
PFD
• Heading
• Rate of turn
• Slip/skid
Pilot’s Guide
1-71
System Description
1.31.7
PFD Adapter
AUTOPILOT INTERFACE
LRU
GAD 43
Adapter
DISPLAY
PFD
FUNCTION
Analog attitude, heading,
and yaw data for certain
autopilots [1]
• Altitude preselect
• VS control
GAD 43e
Enhanced Adapter
• Yaw damper
PFD
• DME
• NAV
• ADF
• RAD ALT
[1]
Requires GRS 77/GRS 79/GSU 75 or internal ADAHRS.
1.31.8
Autopilot
AUTOPILOT ALTITUDE PRESELECT/VERTICAL SPEED
LRU
DISPLAY
Collins:
APS-65( )
Honeywell
(Bendix King):
KAP 100/150
KFC 150
KFC 200/250
KFC 275/325
Selected altitude sync
• Altitude capture armed
annunciation
• Altitude capture engaged
annunciation
PFD
1-72
• Selected altitude sync
• Selected VS sync [1]
• VS engaged annunciation [1]
• Selected altitude sync
S-TEC:
55X
60-2
65
60 PSS
[1]
FUNCTION
• Selected VS sync
KAP 150 and KFC 150/275/325 only.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
AUTOPILOT EXTERNAL FLIGHT DIRECTOR
LRU
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
Bendix:
M-4D
Century:
IV
41
2000
Cessna:
300B IFCS/400B
IFCS/800B IFCS
1000 IFCS
Collins:
APS-65
AP-106/107
PFD
External flight director
Honeywell
(Bendix King):
KFC 150/200/250
KFC 225/275/325
KFC 300
S-TEC:
55
55X
60-2/65
1500/2100
Sperry:
SPZ-200/500
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-73
System Description
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
LRU
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
• Electronic Stability and
Protection annunciations [1] [2]
GFC 500
GFC 600
PFD
• Overspeed/underspeed
protection annunciations [3]
• Mode annunciations [4]
• Bug sync [5]
• Flight Director
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
1-74
ESP roll engagement limits display differently between autopilots.
Available only when ESP is enabled and AP is disengaged.
Available only when AP is engaged and aircraft exceeds minimum or maximum engagement
speed.
Track mode annunciation available only on GFC 500.
Includes value display and control for ALT, HDG, IAS, and VS. BARO sync, CDI source selection,
and Selected Course sync output to primary attitude indicator when interfaced with G5
Electronic Flight Instrument.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.31.9
Weather & Music
LRU
DISPLAY
PFD
FUNCTION
Weather Products
• NEXRAD
• SXM Lightning
• TFRs
Weather Products [1]
Map Page:
• NEXRAD
• Cloud Tops
• Echo Tops
• SXM Lightning
• METARs
• Storm Cells
• TFRs
GDL 69/69A SXM
Garmin SiriusXM receiver
for weather.
Overlays weather
products on MFD
and HSI Map.
Weather Page:
• AIREP
• NEXRAD
• City Forecast
• Cloud Tops
MFD
• County Warnings
• Cyclone
• Echo Tops
• Winds Aloft
• Surface Pressure
• SXM Lightning
• Storm Cells
• METARs
• AIRMETs
• SIGMETs
• TFRs
• PIREPs
• Freezing Levels
• Turbulence Forecast
• Icing Forecast
GDL 69A SXM
Garmin SiriusXM receiver
for entertainment.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
MFD
Entertainment Services
SiriusXM Radio
Pilot’s Guide
1-75
System Description
LRU
GDL 88
GTX 345
Datalink traffic and
weather.
DISPLAY
PFD
MFD
PFD
FUNCTION
Traffic Services
• ADS-B
• TIS-B
Weather Services
• FIS-B
Weather Products
• Precip
• TFRs
Weather Products
Map Page:
• Precip
GSR 56
Garmin (Iridium) Satellite
Receiver for Connext
weather.
Overlays weather
products on MFD
and HSI Map.
• IR Satellite
• Lightning
• METARs
MFD
Weather Page:
• Precip
• IR Satellite
• Winds Aloft
• Lightning
• METARs/TAFs
• AIRMETs
• SIGMETs
• TFRs
• PIREPs
WX-500
Depicts Stormscope data
on MFD and HSI Map.
1-76
PFD
MFD
Pilot’s Guide
Lightning strikes
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
LRU
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
• Ground, standby, test, and
weather modes
• Horizontal and vertical profiles
• Roll/trim
• Stabilization
• Sector scan
• Altitude compensated tilt [2]
[3]
Garmin:
GWX 68
GWX 70
GWX 75
Provides airborne
weather radar
information.
• High resolution color scale [3]
• Tilt limit (vertical sector scan)
• WATCH shading
• Target alert
• Range
• Tilt angle
MFD
• Bearing angle
• Gain
GWX 70/75 Features [4]
• Turbulence Detection
• Ground Clutter Suppression
Honeywell
(Bendix King) [4]:
RDS 81 (RS 811A)
RDS 82 (RS 181A)
RDR 2000 (ART 2000)
RDR 2100 (ART 2100)
Third-party weather
radar.
• Ground, standby, test, and
weather modes
• Horizontal profile
• Vertical profile [5]
• Roll/trim
• Stabilization
• Range
• Tilt angle
• Bearing angle [5]
• Gain (ground mode)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Product availability dependent upon subscription.
GWX 70 only.
GWX 75 only.
Requires purchase of an enablement card.
Feature dependent on radar.
Not available on EIS/MFD configurations.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
1-77
System Description
1.31.10 Engine Monitoring
RECIPROCATING ENGINES
LRU
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
• Manifold Pressure
• RPM
• Fuel Flow
• Oil Pressure
GEA 110
Garmin Engine Adapter.
Monitors engine, fuel,
and electrical systems for
piston engine aircraft.
• Oil Temperature
• EGT
EIS
• CHT
• TIT
• IAT
• Fuel Quantity
• Volts
• Amps
• Engine Data
TURBINE ENGINES
LRU
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
• Propeller RPM
• Gas Producer RPM
• Torque
GEA 71B
GEA 71B Enhanced
GEA 71C
Garmin Engine Adapter.
Monitors engine, fuel,
and electrical systems for
turbine aircraft.
• Engine Temperature
• Fuel Flow
EIS
• Fuel Quantity
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Temperature
• Fuel Pressure
• Volts
• Amps
• Engine Data
1-78
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.31.11 Magnetometer
LRU
DISPLAY
GMU 44/44B
Provides magnetic
information to the AHRS.
PFD
FUNCTION
• Heading
• Compass
1.31.12 Navigation/FMS
LRU
GPS 175
GPS 400W
GPS 500W
GNC 420W
GNS 430W
GNS 480
GNS 530W
GNX 375
GTN 625
GTN 635
GTN 650
GTN 725
GTN 750
[1]
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
• ILS/VOR [1]
• LOC [1]
PFD
• GS [1]
• GPS position
MFD
Feature requires a NAV radio source.
1.31.13 Temperature Probe
LRU
GTP 59
190-01717-10 Rev. H
DISPLAY
PFD
EIS
FUNCTION
Outside air temperature
Pilot’s Guide
1-79
System Description
1.31.14 Radar Altimeter
LRU
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
Garmin:
GRA 55/5500
Collins:
RAC-870
ALT-50A
ALT-55B
FreeFlight:
RA-4500
PFD
Honeywell
(Bendix King):
KRA 10/10A
KRA 405/405B
Radar altitude
(next to altitude tape)
Sperry:
AA-100
AA-100A
AA-200
1-80
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
System Description
1.31.15 Traffic
LRU
GTX 33
GTX 330
GTX 335
GTX 345
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
PFD
TIS-A
MFD
Garmin:
GTS 800
GTS 820
GTS 825
GTS 850
GTS 855
PFD
GTS 8000
PFD/MFD
TAS/TCAS I
TCAS II
Avidyne (Ryan):
TAS 6XX (9900BX)
Honeywell
(Bendix King):
KTA 810
KMH 820
KTA 910
KMH 920
MFD
TAS/TCAS I
L3 Communications
(Goodrich):
SKY497
SKY899
GDL 88
GNX 375
GTX 345
Third-party TCAS II
190-01717-10 Rev. H
PFD
ADS-B
MFD
PFD/MFD
TCAS II
Pilot’s Guide
1-81
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1-82
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2
Primary Flight Display
PFD SETUP
2.1
2.2
Synchronization Options ........................................................................2-5
Reference Bugs and Controls .................................................................2-6
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3
Attitude Indicator ................................................................................2-11
2.3.1
Attitude Sync, Rotorcraft Only ......................................................2-13
2.4
Extreme Attitude Indications ................................................................2-14
2.5
VNAV Guidance Indications .................................................................2-16
2.6
Airspeed Indicator ...............................................................................2-17
2.6.1
Reference Markings......................................................................2-19
2.6.2
Reference Speeds .........................................................................2-20
2.6.3
Fast/Slow Indicator .......................................................................2-21
2.7
Barometric Altimeter............................................................................2-21
2.7.1
Adjusting Barometric Pressure ......................................................2-24
2.7.2
Adjusting Selected Altitude...........................................................2-25
2.7.3
Temperature Compensation Minimums ........................................2-26
2.7.4
MDA/DH Alerting .........................................................................2-27
2.8
VSI ......................................................................................................2-28
2.8.1
Selected Vertical Speed.................................................................2-30
2.9
Horizontal Situation Indicator...............................................................2-31
2.9.1
Setting the Heading Bug...............................................................2-33
2.9.2
HSI Annunciations ........................................................................2-34
2.10 CDI......................................................................................................2-37
2.10.1 Course Pointer Types ....................................................................2-38
2.10.2 Cross Track Error Indication .........................................................2-38
2.10.3 CDI Source Selection ....................................................................2-39
2.10.4 Selected Course with VOR/LOC ...................................................2-40
2.10.5 Selected Course with GPS.............................................................2-40
2.10.6 Automatic Source Selection ..........................................................2-41
2.10.7 Auto-Slewing ...............................................................................2-42
2.11 LDI ......................................................................................................2-43
2.11.1 Reverse Sensing Correction...........................................................2-43
2.12 VDI ......................................................................................................2-44
2.12.1 VNAV Deviation Indications .........................................................2-45
2.13 CDI/VDI Preview ..................................................................................2-46
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
2.14 Bearing Pointers ..................................................................................2-49
2.15 GPS NAV Status Field...........................................................................2-51
2.16 Relative Wind Data ..............................................................................2-52
2.17 Temp/DALT Display..............................................................................2-53
2.18 DME Display ........................................................................................2-54
2.19 Marker Beacon Symbols.......................................................................2-55
2.20 Radar Altitude .....................................................................................2-55
2.20.1 RA Test.........................................................................................2-56
2.21 Clock/Timer .........................................................................................2-56
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-1
Primary Flight Display
The PFD menu provides access to various controls, sub-menus, and
setup options.
2-2
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
PFD Setup
PFD SYSTEM SELECTIONS, GDU 700( )
For GDU 700( ), setup selections are accessible from the System Menu key.
PFD Setup
• Access CDI/VDI Preview, Auto EDM, LOC CDI
Prompting and Wind Field functions
• Access synchronization options (BARO, CDI, and DB)
• Control clock/timer
• Control Outside Air Temp/Density Altitude display
• Set menu display timeout
Except where noted, unit selections synchronize across all
configured GDUs. Certain LRUs may contain unit settings
independent of the TXi system.
Units
• BARO Pressure
• Distance
• NAV Angle
• Temperature
• Wind Speed
Altitude unit settings do not affect the altitude tape.
Audio
• Set click volume
Backlight
• Adjust display brightness
Status
Databases
• View unit and software information
• Check status of all configured LRUs
• View information about active and standby databases
• Perform a manual database update
Flight Stream
• Access Bluetooth Setup and Wi-Fi Setup menus
Logs
• Access data, aircraft, and exceedance logs
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-3
Primary Flight Display
PFD SETUP SELECTIONS, GDU 1060
For GDU 1060, setup selections are available on the System page of the MFD.
Clock/Timer
TEMP/DALT
• Control Outside Air Temp/Density Altitude display
• Specify air temperature units and reference type
Wind Field
• Control wind field function
Menu Timeout
• Set menu display timeout
CDI/VDI
Preview
• Enable preview indicators for VDI Glidepath/Glideslope
deviation, and VOR/LOC course and deviation [1]
Auto EDM
• Enable automatic EDM [4]
LOC CDI
Prompting
• Allow prompts for switching the CDI source from GPS
to LOC [2] [3]
SYNC Control
• Access synchronization options (BARO, CDI)
Database SYNC
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
2-4
• Control clock/timer
• View information about active and standby databases
• Perform a manual database update
Available only when a configured GTN is present.
Available only when a configured GPS/NAV navigator (GTN 650/750 or GNS 430/530) is
present.
For installations with a GFC 600, LOC CDI prompting is suppressed when the autopilot is
armed to capture the localizer. The TXi CDI source automatically switches from GPS to LOC
once the autopilot couples to the localizer.
Available only with GFC 600 installation and cabin altitude threshold configured.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.1
Synchronization Options
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Multi-PFD systems only
• SYNC Control availability dependent upon configuration
Selecting SYNC Control opens a pop-up menu. Selected
functions synchronize across all TXi PFDs.
GDU 1060: The database synchronization option resides on the MFD System Status
page.
SELECTION
FUNCTION
BARO
• Synchronizes the current barometric pressure value [1]
CDI SRC
• Synchronizes the selected CDI source [1]
• Initiates the database synchronization function
DB
[1]
• GDU 700( ) only
Selection not available if synchronization function is configured as
always on.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-5
Primary Flight Display
2.2
Reference Bugs and Controls
PFD Controls
The PFD relies on touchscreen and control
knob interactions for instrument and
course adjustments.
• Airspeed
• Altitude
• Barometric Correction
• Heading
• Vertical Speed
Only one control is active at a time.
Control automatically reverts to heading
10 seconds after the last entry is made.
• Selected Course
Additional information shown is determined in menu and setup, including synthetic
vision depictions and HSI Map overlays.
Airspeed Bug
Altitude Bug
Selected
Altitude
Control
Selected
Airspeed
Control
Vertical
Speed
Bug
Barometric
Correction
Control
Selected
Vertical
Speed
Control
Selected
Heading
Control
Selected
Course
Control
Clock
& Timer
Control
PFD Menu
Key
Advisory
Key
Reference Bugs & Controls
2-6
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
SETTING A REFERENCE BUG
Selecting any control opens a dedicated menu. Available options are dependent
upon system configuration.
On GDU 700L: Menu slides out from the left side of
the screen.
On GDU 700P/1060: Menu slides up from the
bottom of the screen.
GDU 700L
GDU 700P/1060
There are three methods for operating the PFD controls:
1. Touch and Turn
Touch desired control to move knob focus to that control. Then:
• Turn inner knob to change selected value
OR
• Center press knob to synchronize with current value
2. Turn and Turn
Turn outer knob to move knob focus to desired control. Then:
• Turn inner knob to change selected value
OR
• Center press knob to synchronize with current value
3. Touch and Touch (GDU 700P/1060)
Touch desired control to display associated context menu and use the keys
provided. Then:
• Center key pulls up a keypad for numeric entries
• Additional controls are located on the left and right
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-7
Primary Flight Display
Reference Controls & Menu Options
2-8
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
Flight Instruments
Supplemental
Flight Data
• GPS Navigation Status
• DME
• Radar Altitude
The top portion of the display provides
attitude and air data.
The lower portion provides a horizontal
situation indicator and supplemental flight
data fields.
• Wind
• Clock/Timer
Attitude Indicator
Sky
Barometric
Altimeter
VSI
Airspeed
Indicator
Air Temp
& DALT
Display
Wind
Field
Ground
Navigation
Data
PFD Portrait Layout
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-9
Primary Flight Display
Airspeed
Indicator
Attitude
Indicator
Barometric
Altimeter
Sky
Arc VSI
Ground
Air Temp
or DALT
Display
Wind
Field
Navigation
Data
PFD Landscape Layout, Rotorcraft
2-10
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.3
Attitude Indicator
The attitude indicator provides a virtual representation of the ground and sky.
Roll Scale
Standard Rate Turn
Indicator
Roll Scale Zero
Roll Pointer
Slip/Skid Indicator
Sky
Pitch Scale
Horizon Line
Ground
ROLL POINTER
The roll pointer indicates angle of bank at
varying degrees on the roll scale.
Fixed Pointer
Pointer type is configured at installation as
either fixed or sky.
• Major tick marks: 30º and 60º
• Minor tick marks: 10º, 20º, and 45º
Sky Pointer
STANDARD RATE TURN INDICATORS
Standard Rate Turn Indicators
• Show the required bank angle needed
to maintain a standard rate turn
• Dynamically change position based on
True Airspeed
• Remain at 30º when TAS is at or above
210 kts
Standard rate turn indicators are removed when:
• TAS is invalid
• TAS is less than 60 kts
• Aircraft is on the ground
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-11
Primary Flight Display
SLIP SKID INDICATOR
• Moves laterally away from roll pointer center
(max 7° side-slip indication)
• Alignment with roll pointer denotes
coordinated flight
• If attitude data becomes invalid, slip/skid
indicator is removed
PITCH SCALE
• Markings range between -90° and 90° angles
• Major pitch graduations occur every 5° with SVT
and 10° without SVT
• Each minor pitch mark is 5° from 25° nose down
to 45° nose up
• Precision pitch marks are at each 2.5° from
20° nose up to nose down attitude
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL
Depending on aircraft type, aircraft
symbol is either fixed wing or rotorcraft.
Fixed Wing
Symbol type is dependent upon
configuration. For requirements, consult
the POH.
Rotorcraft
2-12
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
AWARENESS BANDS
Ground Awareness Band
Sky Awareness Band
Appears when current
pitch attitude causes the
sky presentation to
completely fill the display.
2.3.1
Appears when current
pitch attitude causes the
ground presentation to
completely fill the display.
Attitude Sync, Rotorcraft Only
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Rotorcraft only
• Availability dependent upon configuration
Function disables when:
• Current pitch and horizon line differ by more than +/-8º
• Attitude data is invalid
ATT SYNC KEY
• Synchronizes aircraft symbol to the horizon line for all
configured GDUs
• Reference marks provide an absolute pitch reference
• Useful during pitch up or pitch down maneuvers
Reference Marks
Attitude Sync Off
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Attitude Sync On
Pilot’s Guide
2-13
Primary Flight Display
2.4
Extreme Attitude Indications
To aid in recovery from extreme pitch attitude, red chevrons are shown between
major pitch marks from 80° nose down to 30° nose down, and from 80° nose up to
50° nose up. The red chevrons always point towards 0° pitch.
Extreme Pitch
Extreme Roll
The PFD incorporates an extreme attitude declutter mode to improve instrument scan
and facilitate aircraft recovery from extreme attitudes. The PFD declutters if pitch
exceeds 20° nose down or 30° nose up, or bank angle exceeds 65°.
When selected, the extreme attitude declutter mode changes the enhanced HSI back
to the standard HSI. If previously selected, once extreme attitude declutter mode is
exited, the HSI returns to the enhanced HSI.
2-14
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
Data removed during extreme attitudes
• Open menus and keyboards
• GPS navigation status
• GS
• Fast/Slow indicator
• TAS
• CDI source selection key
• Air temperature
• PFD Menu key
• Flight director command bars
• PFD Full key (GDU 1060 only)
• Marker beacon annunciation
• Standard rate turn indicators
• Vertical deviation indicator
• Wind field
• Clock/timer
• Selected heading
• Selected Altitude control
• Selected course
• Vertical Speed control
• Barometric pressure setting
• Selected IAS
• DME
• Bearing pointer information field(s)
• Advisory key
AHRS(1/2) KEY
• Allows pilot to change the current AHRS source while extreme
attitude decluttering is in effect
• Replaces PFD Menu key during extreme attitudes
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-15
Primary Flight Display
2.5
VNAV Guidance Indications
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Configured GTN (v6.50 and later)
• Valid VNAV data
• GFC 500/600 for autopilot VNAV mode status annunciation
VNAV Guidance Function
• Provides vertical profile guidance during the descent phase of flight
• Presents vertical path guidance to the descending path as a linear deviation
from the desired path (i.e., the vertical angle from the specified waypoint or
altitude)
• Guidance based on altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints in the
active flight plan
• Integrates vertical waypoints into the active flight plan
• Supports both manual and autopilot coupling
VNAV PFD INDICATIONS
VNAV data received from the navigator display as magenta indications on the PFD.
Target Altitude
Reference Field
Active Status
Indicator
Vertical Deviation
Indicator
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
INDICATOR
Barometric Altimeter
VNAV DATA
• Target altitude reference field
• Modified selected altitude knob increments
VSI
• Required vertical speed indication
VDI
• VNAV source and vertical deviation indications
AP Mode Banner
• VNAV mode annunciation
(requires Garmin autopilot)
2-16
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.6
Airspeed Indicator
Airspeed indicator is configured at installation to meet the
requirements of the AFM/POH. Available units:
knots (default), kilometers per hour, and statute miles per hour.
Supports ten custom airspeed tape markings with installer
configurable labels.
For required airspeed limitations and markings, refer to the
aircraft AFM/POH.
Selected Airspeed Control
Selected Airspeed Bug
Airspeed Trend Vector
Current Airspeed
V-speed Bugs
True Airspeed
Ground Speed
IAS, Fixed Wing
Airspeed Indicator Function
• Provides indicated airspeed, true airspeed, and ground speed
• A fixed pointer, with rolling number gauge, indicates current airspeed on a
moving tape
• Actual airspeed tape colors and markings vary by installation
• Data fields display true airspeed and ground speed values
• As airspeed increases, tape scrolls down
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-17
Primary Flight Display
AIRSPEED CONTROLS & INDICATIONS
• Sets airspeed bug on tape if configured
Selected
Airspeed
• Both the bug and its digital value display in cyan
• Automatically synchronizes across all connected TXi PFDs
• Not selectable during EDM selected data lockout
(both field and bug turn gray)
• Magenta trend vector at the right of the airspeed tape
Airspeed
Trend Vector
Speed Range
Strip
• 6 second prediction of airspeed based on current
acceleration
• Removed if airspeed remains constant or if any data
necessary to calculate airspeed is not available due to a
system failure
• Multi-colored strip at the right of the moving tape
• Actual colors and patterns vary according to aircraft type
• Set using the selected airspeed control
• Present on the right, inboard side of the tape if configured
Selected
Airspeed Bug
• Parks at the top or bottom of the tape when selected
airspeed is outside the visible range
• Changes from cyan to gray during EDM selected data
lockout
2-18
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.6.1
Reference Markings
FIXED WING
The VNE, VMO, or MMO barber pole is
configurable as a fixed VNE value, or a variable
VNE/VMO/MMO value that changes with altitude.
VNE/VMO/MMO
For configurations with multiple variable
VNE/VMO/MMO values, the barber pole and
alerting parameters extend to the lowest
airspeed based on VNE/VMO/MMO calculations.
VNO
For fixed wing installations, exceeding a variable
VNE/VMO/MMO value creates an airspeed
exceedance entry.
VFE
A white triangle reference marking is configured
for airframes that are placarded with approach
flap speed limitations.
VSO
Approach Flap Speed
VLE
Low Speed
Awareness Band
VYSE
VMCA
ROTORCRAFT
VNO
VNE (Power Off)
Two types of markings are available for
denoting maximum auto rotation speed
(VNE power off). This option is
configured during installation.
Variable VNE is based on values in the
airspeed limitations placard.
Glide
VY
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-19
Primary Flight Display
OVERSPEED INDICATIONS
If current airspeed
exceeds Vne/Vmo/Mmo,
the indicator background
turns red.
If the trend vector enters
the overspeed range, the
current airspeed value
turns yellow.
2.6.2
Reference Speeds
Selectable airspeed reference bugs are available for both fixed wing aircraft and
rotorcraft. On/off controls reside in the Airspeeds page of the PFD menu.
Fixed wing Reference Speeds:
Glide or VREF
VY or V2
VX or V1
VR
Rotorcraft Reference Speeds:
Glide
VY
VX, VY, VR and Glide default values are set during the installation process. V-speeds
can be set for an individual flight, but will default back to install presets after a power
cycle. When active (on), the V-speeds are displayed at their appropriate locations on
the right of the airspeed tape.
A positive or negative value indicates the difference between
the currently selected V-speed and its default value.
Restore All Defaults resets all V-speeds to their default
values.
2-20
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.6.3
Fast/Slow Indicator
PC-12 AIRCRAFT ONLY
The Fast/Slow indication displays on left edge of PFD.
The indicator shows when indicated airspeeds are less than
150 KIAS, and the aircraft is configured for initial climb, or
approach and landing conditions. For details on operation,
consult the POH/AFM.
2.7
Barometric Altimeter
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• 20 ft (20 m) digital resolution
• Range: -1,000 to 99,000 ft (-305 to 30175 m)
Selected Altitude
Control
Current Altitude
Altitude Bug
Altitude Trend Vector
Metric Unit Label
Minimums Bug
Barometric Correction
Control
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Barometric altitude is displayed on
a moving tape with a fixed pointer
and digital readout.
Units are either feet or meters
depending on configuration.
A metric unit label displays for
metric altitudes.
Altimeter tape limits are
configured to match aircraft
performance. For more
information, consult the
AFM/POH.
Pilot’s Guide
2-21
Primary Flight Display
ALTIMETER CONTROLS & INDICATIONS
• Sets altitude bug on altimeter when configured
• Bug automatically synchronizes across PFDs
• If barometric minimums is set, selected altitude may be set
to same value as barometric minimums
Selected
Altitude
• Determines visual and aural alerts for approaching and
deviating from selected altitude.
• Not selectable during EDM selected data lockout
(both field and bug turn gray)
• Provides source data for the range to altitude arc display on
MFD map (GDU 1060 only)
• Controls altitude preselect mode for various autopilots
• Bug is removed upon system startup or by rotating control
knob to a value <-1,000 ft
• Magenta trend vector at the left of the altitude tape
Altitude Trend
Vector
• 6 second prediction of altitude based on current vertical
speed
• Absent if aircraft altitude remains constant or if data
needed for rate calculation is not available due to a system
failure
• Displays in cyan digits at the bottom of altimeter tape
Barometric
Correction
Control
• Pilot can select units to display in inches of mercury
(in Hg), Hectopascals (hPa), or Millibars (Mb)
• Digits display in yellow when pilot and co-pilot TXi PFD
settings differ by more than 0.03 in Hg
• Barometric Pressure Setting to 29.92 in. / 1013 Mb setting
when STD BARO is selected
• Displays as a colored bracket for selected MDA/DH
minimums set on the altimeter tape
• Bug is parked to the top or bottom of altimeter tape when
value is outside current visible range
Minimums
Bug
• Cyan bracket denotes BARO or RAD ALT minimums altitude
• Magenta bracket denotes TEMP COMP minimums altitude
• White bracket denotes close proximity above minimums
altitude
• Yellow bracket denotes below minimums
• Triggers “Minimums, Minimums” aural alert at MDA/DHs
2-22
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
ALTIMETER CONTROLS & INDICATIONS
• Set using the Selected Altitude
Altitude Bug
• A portion of the bug displays at the top or bottom of the
altitude tape if selected Altitude Bug is out of visible range
• Bug width is 100 units wide, depicting (+/-) 50 unit
increments
• Turns gray during EDM selected data lockout
TARGET ALTITUDE REFERENCE FIELD
The location of this field varies depending on PFD layout.
GDU 1060/700L
(Full Screen View)
GDU 700P
GDU 700L (Menu Open)
GDU 1060 (MFD/PFD/EIS)
A magenta bar indicates target altitude in relation to the current altitude.
At or above
target altitude
190-01717-10 Rev. H
At target
altitude
Pilot’s Guide
At or below
target altitude
2-23
Primary Flight Display
2.7.1
Adjusting Barometric Pressure
Controls for adjusting barometric pressure are
located in Barometric Correction control menu.
SETTING
FUNCTION
STD BARO
• Toggles between standard barometric pressure and the
pilot specified value
BARO
• Allows entry of selected barometric pressure value
• Allows entry of destination barometric pressure while the
aircraft is above transition level (FL 180)
PRESET
• Preselections do not affect altimeter readout
• Transitioning from standard to selected sets the altimeter
to the preset value
• Available only when STD BARO is active
When STD BARO is active:
• PRESET entry key is available
• Control field annunciates standard
baro label
SET BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
There are two ways to adjust the barometric pressure setting.
1. Tap Barometric Setting field or rotate PFD control knob to BARO.
2. Tap STD BARO or enter desired barometric pressure using the BARO key or PFD
inner knob.
• If “STD BARO” is set, altimeter PRESET displays on popup menu.
Set preset local altimeter setting.
• Pressing PFD control knob toggles between Standard Barometric
pressure and the pilot set value.
2-24
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.7.2
Adjusting Selected Altitude
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
The MINS SYNC function is available only when the following conditions are met.
• Minimums source is configured as barometric altimeter or temperature
compensated barometric altimeter
• BARO source key is active
• A valid minimums altitude setting
Adjustments to the selected altitude value cause
the alert function to reset.
SELECTION
FUNCTION
• Synchronizes altimeter bug to the MDA/DH setting
MINS SYNC
• Allows entry of a selected altitude value
ALT
• Inner knob adjustments are in 100 ft increments
SELECTED ALTITUDE ALERTING
Visual and aural indications alert when the aircraft is approaching the selected
altitude.
DISTANCE FROM
SELECTED ALTITUDE
• Flashing black text on white background
1,000 ft
• Optional aural tone [2]
• Flashing cyan text on black background
200 ft
• Optional aural tone [2]
0 ft
Altitude deviates more than
±200 ft from selected
altitude
[1]
[1]
INDICATION [1]
• Flashing yellow text on blue background
• Aural tone
Alert duration: five seconds
Aural tone dependent upon configuration.
DISABLE ALTITUDE BUG
Turn inner knob counterclockwise until the selected altitude value is
< -1,000 ft. Values less than -1,000 display as a series of dashes.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-25
Primary Flight Display
2.7.3
Temperature Compensation Minimums
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• The TEMP COMP minimums function is available only when a destination
airport is present on the external navigator
• Cycling power to the GDU clears all minimums data
GTNs and TXi displays use only one destination airport temperature for calculating
compensated altitudes. Changing the temperature on one of these units
automatically recalculates the value across all connected GTNs and GDUs.
TEMP COMP KEY
• Calculates compensated altitude for the destination airport
• Indicates temperature compensated minimums on altitude tape
• Synchronizes destination temperature between the GDU and
Selecting this key when a destination airport temperature is not available
automatically opens the TEMP at DEST keypad. Specify a temperature value to enable
the function.
MINIMUMS BUG INDICATION
Compensating the approach minimums bug determines
the location of the minimums reference on the altimeter.
It does not adjust barometric altitude.
When temperature compensation is active, the minimums
bug and numeric value turn magenta.
Set Temperature Compensated Minimums:
1. Tap Altitude. Specify the minimums
altitude value.
2. Tap TEMP at DEST. Specify the
destination airport’s current
temperature.
GDU automatically calculates the
compensated value. By default, this field
displays the compensated minimums
altitude.
Loading a different destination airport into the flight plan causes GDU to recalculate
the compensated altitude based on the elevation of the new destination airport.
2-26
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
If the destination airport is lost (e.g., the pilot clears the flight plan on the navigator):
• Temperature compensation is unavailable
• Minimums altitude source type switches from TEMP COMP to BARO
To resume temperature compensation, reselect TEMP COMP after loading a new
destination airport into the navigator.
Both TEMP COMP and BARO share the minimums altitude
function. Switching between these two source types does not
alter the specified altitude value.
2.7.4
MDA/DH Alerting
MDA and DH alerts are based on barometric altitude or optional radar altitude.
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground. The radar altimeter option is
only available in aircraft with a compatible radar altimeter interfaced to the
TXi system.
Both radar altitude and barometric minimums settings are lost following a unit
power cycle. Controls for setting MDA and DH alerting behavior reside in the
Minimums menu.
CONDITION
ALERT INDICATION
When the MDA/DH is initially set:
• Cyan altitude value with bracket pointer displays at the
bottom of the altimeter tape
Initial MDA/DH
• BARO or RAD ALT minimums remain boxed until the
MDA/DH altitude is visible on the altimeter tape
• Minimums display “RA” when using RAD ALT settings
Once MDA/DH altitude is within altitude tape display
range, the boxed value is removed and the cyan minimums
bug begins tracking with the altimeter tape.
Within 100 ft of
MDA/DH
Reaching MDA/DH
• Bug turns white
• Bug turns yellow
• Aural alert: “Minimums, minimums”
As the aircraft descends, the bug changes color to reflect the current altitude above
minimums. Alerting is armed once the aircraft is >150 ft above min altitude.
• White at 50 ft above min
• Cyan at 150 ft above min
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-27
Primary Flight Display
2.8
VSI
Vertical speed data displays on either a standard or arc style indicator. Format is
dependent on unit type (portrait or landscape) and installer configuration.
Arc VSI
Standard VSI
Fixed Scale
Fixed Scale
Trend Indicator
Vertical Speed
Rate Needle
VS Bug
Numeric Speed
Indication
Vertical Speed
Control
Moving needle indicates current
vertical speed on a fixed scale.
Vertical Speed
Control
Trend indicator replaces needle,
pointer, or indications.
AUTOMATIC FORMAT CHANGES
The arc format changes to standard when alternating between full and split views
(arc during full PFD, standard during split). This occurs in the following display
configurations.
GDU 1060 MFD/PFD/EIS or MFD/PFD (60%/40%)
GDU 700L PFD/menu open
2-28
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
TCAS II RAS
The TCAS II uses transponder replies to determine relative altitude, range, and
bearing of any air traffic control radar beacon system (ATCRBS) or Mode S equipped
aircraft with altitude reporting. Based on the information TCAS II determines the
level of advisory. The TCAS II will not issue RAs for ATCRBS aircraft that reply with
only Mode A information.
Requirements:
• Installed GTS 8000 or compatible ARINC 429 TCAS II unit
• GDU 1060 with 60% PFD or 700L PFD
• Standard style VSI
When the TCAS II LRU issues an RA, the
VSI displays red no-fly bands to indicate
areas to avoid. The green band indicates
the desired climb/descent rate.
NUMERIC SPEED INDICATION
GDU 1060/700L: A numeric field displaying current vertical speed is available on
both standard and arc VSIs. The type of field depends on indicator format and, in the
case of arc VSI, aircraft type.
Standard VSI: This field replaces the trend indicator and
moves up or down as the vertical speed changes. It displays
only in expanded layouts.
GDU 1060: full screen PFD, split MFD/PFD, and split PFD/EIS
GDU 700L: full screen PFD
Arc VSI: Field behavior is dependent upon aircraft type:
For rotorcraft, a stationary field appears when vertical speed
exceeds +/- 300 fpm (1.5 mps).
For fixed wing aircraft, the digital value is always present.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-29
Primary Flight Display
VERTICAL SPEED RANGE
Vertical speed range is dependent upon
aircraft performance. Both range and
units are configured at installation.
Available range types include:
+/- 2,000 FPM
+/- 3,000 FPM
+/- 4,000 FPM
+/- 6,000 FPM
Metric:
+/- 15 MPS
+/- 9 MPS
Fixed Scale Range Options
+/- 21 MPS
+/- 30 MPS
REQUIRED VERTICAL SPEED INDICATION
When receiving VNAV data from the
navigator, a magenta chevron indicates
the rate of descent needed to reach
target altitude.
2.8.1
Selected Vertical Speed
Controls for setting the vertical speed bug reside in the
VS control menu. Selected VS bug limits are determined
by the visible tape range.
SELECTION
FUNCTION
VS SYNC
• Synchronizes selected VS bug to current vertical speed
VS
• Allows entry of a numeric vertical speed
2-30
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.9
Horizontal Situation Indicator
The HSI displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters indicate
the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are placed at
10˚ intervals and minor tick marks are at 5˚ intervals. The HSI displays:
• Digital reading of the current heading
• A magenta diamond representing current track
• Turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and navigation source information
HSI layout varies according to display type.
Deviation & To/From Indicator
Station Identifier
Lateral Deviation
Indicator
Current Heading
Selected Heading
Selected Course
Lubber Line
Heading Bug
Turn Rate Indicator
Current Ground
Track
Deviation Indicator
360º
Compass
Card
To/From Indicator
GDU 700P & GDU 1060
CDI Source
Selector
Turn Rate
Indicator
180º
Compass
Card
Deviation &
To/From
Indicator
190-01717-10 Rev. H
CDI Source
Selector
LDI
GDU 700L
Pilot’s Guide
2-31
Primary Flight Display
HSI CONTROLS & INDICATIONS
• Lubber line serves as apex for the turn rate indicator,
displaying aircraft centerline and direction straight ahead
Turn Rate
Indicator
• Tick marks closest to the lubber line depict half-standard
rate turns and tick marks furthest away denote a standard
rate turn
• 6 second prediction of heading based on present turn rate
• If aircraft turn rates are greater than 4° per second, an
arrowhead appears at the end of the vector and a heading
prediction is no longer valid
Lateral
Deviation
Indicator
• Lateral movement of symbols indicate course deviation
Current
Ground Track
• Magenta diamond moves on compass card indicating
aircraft current track over ground
Current
Heading
• Heading displays true north or magnetic values by selecting
NAV Angle units from the System Units menu
• GPS flight phase, navigation source, OBS status, and
message annunciator display on deviation indicator borders
• Rotates with the course pointer on the standard HSI
depicted as an upright or inverted triangle
To/From
Indicator
• Displays only when an active navigation source is received
(GPS or VOR)
• Color scheme is uniform with GPS and VOR/LOC source
selections
• Upward pointing symbol indicates to, downward pointing
symbol indicates from
Station
Identifier
Heading Bug
2-32
• For VOR/LOC sources, the HSI displays the decoded Morse
code station identifier on the right side of the CDI lateral
deviation indicator
• Station Identifiers display at the center of the HSI when HSI
map overlays are selected off
• Cyan bug on the compass card corresponds to the selected
heading
• Selected heading is adjustable using the PFD knobs or
touchscreen controls
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.9.1
Setting the Heading Bug
Controls for setting the heading bug are located in
the Selected Heading control menu.
GDU 700L: Set the heading bug using the inner
control knob.
SELECTION
FUNCTION
HDG SYNC
• Synchronizes heading bug to current heading
HDG [1]
• Allows entry of a numeric heading
[1]
Touch key not available on GDU 700L.
OFF SCALE INDICATION
GDU 700L: It is possible for the heading bug position
to be out of view on the 180º compass card. When
this occurs:
• Heading bug parks on the side nearest to its
actual position (a partial bug is visible at the
bottom of the screen)
• Down arrow indicates direction
Heading Bug
Off Scale
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-33
Primary Flight Display
2.9.2
HSI Annunciations
HSI annunciations display on the HSI compass card and around the lateral deviation
indicator. They include:
• GPS flight phase
• CDI source
• VOR/LOC station Morse Code identifier (when VOR is active)
• Navigator modes and messages
• Cross track error (if CDI deflects beyond full scale)
Navigator Mode
Navigator Message
Flag
Alert
GPS Flight Phase
CDI Source
GPS Leg Information
2-34
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
NAVIGATOR ANNUNCIATIONS
ANNUNCIATION
190-01717-10 Rev. H
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
Within Lateral
Deviation Indicator
Waypoint Alert blinking text depicts
arrival at a waypoint.
Above Lateral
Deviation Indicator
GPS waypoint sequencing suspended.
Above CDI Lateral
Deviation Indicator
Loss of GPS Integrity Alert.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the
current phase of flight.
GPS information is not present or is
invalid for navigation use.
Above CDI Lateral
Deviation Indicator
Message Flag blinking text signaling a
message is queued in the navigator.
Above CDI Lateral
Deviation Indicator
Omnibearing Selector Active.
Within CDI Lateral
Deviation
Indicator/Center of
HSI
CDI Source displays current CDI source
information.
Pilot’s Guide
2-35
Primary Flight Display
GPS FLIGHT PHASE AND ANNUNCIATIONS
GPS Flight Phase
Annunciation Locations
• CDI lateral deviation indicator
• Center of the HSI
Phase of flight annunciations are a direct
indication of the current CDI behavior
for the selected navigation source. Not
all annunciations are available for every
navigator.
Flight phase annunciations are typically shown in magenta. The color changes to
yellow when cautionary conditions exist.
ANNUNCIATION
FLIGHT PHASE
0.3 nm CDI scale
1.0 nm CDI scale
Terminal level with departure procedure as the active
navigation
Dead reckoning (CDI not available)
En route
Navigator provides heading information only
(CDI not available)
Lateral Navigation Approach
Lateral Navigation Approach with advisory vertical guidance
provided. LNAV+V uses published LNAV minimums.
Lateral and Vertical Navigation Approach
Localizer Performance Approach
Localizer Performance Approach with advisory vertical
guidance provided. LP +V uses published LP minimums.
Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance approach.
Missed Approach
Oceanic
Terminal
Visual Approach
2-36
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.10 CDI
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• CDI angular limits are ±10º when the navigation source is VOR or LOC
The CDI is located in the center of the standard HSI compass card, and is duplicated
using a sliding lateral deviation indicator above the HSI. Control knob selection of
CRS can set the course pointer, while the CDI source is VOR/LOC or GPS course when
OBS mode is active.
Standard HSI
CDI Above HSI Map
The CDI is capable of displaying up to four sources of navigation depending on
external navigator and navigation radio configuration. The CDI does not display if
course deviation data are invalid.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-37
Primary Flight Display
2.10.1
Course Pointer Types
Course pointer type varies between single or double line arrows depending on the
active CDI source. Arrow tips point in the direction of the selected course or GPS
desired track.
ICON
2.10.2
SOURCE
ICON
SOURCE
LOC1, VOR1
LOC2, VOR2
GPS1
GPS2
Cross Track Error Indication
The GPS navigator determines CDI scaling. A
cross track error displays if the CDI exceeds the
full scale deviation value during GPS
navigation.
Cross Track Error Annunciation
2-38
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.10.3
CDI Source Selection
Tapping the CDI key changes the current source in a sequential
manner: GPS 1, VLOC 1, GPS 2, VLOC 2
On GDU 700L: Source selections display on the CDI key.
GPS Navigator 1
VLOC Navigator 1
VLOC Navigator 2
GPS Navigator 2
SOURCE SELECTION ALERT
The CDI key flashes to alert the pilot when a change in source selection is necessary.
Conditions include:
• Localizer or ILS approach is active on the GPS navigator
• Active waypoint is the final approach fix
• Localizer deviation is less than full scale deflection
• Localizer approach course is within 20º of GPS track
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-39
Primary Flight Display
2.10.4
Selected Course with VOR/LOC
Selecting a VOR/LOC source activates
the Selected Course course control. All
course indications and annunciations
turn green.
Selecting Direct CRS centers the VOR
CDI needle and sets a direct-to-fix
course.
2.10.5
Selected Course with GPS
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• In multi-PFD systems, preset course functionality is not available when
GDU 620 is present
When a GPS source is selected, the Selected Course field displays course values in
magenta.This function provides the preset course for VLOC guidance upon switching
from GPS to VOR or LOC.
Selecting VOR(1/2) PRESET allows the
pilot to preset VOR course selected course
entries. Access this function by tapping the
preset key and entering the value on the
numeric keypad or by turning the inner
control knob on the PFD.
GPS AUTO displays the automatic course
computed by the navigator. There is no
touch key available. Selected GPS course
cannot be changed during non-OBS GPS
operation.
2-40
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.10.6
Automatic Source Selection
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Integrated GPS and NAV radio source (GTN 650/750 or GNS 430/530) for
VOR/LOC to GPS auto-switch functionality during missed approaches
• GFC 600 with GTN 650/750 for GPS to LOC auto-switch functionality during
localizer approach
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• In multi-PFD systems, the missed approach auto-switch function disables
when GDU 620 is present
The system automatically changes the navigation source during the following
conditions.
CONDITION
CDI RESPONSE
Missed approach
procedure
activates
Navigation source automatically switches from VOR/LOC
to GPS.
Autopilot captures
the localizer
Navigation source automatically switches from GPS to LOC
(GFC 600 only).
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-41
Primary Flight Display
2.10.7
Auto-Slewing
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• In multi-PFD systems, auto-slew functionality is not available when GDU 620
is present
When changing the CDI source from GPS to LOC, the system auto-slews the selected
course to the localizer course if:
• A localizer-based approach exists in current flight plan of GPS navigator
• A localizer frequency is active in navigator (LOC, BC, SDF, ILS, LDA)
When a LOC BC approach is activated, the course pointer slews to the LOC front
course to provide appropriate back course HSI needle indications.
Course Selection and
Pointer Auto-Slewed
to 313º
Final Inbound Approach
Course 133°
2-42
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.11 LDI
Deviation indicators move left or right along the CDI scale to portray aircraft position
relative to the selected course.
Deviation & To/From Indicator
LDI
Course Pointer
CDI Scale
Deviation Indicator
2.11.1
Reverse Sensing Correction
The lateral deviation indicator incorporates an automatic reverse sensing correction.
When the aircraft heading is more than 107° left or right from the selected course,
the lateral deviation indicator will reverse CDI indications and the to/from pointer.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-43
Primary Flight Display
2.12 VDI
The VDI displays to the left of the altitude tape when:
• The aircraft is in an ILS or GPS approach with vertical guidance
• The GDU is receiving VNAV vertical guidance from the GTN
Status annunciations replace VDI indications when data is invalid or not available.
For ILS glideslope indications, the VDI is a green diamond.
An ILS glideslope indication appears if the current heading
is within 107° of the selected course. This prevents the
glideslope from displaying during localizer backcourse
approaches.
No GS
Annunciates if a localizer
frequency is tuned and there is
no glideslope signal.
ILS Glideslope
GPS glidepath vertical guidance is similar to glideslope
indications. A magenta diamond glidepath indication
displays for GPS approaches supporting vertical guidance
(LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP +V,VISUAL).
No GP
Annunciates if GPS glidepath
data becomes invalid while the
VDI is displayed.
GPS Glidepath
2-44
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.12.1
VNAV Deviation Indications
Active Status
Indicator
VNAV deviation guidance displays
when:
• CDI source is GPS and the
navigator is providing valid
VNAV deviation data
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
• CDI source is VOR/LOC, the
navigator is providing valid
VNAV deviation data, and a
VNAV mode is armed or active
on the autopilot
These indications are absent when deviation data is invalid.
MAXIMUM DEFLECTION INDICATIONS
Deviation at Max
Deflection
Deviation at Max
Deflection
Glidepath
190-01717-10 Rev. H
VNAV
Pilot’s Guide
2-45
Primary Flight Display
2.13 CDI/VDI Preview
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Configured GTN
A preview option provides advance indications of approach
lateral and/or vertical deviations, allowing the pilot to
anticipate changes and make smooth transitions during
approach. By default, this function is active.
All preview indications and annunciations are gray.
Approach Preview Data
• CDI Source [1]
• VDI Glidepath/Glideslope
• CDI VOR/LOC Deviation [2]
• VOR/LOC Course
• HSI Map VOR/LOC Course
• VOR/LOC Morse Code ID
[1]
[1]
Only if Morse code is not available.
Includes LOC backcourse deviation.
VDI PREVIEW
For ILS and GPS approaches, the VDI provides a preview of glideslope or glidepath
deviation.
VNAV Active
Status Indicator
VDI Source
Preview Indicator
Deviation Preview
Indicator
Deviation Preview
at Max Deflection
VNAV Vertical
Deviation Indicator
2-46
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
CDI PREVIEW
Deviation Indicator
For VOR or ILS approaches,
the CDI provides a preview
of VOR or localizer
deviation.
LDI
GDU 1060 & GDU 700P:
Course Pointer
Preview
Lateral Deviation
Preview
VLC Station ID
Preview
Numeric Course
Preview
HSI
If a VLC station ID is not available, the
CDI source annunciates in its place
(e.g., VOR, LOC).
To change the course preview:
1. Open the Course control menu.
2. Select VOR/LOC PRESET.
3. Specify a new preset value.
CDI Source
Preview
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-47
Primary Flight Display
GDU 700L:
Preview data include a course pointer and lateral deviation indicator.
2-48
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
Supplemental Flight Data
2.14 Bearing Pointers
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Bearing pointers are mutually exclusive with the HSI Map. They do not
display when HSI Map is active.
Selecting a bearing pointer does not necessarily make it visible. Bearing pointers are
absent when:
• GDU does not receive valid data from the selected source
• NAV radio is not receiving tuned VOR station
• NAV radio is tuned to a Localizer frequency
• GPS is bearing source and active waypoint is not selected
• ADF is selected and signal is not received
• HSI Map function is on
ICON
BEARING
Two selectable bearing pointers are available for
the display of VOR, GPS, or ADF data.
1
Arrow tips point to signal source in relation to
the current aircraft heading.
2
Pointers do not override CDI features.
Bearing Information Fields
Bearing information fields
indicate bearing type and
navigation source. They display
to the left and right of the
compass card.
GDU 700L
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-49
Primary Flight Display
SET BEARING POINTERS
1. Turn off HSI Map if necessary.
2. Navigate to the Bearing Pointers page.
3. Select a bearing navigation source for the active pointer(s).
The GDU retains all pointer selections during a unit power cycle.
Bearing Pointer 1
On/Off
Bearing Pointer
Sources
Bearing Pointer 2
On/Off
Bearing Pointer 1
Ring
Bearing Pointer 2
A white ring visually
separates bearing
pointers from the
CDI.
GDU 1060/700P
2-50
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.15 GPS NAV Status Field
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• From and next waypoints may be removed when the number of characters
in a full route exceeds the allowable space
A GPS NAV status field displays at the bottom of the PFD when the GPS navigator
associated with the selected CDI source has an active valid leg. Information is based
on calculations by the GPS navigator. Annunciations and window width vary
according to GDU type.
GDU 700P/1060:
• From, to, and next waypoints
• Leg and waypoint types
• Identifier, distance, and ETE of active waypoint
GDU 700L:
• Active waypoint identifier and distance
• GPS message status
ACTIVE LEG GPS NAVIGATION STATUS FIELD SYMBOLS
IAF
Arc Left
FAF
Holding Pattern
(Right Turns)
MAP
Holding Pattern
(Left Turns)
MAHP
Right Arrow
Parallel Track
Direct To
Arc Right
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-51
Primary Flight Display
2.16 Relative Wind Data
Wind Data
• Wind direction and speed
• Headwind (H)
The system computes current wind
conditions during flight and displays the
data in a dedicated field.
• Tailwind (T)
• Crosswind (X)
Status annunciations replace wind data when conditions are calm or the configured
data source is invalid or not available. Wind data displays when ground speed is
30 knots and higher.
A white arrow indicates wind direction relative to the aircraft’s heading. The numeric
display of the wind direction is dependent on the NAV Angle system unit setting.
Active Wind
Components
& Speed Values
Wind Direction
Arrow & Value
Speed
WIND STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
Calculated winds are less than or equal to 2.5 kts.
GPS track or TAS data are invalid or unavailable.
2-52
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.17 Temp/DALT Display
A dedicated field displays
outside air temperature or
density altitude based on pilot
selection. These reference
values are mutually exclusive.
Selecting one automatically
turns off the other.
Outside Air TEMP
Displays the pilot selected air
temperature reference.
Units are available in °C or °F.
Options include:
• Static Air Temperature
• Total Air Temperature
Density Altitude
Displays pressure altitude
corrected for nonstandard
temperature.
Units display in increments of
ten, and are in feet or meters
depending on altitude tape
configuration.
• Temperature difference
from ISA
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-53
Primary Flight Display
2.18 DME Display
When the GDU is configured with a GAD 43e and interfaced with a DME receiver, a
selectable DME information window is available for display. Information includes the
DME source (NAV1, NAV2, EXT, or HOLD) and distance.
When a DME signal is invalid, “– – – NM” replaces the distance.
DME Information Window
and Control
DME Control Menu
DME HOLD activates/deactivates the DME tuning hold function
and can be selected for either DME NAV 1 or DME NAV 2.
Switching between NAV1 and NAV2 automatically cancels the function.
Not all installations have the DME HOLD function.
2-54
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Primary Flight Display
2.19 Marker Beacon Symbols
Marker beacon symbols display left of the altitude tape when
interfaced to a marker beacon receiver. All marker beacon
light and audio tests are performed through controls on the
associated audio panel.
Inner Marker
Symbol
SYMBOL
MARKER TYPE
Inner
Middle
Outer
2.20 Radar Altitude
The GDU displays radar height when a radar altimeter is interfaced to the system.
Radar altitude displays to the left of the altitude tape. The RA altitude field
automatically displays when the aircraft is within operating range of the installed
radar altimeter unit (generally 2,500 ft AGL).
Brown and white hash marks depict a ground awareness band on the altimeter tape.
When the radar altimeter readout is 0 ft, the ground band will level with the altitude
pointer.
ROTORCRAFT ONLY
Depending on configuration, an audio alert is active when the radar altimeter
indicates the aircraft is descending below 100 ft.
As the aircraft climbs, the ground band moves
down the tape in equal amounts to the indicated
RAD ALT value.
Ground Band
If the radar altimeter fails, the message “RA FAIL”
annunciates in place of the current radar value.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
2-55
Primary Flight Display
2.20.1
RA Test
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Self-test functionality is not available on all radar altimeters
• Sequence duration is approximately 12-20 seconds
• For test values and unit limitations, consult the appropriate third party radar
altimeter documentation
A test function verifies communication between the GDU
and the radar altimeter.
During the test sequence:
• Ground awareness band displays on the altimeter tape
• RA readout field displays a test altitude value (e.g., 50 ft AGL)
To suspend the test, deselect RA Test or exit the Test menu.
2.21 Clock/Timer
A generic timer counts up in an H:MM:SS format. There are no aural alerts or pilot
advisories associated with this feature. Turning the clock/timer function off removes
the control key from the instrument display.
Mode: Toggles between Clock & Timer.
Start/Stop: Pauses timer.
Reset: Resets timer to zero. Count
resumes when the timer is reset during
operation.
2-56
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
3
Advanced Features
HSI MAP
3.1
HSI Map Overlays...................................................................................3-4
MAP DISPLAY, GDU 700L
3.2
GDU 700L Map Overlays........................................................................3-9
SVT
3.3
3.4
SVT Setup............................................................................................3-12
SVT Features........................................................................................3-13
AUTOPILOT
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
GPSS ...................................................................................................3-20
Flight Director......................................................................................3-22
Altitude Preselect Functions .................................................................3-24
Low Bank Mode ..................................................................................3-25
Servo Heading Reference .....................................................................3-25
Mode Annunciations ...........................................................................3-26
Autopilot Preflight Test ........................................................................3-30
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-1
Advanced Features
HSI Map
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Valid GPS position and magnetic heading
• FIS-B, Iridium transceiver, or SiriusXM receiver (weather overlays only)
• Active weather subscription (Connext and SiriusXM only)
• WX-500 receiver (Stormscope only)
• Valid VNAV data (ATK waypoints)
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• GDU 700P/1060 only
Tapping HSI Map places a map within the HSI. This key
resides in the PFD menu.
HSI MAP INTERACTIONS
• Map interactions are zoom only. Pan functionality is not available
• Overlays declutter at a predefined map range for specified data depictions
WHEN HSI MAP IS ACTIVE
• Standard HSI view expands to incorporate a basemap and selected overlay
• Map overlays replace standard HSI indications
• HSI display enlarges to a 270º compass card view to accommodate the map
• CDI and annunciations are removed
• CDI indications appear only on the LDI
• Status icons indicate active map overlays
• Bearing pointers do not display
• HSI reverts to a standard depiction in the absence of a valid magnetic
heading or GPS source
Data depicted when HSI Map is active
3-2
• GPS flight plan
• Airspace boundaries and altitudes
• TFRs
• Runway and SafeTaxi detail
• Range to altitude arc
• Terrain alerts, if configured
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
HSI Map
Standard HSI
HSI ARC
When a heading bug, track indicator, course preview pointer, or course pointer
moves to a position on the HSI circle behind or below other PFD controls, indicators
depict on a miniature arc, representative of the hidden portion of the HSI circle.
HSI Arc
CDI
LDI
LDI indications include:
• CDI source
• Course deviation
• GPS phase of flight
• Course deviation preview
• Navigator message annunciations
• To/from
• VLOC station identifier
• Waypoint arrival annunciation
GPS NAV Status Field
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-3
Advanced Features
3.1
HSI Map Overlays
TOPO
• Topographic map depicting terrain elevation
using a color scale similar to Sectional Charts
TERRAIN
• Terrain map depicting terrain elevation relative
to aircraft altitude
• Uses the same color scale as the dedicated
Terrain page
• NEXRAD weather overlay is disabled to
prevent confusion of depicting radar and
terrain data with similar colors
OBSTACLES AND WIRES
• Depicts obstacle and wire elevations relative to
aircraft altitude
• Uses the same color scale as the dedicated
Terrain page
• Data removed when viewing range is >5 nm
TRAFFIC
• Displays traffic using a NORMAL altitude filter
• Data removed when viewing range is >20 nm
3-4
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
NEXRAD/PRECIP & TFRS
• Overlays NEXRAD/PRECIP datalink weather
from ADS-B, SiriusXM, or Garmin Connext
[1] [2] as selected in the HSI Setup menu
• Precipitation intensity displays in accordance
with NEXRAD/PRECIP legend viewable on the
dedicated weather page
• Weather and TFR product age display on HSI
Setup Menu
STORMSCOPE
• Overlays Stormscope strike or cell data on
map [3]
• Data is removed after 4 minutes
LIGHTNING
• Depicts SiriusXM or Connext lightning strike
information on the basemap [1] [4]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
Requires aircraft to be equipped with appropriate datalink receiver and an active
datalink weather subscription service, if applicable. FIS-B is not a subscription
based service.
NEXRAD/PRECIP and terrain overlay functions are mutually exclusive. Enabling one
automatically disables the other.
Requires aircraft to be equipped with appropriate WX-series Stormscope system.
Stormscope and SXM lightning overlay functions are mutually exclusive. When
one is installed and selected in the PFD menu, the other is not available.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-5
Advanced Features
3.1.1
Overlay Status Icons
Icons represent the presence of overlay data. For real time products
(e.g., TFRs, NEXRAD/PRECIP), these icons indicate the recency of data.
The absence of an overlay icon means one of two possible conditions:
1. Overlay is not present at the current zoom level.
2. Overlay control is off.
Obstacles overlay data is active on the display.
Power line overlay data is active on the display.
TFR overlay is active.
Terrain overlay is active on the display.
Traffic system is active and displaying information.
NEXRAD or PRECIP overlay is active and displaying received
information.
Lightning overlay is active and displaying SiriusXM or Connext
lightning information.
Stormscope overlay is active and displaying lightning strikes.
FAULT INDICATION
A fault icon means overlay data is not available, not received, or has
failed (where relevant).
OLD DATA
An old data icon means overlay data is not current, but remains
displayed.
3-6
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
Map Display, GDU 700L
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• GDU 700L only
• Rotorcraft
• Map display feature must be configured as available
Tapping Map overlays a full screen map on the PFD.
MAP INTERACTIONS
• Map interactions are single-finger zoom controlled
• Pan functionality is not available
• Overlays declutter at a predefined map range
WHEN MAP IS ACTIVE
• VFR style moving map with 360º compass card replaces standard PFD layout
• Road and city information display in support of VFR operations
• Airspeed, altitude, BARO correction, and ground speed values display within
a selectable attitude indicator key
• Display automatically returns to full screen PFD in the event of extreme
attitudes
• PFD Menu key changes to accommodate only the map display
Map Orientation Label
True
North
Indicator
Attitude
Indicator
Key
Moving
Map
Arc VSI
Wind
Field
PFD
Alerts
Map
Menu
Key
Advisory
Key
Clock/Timer
Navigation
Data
Overlay Status
Icons
GDU 700L PFD Map Features
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-7
Advanced Features
Data depicted when PFD Map is active
• Full compass card view
• Reduced attitude display
• Lubber line and heading bug
• Arc VSI (if configured)
• Current ground track
• Wind field
• Selected Heading control and
current heading field
• Clock/timer
• Selected BARO control
• Active fix and distance to active fix
(if available from the navigator)
• Autopilot annunciations
ATTITUDE INDICATOR KEY
To return to full screen PFD, tap the attitude indicator key. This key displays a
reduced attitude depiction and instrument data fields. It resides in the upper right
corner of the display when full screen map is active. Data fields are display only.
Airspeed
Altitude
Reduced
Instrument
Depiction
Ground Speed
Barometric
Correction
Attitude Indicator Key
360º COMPASS CARD
Heading Bug
Lubber Line
Current
Ground
Track
Map Range
Indicator
Full Compass
Card
Aircraft
Symbol
HDG Control
& Indication
3-8
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
3.2
GDU 700L Map Overlays
Tapping Menu while the map is active opens an overlay menu.
Overlay selections display in a dedicated menu.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-9
Advanced Features
3.2.1
Overlay Controls
Control keys enable the specified overlay function only
and do not activate interfaced equipment. Overlay keys
remain active even in the absence of required data.
GDU 700L MAP OVERLAYS
TOPO
• Overlays topographical data and ground elevation scale
• Depictions are similar to a VFR sectional
• Overlays terrain map data
Terrain
Obstacles &
Wires
• Color shading depicts terrain elevation relative to the
aircraft’s altitude
• Depicts obstacle and wire elevations relative to aircraft
altitude
• Uses the same color scale as the dedicated terrain page
• Data removed when viewing range is >5 nm
• Overlays traffic information
Traffic
• Filter selection on Traffic page determines altitude range
• Optional
NEXRAD/PRECIP
& TFRs
• Overlays NEXRAD/PRECIP datalink weather from ADS-B,
SiriusXM, or Garmin Connext as selected in the Overlay
menu
• Precipitation intensity displays in accordance with
NEXRAD/PRECIP legend viewable on the dedicated
weather page
• Weather and TFR product age display
Stormscope
3-10
• Overlays Stormscope strike or cell data
• Data is removed after 4 minutes
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
3.2.2
Overlay Status Icons
Icons indicate which overlays are present at the current map range. A crossed out
icon means the overlay is active, but data is unavailable due to a failure, test, or
standby condition (where relevant).
The absence of an overlay icon means one of two possible conditions:
1. Overlay not present at the current detail level or zoom setting.
2. Overlay control is off.
Obstacles
Terrain
Power Lines
Traffic
Stormscope
Data not available
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-11
Advanced Features
SVT
NOTE
Synthetic terrain aids pilot awareness of terrain and obstacles in front of the
aircraft. It does not replace primary flight instruments.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Valid attitude and magnetic heading
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain and obstacle databases
• Feature enablement to continue service beyond the free trial period
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Loss of any required data, including temporary loss of GPS, causes SVT to be
removed until data is restored
• Depicts only terrain contours and obstacles from the associated databases.
Optional depictions (e.g., airport signs, aircraft heading) are dependent upon
pilot selections. Power line depictions are not available
• SVT terrain alerting functionality is not compliant with TSO-C151c
• Aural and visual alerting functions are in accordance with appendix H.2 of
AC 20-167A
3.3
SVT Setup
SVT setup selections are accessible via the Terrain/SVT key.
SELECTION
3-12
FUNCTION
Synthetic
Terrain
Activate SVT function.
Settings
Activate horizon heading markings and airport signs.
Terrain Inhibit
Deactivate Terrain aural and visual alerts.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
3.4
SVT Features
NOTE
GDUs with PFD functionality have a 10-hour free trial of SVT. A timer in the
Terrain/SVT menu indicates current trial status.
SVT presents a forward looking view of the terrain, obstacles, and traffic surrounding
the aircraft. This optional feature offers a visual enhancement to the PFD.
SVT Features
PFD
MFD
• Terrain Alerting
• Terrain Alerting
• Obstacle Alerting
• Obstacle Alerting
• SVT Alert Inhibit
• SVT Field of View
• Flight Path Marker
• SVT Alert Inhibit Controls
• Zero Pitch Line
• Arc-second Grid Lines
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Traffic Display
• Airport Signs
• Runway Display
• 3-D Alert Symbols
3.4.1
Pitch Scale Expansion
When SVT is active, the pitch scale expands to display fewer degrees of pitch. This
change in scale is necessary to maintain an accurate representation of terrain.
Default Pitch Scale
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pitch Scale with SVT
Pilot’s Guide
3-13
Advanced Features
3.4.2
Zero-Pitch Line
This horizontal reference line spans the width of the PFD. It is useful when quickly
determining whether the aircraft’s current altitude is above or below the approaching
terrain.
Zero-Pitch Line Above Mountains
3.4.3
Zero-Pitch Line Below Mountains
Flight Path Marker
WARNING
DO NOT USE THE FLIGHT PATH MARKER AS A FLIGHT DIRECTOR.
The flight path marker displays the aircraft’s
projected path relative to runways, traffic,
terrain, and obstacles.
It indicates the aircraft’s current lateral and
vertical path, accounting for wind speed and
direction relative to the 3-dimensional
terrain depiction.
Flight Path Marker
The flight path marker displays when SVT is enabled and active, and ground
speed is greater than 30 knots. This is useful when assessing potential conflicts
with terrain, obstacles, and traffic.
Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft's flight path depicted extending
above the FPM indicate a possible conflict.
3-14
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
3.4.4
SVT Terrain and Obstacles
Airport Sign
Zero-Pitch Line
with Horizon
Heading Markers
Flight Path
Marker
Synthetic Terrain
SVT Features
Depicts terrain in front of the
aircraft. Color palette indicates
terrain and obstacles at varying
elevations.
This imagery derives from the
aircraft’s attitude, heading, GPS
3-D position, and terrain and
obstacle databases.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-15
Advanced Features
Two-dimensional symbols represent an
obstacle’s relative height above terrain
and distance from the aircraft.
• Includes towers, power lines, and
wind turbines
• Obstacles never obstruct
instrumentation
• Size varies according to aircraft
proximity
TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE ALERTS
When interfaced to a GTN with TAWS- A, TAWS-B or HTAWS enabled, or when TXi
Terrain FLTA or TAWS-B is enabled, terrain and obstacle alerts include alert depictions
in SVT.
In the event of a terrain or obstacle
alert, SVT shading changes to red or
yellow, reflecting alert status.
SVT Warning Shade
SVT Caution Shade
Alerted Terrain
3-16
Alerted Obstacles
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
3.4.5
SVT Runways
Runway depictions provide improved awareness
of runway location with respect to surrounding
terrain. Runway thresholds correspond to their
correct elevation with respect to terrain.
Runways oriented within 45º of aircraft heading
are represented in white, others in gray.
The runway is brighter with a white box outline
when a runway approach is active. This
improves recognition of the intended runway.
Detail is added as the aircraft becomes closer to
the runway.This includes runway numbers and
centerlines. Taxiways are not shown in SVT.
3.4.6
SVT Traffic
Detected intruders display in their relative location as determined by the aircraft
traffic systems. Traffic in 3-D appears larger when closer, and smaller when further
away. Intruders above the zero pitch line are above the aircraft's altitude and
intruders below are lower.
SVT Traffic Display
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-17
Advanced Features
A white diamond indicates proximate traffic. A yellow circle indicates alerted traffic.
Proximity Advisory
3.4.7
Traffic Advisory
Selectable Display Features
Pilot selectable display features provide additional indications in synthetic vision.
HORIZON HEADINGS
Horizon heading marks synchronize
with the HSI. Tick marks and compass
heading display in 30º increments on
the zero-pitch line. These markings are
not visible behind the altimeter and
airspeed indicator.
AIRPORT SIGNS
Signs denote airport location and ID. These
indications are useful when flying into an
unfamiliar airport.
The type of indication is dependent on the
aircraft’s approach distance.
To reduce clutter, signs for private airports
display only if the airport is in the active
flight plan.
RANGE FROM
AIRPORT
3-18
SVT AIRPORT INDICATION
15 nm
Signpost and frame only.
8 nm
Identifier annunciates within frame.
4.5 nm
No indication (runway visible).
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
SVT FIELD OF VIEW (MFD)
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available only on GDU 1060
• Displays only when the Synthetic Terrain function is active
SVT Field of View
On MFD:
The Map page offers a depiction of the PFD’s
lateral view.
Terrain and traffic within this V-shaped indicator
are visible in synthetic vision.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-19
Autopilot
Autopilot Interface Functions
3.5
• GPSS
• Altitude capture
• Flight director
• Lateral/vertical deviations
• Mode annunciations
• VS preselect
• Half-bank mode
• Servo heading reference
GPSS
GPSS provides roll command signals from the navigator to the autopilot in order to:
• Make smooth transitions when passing waypoints
• Fly curved leg types (e.g., procedure turns and holding patterns)
Wpt 2
Flight Plan Leg 1
Flight Plan Leg 2
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Turn Anticipation
Curve
Aircraft
Present
Position
Wpt 3
Wpt 1
GPSS Turn Anticipation
If the autopilot is capable of receiving GPSS Roll Steering information and when
navigating using GPS guidance, data is transmitted through a digital communications
bus from the GDU to the autopilot. In dual GPS installations, the PFD sends Roll
Steering information for the currently-selected GPS source. For these autopilots there
is no pilot action required to use GPSS.
For autopilots that are not GPSS Roll Steering capable, the GDU converts GPSS turn
commands into a heading error signal for the autopilot. When autopilot is operated
in HDG mode and GPSS is selected on the PFD, the autopilot flies the turn
commands from the GPS navigator selected on PFD 1. An additional touchscreen
button is provided on the selected heading popup window for toggling the autopilot
heading reference between GPSS and selected heading. After setting the heading
bug, “GPSS” displays in selected heading field.
3-20
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
The AP HDG REF key is present if an
autopilot is interfaced with the GDU and
is configured to use GPSS emulation.
This key changes the autopilot’s heading
reference between HDG bug and GPSS.
When GPSS is selected:
• Heading bug changes from solid to
a cyan outline
• Selection key annunciates a GPSS
label
The heading bug may still be adjusted by the pilot as a visual reference without
affecting GPSS to the autopilot.
3.5.1
GPSS Mode Icons
ICON
CONDITION
Roll steering function is active, but no commands are sent.
GDU is sending roll steering commands to autopilot
(pilot side only).
GDU is sending roll steering commands to autopilot
(copilot side or second PFD only).
GDU is sending selected HDG commands without GPSS.
Heading bug on HSI is solid.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-21
Advanced Features
3.6
Flight Director
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Autopilot flight director commands interfaced to the TXi system
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
Pilot controls for flight director functions are not available on the GDU. They are
available only on the autopilot/flight director controller.
The TXi system limits the distance the flight director commands may deviate from the
aircraft attitude icon. If the pitch command provided by the flight director is greater
than that allowed by the display, then the command bars will display at the
maximum distance allowed by the PFD. As the aircraft pitch changes to satisfy the
command bars, the bars will continue display at the maximum distance from the
aircraft attitude symbol until the aircraft pitch deviation is within the command
display limit.
3.6.1
Command Cues
The Flight Director displays commands from the external flight director on the PFD.
Depending on aircraft type, these commands display as either single cue (fixed wing)
or dual cue (rotorcraft).
Single Cue
Dual Cue
Command
Bars
Command Bars
Aircraft
Symbol
Aircraft Symbol
Command bars
represent pitch and
roll guidance.
Descend Left
Command
3-22
Aircraft at
Commanded Attitude
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
CONDITION
COMMAND INDICATION
Commanded pitch is greater than
GDU maximum allowable limit.
Command bars display at maximum
allowable limit.
Aircraft pitch exceeds -20º/+30º.
Command bars and annunciations
declutter.
Aircraft roll exceeds ±65º.
Attitude information becomes invalid
or unavailable.
Command bars do not display.
AP ENGAGED INDICATION
For some autopilots, single cue command bars alternate between hollow and solid to
show autopilot status.
AP Engaged
Command bars are solid.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
AP Not Engaged
Command bars are hollow.
Pilot’s Guide
3-23
Advanced Features
3.7
Altitude Preselect Functions
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Mode availability is dependent upon autopilot type
3.7.1
Arming Altitude Capture
Depending on the autopilot and flight director interface, the GDU provides altitude
preselect capabilities. This allows autopilot to capture a preselected altitude.
If arming is required, ALT CAP arms the altitude capture function and sets the
altitude bug.
1. Specify altitude value.
2. Set ALT CAP to “ARMED.”
An optional ARM key is available on the
GCU 485 control panel.
If the autopilot does not support altitude preselect functionality, then the
selected altitude selected field acts as an altitude alerter. For more about the
selected altitude and altitude alerting functions, refer to section 2.7.
3.7.2
Enabling Vertical Speed Control
Depending on the autopilot and flight director interface, the GDU provides vertical
speed commands to autopilots.
1. Specify vertical speed value.
2. Set VS ENG to ENGAGED.
VS key label changes to reflect mode status.
“AUTO” indicates the autopilot is actively
scheduling vertical speed.
3-24
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
3.8
Low Bank Mode
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• PFD
• GFC 600 with low bank mode support
This feature is intended for aircraft that operate at high altitude or would otherwise
need low bank autopilot support (e.g., multi-engine aircraft experiencing engine
failure during takeoff).
Roll Limits
When crossing the altitude
threshold, enable low bank mode
by activating the associated
switch. A green arc appears on the
roll scale to indicate the roll limits.
Actual roll limits are determined by
the autopilot and based on
airframe type.
3.9
Servo Heading Reference
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• PFD
• GFC 600
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Rotorcraft only
For rotorcraft, the option to beep heading using the yaw beep switch is available
while hovering. This displays as the servo heading reference bug on the HSI and as a
numeric value in a field adjacent to the HSI.
Servo Heading
Reference Bug
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Servo Heading
Reference
Pilot’s Guide
3-25
Advanced Features
3.10 Mode Annunciations
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Applicable only to GFC 500/600 and KFC 225/275/325
Autopilot mode status annunciates along the top edge of the PFD.
• Green indicates active status
• White indicates armed mode
Lateral Modes Autopilot Status Vertical Modes
Active Mode
Armed Mode
Active Mode
Armed Mode
Autopilot Mode Status Banner
3.10.1
AP Basic Mode Annunciations
ROTORCRAFT ONLY
FIXED WING & ROTORCRAFT
Attitude Retention
Autopilot
Flight Director Coupled
Yaw Damper
Force Trim Release
Control Wheel Steering
Pitch, Roll, and Yaw
3-26
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
3.10.2
AP Lateral & Vertical Mode Annunciations
VERTICAL MODE
ANNUNCIATIONS
ALT
Altitude Hold
ALTS
Selected Altitude Capture
LATERAL MODE
ANNUNCIATIONS
BC
Backcourse Navigation
GPS Approach
GPS
APR
Approach
GPS Navigation
GA
Go Around
HDG
Heading
GP
Glidepath
LVL
Level Hold
GS
Glideslope
Localizer Approach
LOC
IAS
Indicated Airspeed
LVL
Level Hold
NAV
Navigation
PIT
Pitch Hold
ROL
Roll Hold
VNAV
Vertical Navigation
VAPP
VOR Approach [1]
VPTH
Vertical Path
VOR
VOR Navigation
VS
[1]
Localizer Navigation
Vertical Speed
GFC 600 only.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-27
Advanced Features
3.10.3
Autopilot Alerts
GFC 500/600 ALERTS, FIXED WING
ANNUNCIATION
DESCRIPTION
Preflight test in progress.
Preflight test failure.
Autopilot failure.
Autopilot is automatically disengaged.
Autopilot is manually disengaged. [1]
Pitch trim failure. Autopilot may remain engaged.
If autopilot disengages, re-engagement cannot occur until
after the problem is resolved. May be red or yellow.
Mistrim condition requiring nose up elevator trim.
Mistrim condition requiring nose down elevator trim.
Mistrim condition requiring roll trim to the left.
Mistrim condition requiring roll trim to the right.
Mistrim condition requiring rudder trim to the left.
Mistrim condition requiring rudder trim to the right.
Overspeed protection is active.
Underspeed protection is active.
Yaw damper failure. May be red or yellow.
[1]
3-28
Annunciation flashes for 5 seconds, then turns off.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Advanced Features
GFC 600 ALERTS, ROTORCRAFT
ANNUNCIATION
DESCRIPTION
Preflight test failure.
HFCS failure. May be flashing or solid.
Servo failure.
Out of detent.
Out of detent > 30 seconds. [1]
Servo is disengaging. [1]
HFCS Flight Director is disengaging. [1]
Overspeed protection is active.
Underspeed protection is active.
Yaw damper failure. May be yellow or red.
[1]
Annunciation flashes for 10 seconds, then turns off.
FOR ROTORCRAFT: The selected airspeed bug and control field are not present
during overspeed and underspeed protection modes.
Normal IAS
Operating Mode
Underspeed
Protection Active
Autopilot maintains airspeed at the current bug value.
This value annunciates with the active vertical mode.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
3-29
Advanced Features
3.11 Autopilot Preflight Test
WARNING
DO NOT USE AUTOPILOT IF IT DOES NOT DISENGAGE NORMALLY
DURING THE PREFLIGHT TEST.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• AP DISC availability is dependent upon unit configuration
If the system detects a malfunction in the AHRS, “ATTITUDE” annunciates on the
PFD and the autopilot disconnects. For more information, refer to the autopilot
operating instructions.
The GAD 43e uses AHRS attitude output to generate analog signal information for
an installed ADI-gyro based autopilot system. Should an error occur within the
GAD 43e or AHRS output, the autopilot will disengage. Test the autopilot disconnect
before each flight.
TEST THE AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT
1. Power up all avionics. Allow time for self-test completion.
2. Engage autopilot.
3. Select Test from the PFD Menu.
4. Tap AP DISC.
5. Verify autopilot disconnects.
3-30
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
4
Multi-Function Display
MFD SETUP
4.1
4.2
Nearest Airport Criteria..........................................................................4-4
MFD Resize Option ................................................................................4-4
MAP
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Map Interactions ...................................................................................4-8
Map Overlays .....................................................................................4-11
Map Detail ..........................................................................................4-14
Map Setup ..........................................................................................4-15
CHARTS
4.7
4.8
4.9
Chart Setup .........................................................................................4-28
Chart Selection ....................................................................................4-30
Aircraft Position Icon............................................................................4-31
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
4.10
4.11
4.12
Edit Data Fields ....................................................................................4-33
Collapse All Airways ............................................................................4-34
Flight Plan Map Indications ..................................................................4-35
WAYPOINTS
4.13
4.14
Waypoint Information..........................................................................4-38
Waypoint Selection..............................................................................4-41
SIRIUSXM AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT
4.15
4.16
SiriusXM Audio Activation ...................................................................4-44
Browse Music Channels .......................................................................4-44
EXTERNAL VIDEO
4.17
SD Video Setup ...................................................................................4-47
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-1
Multi-Function Display
Menu selections vary based on features and optional equipment installed with
Garmin avionics.
4-2
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
MFD Setup
MFD SYSTEM SELECTIONS
SELECTION
FUNCTION
• View unit, software, and database information
System Status
External LRUs
Setup
Units
• Check standby database availability
• Access Database SYNC, Chart Streaming, and manual
database update functions
• Check status of all configured LRUs
• Set the clock and click volume
• Create Weather page shortcut
Specify units of measure for displayed data. Selections
synchronize across all configured GDUs. Certain LRUs may
contain unit settings independent of the TXi system.
• Distance
• Temperature
• Altitude
• NAV Angle
Backlight
• Adjust display brightness
Crew Profile
• Access crew profile management function
Flight Stream
• Access Bluetooth Setup and Wi-Fi Setup menus
Aircraft Log
• View engine and airframe cycle counters
Exceedances
Export Data Log
190-01717-10 Rev. H
• View and acknowledge exceedance advisories
• Availability dependent upon unit configuration
• Save logged data to SD card
Pilot’s Guide
4-3
Multi-Function Display
4.1
Nearest Airport Criteria
Filtering criteria includes settings for minimum runway length and hard or soft
runway surface options. Selections determine which airports are available when
using the nearest airport search feature.
RUNWAY SURFACE
MINIMUM RUNWAY LENGTH
Aircraft runway surface selection:
• Any
Specify the shortest distance
required for takeoff and landing.
In the AFM/POH, this is typically
the distance given for sea level and
the coldest air temperature.
• Hard/Soft
• Hard Only
• Water
4.2
MFD Resize Option
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• GDU 1060 PFD/MFD units with software v3.00 and later
• Availability dependent upon configuration
• Accessible from the MFD Home page only
The Resize key allows you to change the size of the MFD screen.
This key resides on the MFD Home page.
Tapping the key once expands the MFD from the default 40%
screen area to 60%. Tapping it again returns the screen to
40% area.
4-4
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
Map
To increase situational awareness, the Map page depicts the
aircraft’s current position relative to land, aeronautical, weather,
and traffic information.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Active GPS source (aircraft position symbol)
• FIS-B, Iridium transceiver, or SiriusXM receiver (weather data)
• GDL 69, GDL 88, GTX 345, or GSR 56, with appropriate weather service
subscription (NEXRAD overlay)
• Active weather subscription (Connext and SiriusXM only)
• Valid charts database (ChartView, FliteCharts) with effective database cycle,
and aircraft to be airborne
• GWX 68, GWX 70, or GWX 75 (airborne weather radar overlay)
• WX-series Stormscope receiver (lightning data)
• GTS 8000 or feature enablement (TCAS II traffic data)
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Onboard weather radar not available for GDU 700( ) EIS/MFD configuration
Map
Orientation
Basemap
True North
Indicator
NAV Range
Ring
Map Range
Indicator
Actual Aircraft
Location
Aircraft Symbol
Map Overlay
Icons
Advisory
Key
Menu Key
Default Map Elements
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-5
Multi-Function Display
MAP OBJECT
Aircraft Symbol
FUNCTION
Depicts current aircraft position and orientation.
• Tip represents actual aircraft location
• Symbol type is dependent upon configuration
• Absent if GPS source is not available
Basemap
Page
Orientation
Label
Presents a graphical depiction of land and water data.
Basemap is always depicted.
Three orientations:
1. North Up orients map to north.
2. Heading Up orients map to current aircraft heading.
3. Track Up orients map to current aircraft GPS track.
North Indicator
Indicates True north. Tap to orient the map North Up.
Map Range
Indicator
Displays current map range in upper left quadrant of range
ring (i.e., distance from the aircraft to range ring).
NAV Range Ring
Displays current direction of travel on a rotating compass.
Orientation: Magnetic north
Map Overlay
Icons
Indicates status of overlays at the current map range.
Includes: lightning, obstacles, power lines, precipitation,
Stormscope, terrain, and traffic
Menu Key
Accesses map overlay controls and pilot selectable settings.
FEATURE LABELS
To maintain readability, map feature labels remain uniform at all zoom levels.
TRAFFIC UNITS
System Units page selections do not affect the display of traffic on the Map page.
If altitude system units are set to meters, the traffic overlay icon will
change, serving as a reminder that traffic altitude values remain in feet.
4-6
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
LAND AND WATER DEPICTIONS
Land and water data are for general reference only. Data accuracy is not suitable for
use as a primary navigation source. The information is intended to supplement and
not replace official government charts and notices.
DATA DRAWING ORDER
The electronic map draws data in order of priority, from highest (1) to lowest (39),
with higher priority features drawn atop those of lower priority.
LEVEL
FEATURE
LEVEL
FEATURE
1
Traffic
21
PIREP
2
Ownship
22
AIREP
3
Flight Plan
23
City Forecast
4
TAWS FLTA
24
Surface Conditions
5
Fuel Range Ring
25
Airspace
6
Weather Radar
26
Waypoints
7
Charts
27
Airways
8
Stormscope
28
Reference Grid
9
Point Obstacles
29
Turbulence
10
Line Obstacles
30
Icing
11
TFR
31
Radar Coverage
12
Freezing Level
32
Echo Tops
13
Cell Movement
33
NEXRAD
14
Lightning
34
Cloud Tops
15
METAR
35
SafeTaxi
16
Winds Aloft
36
Runways
17
SIGMET
37
Terrain
18
AIRMET
38
Basemap
19
Cyclone
39
Topo
20
County Warning
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-7
Multi-Function Display
4.3
Map Interactions
Typical map interactions include zoom, pan, and object selection.
PAN & ZOOM
Panning allows movement of the map in any direction without change to the current
zoom setting. Zooming adjusts the current magnification level between pilot
specified range parameters.
OBJECT SELECTION
Tapping any object or location on the map displays a map pointer and an information
banner.
MAP POINTER
This symbol indicates point of contact on the map. A gray circle
highlights any selected waypoint or obstacle.
INFO BANNER
Available information and controls are dependent upon object or location type and
proximity to other objects.
Selecting an
airport icon
displays the
airport’s highest
field elevation.
Selected
Object
Pan Mode
Annunciation
Active Overlay
Icons
(shifted up)
Waypoint Info
Key
Bearing, Distance,
Elevation, & ETE
Info Banner Features
• Pan mode annunciation
• Bearing, distance, and estimated time en route from current aircraft position to
map pointer
• Location elevation
• Next key for stacked objects
• Maximum altitude AGL and MSL for obstacles
• Information page access key for the selected waypoint, airspace, airport,
airport surface hot spot, or TFR
4-8
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
STACKED OBJECTS
To move the selector through each object in proximity of the map
pointer, select an object and tap Next.
Overlapping objects may
be difficult to identify at
a given zoom level.
Stack
Active
Selection
AIRSPACE INFO
When selected,
active airspace
boundaries change
color.
Selected Airspace
Airspace Info Key
Airspace Info Page Features
Airspace info pages have the same basic layout as waypoint info pages.
The upper portion contains specific data of the selected airspace.
The remainder of the page displays the active airspace boundary and a map of the
surrounding area. Data includes:
• Airspace status and type
• ATC entity responsible for the airspace, if applicable
• Floor and ceiling altitudes
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-9
Multi-Function Display
Airspace Type
Selected Airspace
Airspace Status
Responsible ATC
Entity
Airspace
Min & Max
Altitude Values
Active Airspace
Boundary
4-10
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
4.4
Map Overlays
Various map overlay selections may be
configured.The following overlay functions are
mutually exclusive. Enabling one automatically
disables the other.
• NEXRAD, terrain, and weather radar
overlays
• Stormscope and SXM lightning
• Cloud tops and echo tops
4.4.1
Overlay Controls
Control keys enable the specified overlay function only and
do not activate interfaced equipment. Overlay keys remain
active even in the absence of required data.
TOPO
• Overlays topographical data and ground
elevation scale
• Depictions are similar to a VFR sectional
TERRAIN
• Overlays terrain map data
• Color shading depicts terrain elevation relative to
the aircraft’s altitude
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-11
Multi-Function Display
AIRWAYS
• Overlays the selected airway type(s) with
identifier labels
• Options include: low, high, all, or off (none)
• High altitude airways are green, low altitude
airways are gray
AIRSPACES
• Overlays airspace boundaries with altitude
labels
CHARTS
• Overlays geo-referenced chart information
• Approach chart for the active flight plan in the
navigator
• Airport surface chart if nearest airport is within
200 nm and no approach is active
• Arrival and departure chart overlays are not
available
• Depicts planview area only; excludes inset
information (e.g., missed approach procedure
view)
• Optional
TRAFFIC
• Overlays traffic information
• Filter selection on Traffic page determines
altitude range
• Optional
4-12
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
RADAR
• Overlays airborne weather radar information
• Depictions are identical to those on Weather
Radar page
• Excludes WATCH shading
• Optional
NEXRAD
• Overlays datalink precipitation weather
information, including product age
• Optional
4.4.2
Overlay Status Icons
Icons indicate which overlays are present at the current map range. A crossed out
icon means the overlay is active, but data is unavailable due to a failure, test, or
standby condition (where relevant).
The absence of an overlay icon means one of two possible conditions:
1. Overlay not present at the current detail level or zoom setting.
2. Overlay control is off.
Obstacles
Terrain
Power Lines
Traffic
Stormscope
Data not available
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-13
Multi-Function Display
4.5
Map Detail
4 (Most)
An adjustable slider controls the level of
detail on the map.
Changes to the map detail level take
effect immediately.
3
2
1 (Least)
MAP DETAIL LEVEL
FEATURE
4
3
2
1
Small Cities
Medium Cities
Large Cities
Freeways
Highways
Roads
Railroads
Basemap Labels
VORs
NDBs
Line Obstacles
Point Obstacles
Airspaces that are not
prohibited or restricted
Waypoints
SafeTaxi
Prohibited Airspaces
Present
4-14
Pilot’s Guide
Removed
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
4.6
Map Setup
Overlay data controls are located in the Map Setup
menu. Changes to an overlay setting take effect
immediately. Selections are organized into five groups.
RESTORE DEFAULTS
Located in the bottom of each list. This key restores all
original factory settings for the active group tab.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-15
Multi-Function Display
4.6.1
Map Selections
All Map tab selections provide on/off
and range setting options unless
otherwise noted.
Map
Orientation
North Up Above
4-16
• Specifies map display orientation
• Label above North indicator shows current orientation
• Specifies range at which the map orientation changes to
North Up
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
• Automatically adjusts page to display the next waypoint
in flight plan at the closest possible map range
• Presents SafeTaxi data while aircraft is on ground
Auto Zoom
• Automatic functionality is overridden during manual
zoom interactions. It resumes when:
•Another waypoint is in sequence
•Aircraft transitions from on ground to airborne
•Auto zoom range matches manual override range
• Set minimum and maximum values to best meet
operational needs
• Indicates current ground track
Track Vector
• End of arrow represents aircraft position at the specified
time interval
• Estimates the remaining range at the current fuel
consumption rate and ground speed [1]
Fuel Range Ring
• Calculations are based on the pilot specified fuel
quantity in the fuel computer
• Dashed green circle indicates selected range to reserve
fuel
• Solid yellow circle indicates total endurance range
Selected ALT
Range Arc
• Represents location at which the aircraft is expected to
reach selected altitude [2]
Altitude
Constraints
• Displays altitude constraint labels within the flight plan
Enhanced
Range Ring
LAT/LON Lines
• Provides a more precise indication of distance between
the aircraft and map objects
• Fixed range value at half the distance of NAV range ring
• Displays latitude and longitude lines
• Depicts lateral terrain view presented in SVT [2]
Field of View
• Synthetic Terrain function on PFD must be active for
indication to display
TOPO Scale
• Displays a topographical elevation scale
Chart Color
Scheme
• Changes chart overlay color for day or night view
[1]
[1]
Requires EIS.
GDU 1060 only.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-17
Multi-Function Display
Fuel Range Ring
Range to
Reserve Fuel
Enhanced Range Ring
Range to
Empty
NAV
Range Ring
Field of View
(GDU 1060 Only)
Selected ALT Range Arc
(GDU 1060 Only)
TOPO Scale
4-18
Enhanced
Range Ring
Track Vector
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
When choosing map scales:
• Consider which map scales or zoom levels to use to achieve the desired level
of detail and map information.
• Generally, use smaller map scales or zoom levels in and around terminal areas
and whenever precise navigation is required
(e.g., airway or radial intercepts).
• During cruise flight, map scale settings often increase to balance navigation,
situational awareness, and decision making.
Map Orientation sets the map page to either North Up, Track Up, or Heading Up.
North Up is useful when zoomed out to view the entire route or a frontal system
on a NEXRAD display.
Using the North Up Above feature causes the screen to switch at certain zoom
levels. This is useful as a shortcut to quickly increase situational awareness.
Track vector length options display as a dashed line and arrow extending from the
aircraft icon, showing current track and distance the aircraft will travel in the
selected time.
If the track vector is placed over a point on the map, and no data is entered into
the system, the GDU indicates a wind-corrected GPS track to that point. This is
useful for intercepting airways and radials, making small but positive lateral
corrections during approaches, and in setting up for arrivals in the terminal area.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-19
Multi-Function Display
4.6.2
Aviation Selections
Setup options allow the customization of
aeronautical information.
• Filter airspace data according to
altitude
• Select a TFR source
• Specify airway types and range
values
• Customize the display of SafeTaxi
and waypoint data
• Display runway extensions for a
destination airport
With the exception of TFRs, all Aviation
tab selections provide on/off and range
setting options.
The runway feature extends the runway’s centerline out 5 NM from the runway
threshold. This is useful when setting up for a visual approach, especially at
airports with parallel runways or low visibility.
4-20
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
AVIATION DATA SYMBOLS
Non-towered,
non-serviced airport
Non-towered, serviced
airport
Towered, non-serviced
airport
Towered, serviced airport
Soft surface,
non-serviced airport
Soft surface, serviced
airport
Restricted (private)
airport
Unknown airport
Heliport
ILS/DME or DME only
Intersection
LOM
NDB
TACAN
VOR
VRP
VOR/DME
User Airport
VORTAC
User Waypoint
Runway extension
ATK
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-21
Multi-Function Display
4.6.3
Smart Airspace
Garmin’s Smart Airspace feature automatically de-emphasizes non-pertinent airspace
away from the aircraft’s current altitude. An airspace boundary turns gray when its
vertical proximity to the aircraft is >1,000 ft. This range increases linearly to 2,000 ft
as the aircraft ascends to 10,000 ft.
SMART AIRSPACE CRITERIA
AIRCRAFT
ALTITUDE
AIRSPACE PROXIMITY
TO AIRCRAFT [1]
Sea level
>1,000 ft
>10,000 ft
2,000 ft
[1]Vertical distance above and below aircraft altitude.
Non-pertinent
Airspace
Smart Airspace Off
Smart Airspace On
AIRSPACE DATA SYMBOLS
4-22
Class B Altitude Label
(ceiling/floor)
Class C/TCA
Class C Altitude
Label (ceiling/floor)
Class D
Class D Altitude
Label (ceiling only)
Restricted
TFR
MOA
Class B/TMA
Other/ADIZ
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
4.6.4
SafeTaxi
During flight, SafeTaxi database is mutually exclusive with chart databases.
SafeTaxi and hot spot data display only when the Charts overlay is off.
SafeTaxi Features
• Airport diagram overlay that includes hot spot information
• Aircraft position relative to taxiways, runways, and airport landmarks
• Automatically overrides Charts overlay function during ground operations
• Pilot selectable range options
SafeTaxi provides greater map detail
and higher image resolution at lower
zoom levels.
Feature labels denote:
• Runways
• Taxiways
• Airport landmarks
SAFETAXI DATA SYMBOLS
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Runway
Taxiway
Helipad
Construction Area
Airport Beacon
Unpaved Parking
Pilot’s Guide
4-23
Multi-Function Display
HOT SPOTS
SafeTaxi hot spots identify locations on an airport surface where positional confusion
or runway incursions are likely to occur. These known problem areas require
heightened attention by pilots.
The following airport features may be deemed
hot spots by aviation authorities.
• Intersecting taxiways and runways
• Complex ramp areas
• Directional limitations
• Limited wing-tip clearance
• Overflight risk
Selecting the border of a hot spot displays a
brief summary of the indicated hazard and
an information key.
Accessing this key provides additional location information.
Numbering corresponds to a list on the airport diagram.
Location Info
Overlay Icons
(not hidden)
CONSTRUCTION SPOTS
There are no expanded detail keys or notes
associated with construction areas.
Construction Area Border
4-24
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
4.6.5
Land Selections
Selections include on/off and range setting
options for all land features.
LAND DATA SYMBOLS
Railroad
National Highway
River/Lake
Freeway
State/Province Border
Small City
Local Road
Medium City
Local Highway
Large City
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-25
Multi-Function Display
4.6.6
Traffic Selections
Filter traffic data according to type.
Other selections include on/off and
range setting options.
4.6.7
Weather Selections
Setup options are available for all active
weather services.
• Alternate between lightning
display modes (Stormscope only)
• Specify a datalink weather source
• Toggle individual weather
products on/off
4-26
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
Charts
The Charts page provides terminal procedures and airport
surface diagrams.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• A current and valid chart database
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Geo-referencing is not available for some arrival and departure charts
• FliteCharts and ChartView databases are optional and mutually exclusive
Off Scale Areas
Active Chart
Aircraft
Position
Icon
Chart Status
Field
Menu Key
Chart Selection
Key
Charts Page
CHART STATUS
Active chart status displays in the lower left corner of the Charts page.
Charts are in the process up updating.
Charts are up to date.
Database is out of date.
Database is installed before it is current.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-27
Multi-Function Display
4.7
Chart Setup
Chart setup selections reside in the Charts
menu.
Chart
Information
Chart Color
Scheme
Displays individual sections of a chart in the ChartView
database only. Options include:
• All
• Header
• Profile
• Minimums
• Planview
Toggles chart color scheme between day and night modes.
• Day mode displays black on white background
• Night mode displays inverse white on black background
• Enables automatic streaming of individual charts to the
GDU during database synchronization
Chart
Streaming
• Streams from the newest chart database
• Charts from the previously loaded database remain
available for display
• Toggling this function off does not affect Database SYNC
• No restart required
Chart Type
• Toggles chart database type between FliteCharts and
ChartView
• Selections must be made on the ground
• Restart required for changes to take effect
4-28
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
CHARTVIEW INFORMATION SECTIONS
Header
Planview
Profile
Minimums
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-29
Multi-Function Display
4.8
Chart Selection
To open a menu, tap Select. Enter an
airport identifier and choose from the
available chart types.
CHART TYPES
Information
Airport surface charts, alternate minimums, rate of climb and
descent tables, inoperative components or visual aids tables,
hot spots, land and hold-short operations, and other
destination specific flight data.
Departure
Departure route descriptions, including takeoff minimums and
obstacle notes.
Arrival
Arrival procedure instructions.
Arrival charts are listed in alphabetical order.
Approach
All approach charts associated with the selected airport.
Charts are listed according to level of precision and approach
type. Runways are listed in numerical order.
AUTOMATIC CHART SELECTION
Automatic chart selection occurs every time the Charts page is opened. The type of
chart selected is determined by aircraft status and content from the active flight plan.
This function does not override manual chart selections unless a change occurs
during one of the following conditions.
CONDITION
CHART DISPLAY DEFAULT
No flight plan or destination airport is
present.
Nearest airport diagram.
Aircraft is on the ground.
Nearest airport diagram (regardless of
flight plan).
Flight plan is present, but approach is
not loaded.
Airport surface chart for previous airport
in flight plan.
Approach is loaded in the selected
GPS navigator.
Applicable approach chart.
No charts are available for a selected
airport.
“Chart not available for [airport ID].”
4-30
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
4.9
Aircraft Position Icon
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Aircraft position is fully within chart boundaries
• FliteCharts or ChartView is active (airborne maneuvers only)
• SafeTaxi is active (ground maneuvers only)
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• SIDs and STARs do not support the display of aircraft position
• Not available for arrival and departure charts
• Displays only within the planview area of geo-referenced approach charts
Aircraft position displays on airport diagrams and approach charts when the current
position is known.
POSITION UNAVAILABLE INDICATION
A fault icon displays in the lower right-hand page corner when:
• Aircraft position data is not available
• Backup GPS is in use
• Selected chart does not contain geo-referenced data
• Selected chart layer is not All or Planview
OFF SCALE AREAS
Some charts contain supplemental information within
the planview. These areas are considered off scale as
they are not geographically accurate.
Aircraft position depictions in off scale areas should
be judged relative to the geo-referenced information
within the planview only.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-31
Multi-Function Display
Active Flight Plan
Current flight plan information received from a Garmin navigator
displays as a scrolling list on the Active Flight Plan page.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• External GPS navigator
• Configured GTN, v6.50 or later (VNAV constraint data)
• Active flight plan
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Create, edit, and delete functionality not available on GDU. Any alterations
to a flight plan must be performed using the external navigator
• Displays up to 100 waypoints for an active flight plan
Waypoint
Identifier
Column
Selectable Data
Field Columns
Procedure
Header
Airport Info
Key
Active Leg
Indicator
Leg Data
Current Waypoint
Waypoint Type
Icon
Selecting a
waypoint
identifier opens
the associated
info page.
Active VNAV
Constraint Data
Active Flight Plan Page
AIRPORT INFO
For convenience, airport information is directly accessible from
the procedure header. This includes airports specified in active
approaches, arrivals, and departures.
4-32
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
ACTIVE VNAV CONSTRAINT WINDOW
VNAV Constraint Data
VS TGT and FPA are pilot-specified
values received from the GTN. All
other constraint values are based
on VNAV calculations.
ALT - Altitude Constraints
VS TGT - Vertical Speed Target
VS REQ - Vertical Speed Required
V DEV - Vertical Deviation
TOD/BOD - Top/Bottom of Descent
FPA - Flight Path Angle
The TOD field may change to
display BOD once the top of
descent value counts down to
zero.
4.10 Edit Data Fields
To select a flight plan data column, tap
Edit Data Fields. Columns are arranged in
numerical order (1 - 3).
To restore columns to default display settings,
tap Restore Defaults.
Data Field Selections
ALT - Altitude Constraint
CUM - Cumulative Distance
DIS - Distance
DTK - Desired Track
ETA - Est. Time of Arrival
ETE - Est. Time En Route
FPA - Flight Path Angle
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Selections are identical for each
column.
By default, flight plan information
fields display:
Column 1: DTK
Column 2: DIS
Column 3: CUM
Pilot’s Guide
4-33
Multi-Function Display
4.11 Collapse All Airways
Airways automatically display as flight plan legs. A single airway may contain
numerous legs. Airways without an active leg collapse for simplification.
This does not affect airway legs shown on the external navigator(s).
Airway Indication
All airways begin with
an indicator field and
end with an exit
identifier.
Expanded Airway
Detail
To hide all waypoints
along an airway, but
not the airway’s exit
waypoint, tap
Collapse All Airways.
Airway Collapsed
Indication
Exit Waypoint
4-34
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
4.12 Flight Plan Map Indications
FLIGHT PLAN LEG STATUS
LEG STATUS
COLOR
Active
Magenta
Next & Future
White
Past or Inactive
Gray
Active, next, and previous flight plan legs
overlay on the Map page and HSI Map.
These indications are display only.
Next Leg
Active Leg
Past Leg
MFD Map
190-01717-10 Rev. H
HSI Map
Pilot’s Guide
Next Leg
Active Leg
Past Leg
Active
Flight Plan
4-35
Multi-Function Display
ALONG TRACK WAYPOINT IDENTIFIER LABELS
The along track waypoint (ATK) icon represents a temporary lateral
position (or checkpoint) relative to an existing waypoint in the flight
plan.
Waypoint ID
Offset Distance
Identifier labels on the Map page denote
the adjacent waypoint’s ID and offset
distance from the specified ATK.
ATK Icon
Abbreviated
Map Label
Selecting an ATK displays its bearing and
distance in the info banner.
ATK
Identifier
Unlike waypoints, ATKs
indicate a temporary route fix
in the flight plan. The GDU
receives this data from the
navigator, not a database.
Offset
Detail
Waypoint
Active Flight
Plan Page
Enabling the altitude constraint function in the Map Setup menu adds a VNAV
altitude reference to the flight plan. The ATK serves as a lateral checkpoint when the
feature is off.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT LABELS
Altitude constraint data display as text labels on the Map
page. Units are typically feet or meters depending on
current altitude setting in the Units page. They display as
flight level altitudes if specified as such on the navigator.
Altitude
Constraint
Label
4-36
If excessive labels are cluttering the map, this feature
may be turned off.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
USER AIRPORT ICON
A dedicated icon indicates user created airport waypoints received
from the external GPS navigator.
User airport indications display on both the
Active Flight Plan and Map pages.
Identifier Type Icon
Selected User
Airport
When selected,
the user identifier
annunciates in the
info banner.
User Identifier
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-37
Multi-Function Display
Waypoints
Dedicated information pages provide waypoint search functions
and details not available on the Map page.
4.13 Waypoint Information
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Viewing NOTAMs requires ChartView or FIS-B
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• 2-D maps provide zoom functionality only (panning is not available)
• FIS-B transmits distant and FDC NOTAMs within 100 nm of radio station
position
Waypoints are organized into five
groups:
1. Airports
2. Intersection
3. VOR
4. VRP
5. NDB
The Airport page is a great place to start while performing an approach brief,
checking weather, or considering a diversion.
4-38
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
Intersection, VOR, VRP, and NDB information pages have a uniform layout.
Waypoint Distance
and Bearing
WP Identifier
Key
Waypoint
Coordinates
Location
Information
Nearest NAVAID
Information
Map Display
Intersection Page
COMMON PAGE FEATURES
All waypoint information pages share the following features.
Data fields:
• Distance and bearing from current aircraft position
• Latitude and longitude
• Applicable country and/or region (e.g., “SW USA”)
• 2-D map of the surrounding area (Map views display on Preview and
Runways tabs of the Airports page)
• Identifier and type icon
Controls:
• Waypoint Identifier key with access to multiple search tab
WAYPOINT SPECIFIC PAGE FEATURES
The following features are unique to the corresponding waypoint.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-39
Multi-Function Display
Airport
Selectable tabs:
Info: Airport location, elevation, time zone, airport charts, and
fuel availability.
To open the specified airport chart, tap
View Charts.
Preview: SafeTaxi depiction of airport and surrounding area.
Runway: Identifiers, size, surface type, traffic pattern direction,
and PCL frequency.
To open a list of available runways, tap
Runways.
Frequencies: Available communication and localizer
frequencies. The “c” symbol denotes frequencies that function
as the CTAF. If available, for additional frequency information,
tap “More Information.”
Weather Data: METARs, city forecast, and TAF weather
information for an airport.
NOTAMs: Applicable distant and FDC NOTAMs.
Airport Directory: Airport arrival information including local
information based on AC-U-KWIK or AOPA data.
Intersection
Data fields:
From NRST VOR: identifier, type icon, bearing, and distance
Very High Frequency Omni-directional Range
Data fields:
• Frequency
• To NRST APT: identifier, type icon, bearing, and distance
• Station Declination
• VOR Class
Visual Reporting Point
Data fields:
To NRST APT: identifier, type icon, bearing, and distance
Non-Directional Beacon
Data fields:
• Frequency
• To NRST APT: identifier, type icon, bearing, and distance
• Marker Description
4-40
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
4.14 Waypoint Selection
The WP Identifier key provides access to different
waypoint search options. Enter a specific identifier or
select one from the available search tabs.
4.14.1
Waypoint Autofill
Autofilled
Character
The autofill function assigns alphanumeric
values into search entry fields.
Autofill characters are cyan and display from
cursor position to the right of the field.
Identifier
Name
Waypoint
Icon
Characters autofill based on the first alphabetical match in the navigation database.
Matching entries typically change with the addition of a each typed character.
“No matches found” and “Duplicate found” annunciate when applicable.
4.14.2
Search Tabs
The Find key provides access to multiple search tabs.
Each tab displays a list of identifiers based on specific criteria.
Waypoint
Identifier
Type Icon
Each entry includes general
information about the associated
waypoint.
Bearing
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Distance
Pilot’s Guide
4-41
Multi-Function Display
RECENT
Lists up to 20 of the most recently viewed waypoints.
NEAREST
Lists up to 25 waypoints within a 200 nm radius.
Tap Filter and select from the available filter options. Only
waypoints belonging to the selected class appear in the list.
To list all classes, select All.
FLIGHT PLAN
Lists all waypoints contained in the active flight plan.
SEARCH NAME
Lists all airports, NDBs, and VORs associated with the specified
facility name. Tap the key and enter the facility’s name.
SEARCH CITY
Lists all airports, NDBs, and VORs found in proximity of the
specified city. Tap the key and enter the city’s name.
4-42
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
SiriusXM Audio Entertainment
The Music page provides controls for tuning and presetting
satellite radio music channels.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Active SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription
• Audio Radio and/or Data Radio ID
• Configured GDL 69/69A interface
SXM Signal
Level
Information
Window
Channel
Selection Key
Channel Seek
Controls
Preset
Channel Keys
Browse
Categories Key
Preset Group
Key
Volume
Controls
Mute Key
Music Page
RADIO VOLUME
Directional keys allow volume
adjustments.
Decrease
Volume
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Increase Mute
Volume Inactive
Mute toggles radio volume
on or off.
Pilot’s Guide
4-43
Multi-Function Display
4.15 SiriusXM Audio Activation
The GDL 69/69A Status page provides information necessary for
activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio services. To access this page,
navigate to the External LRUs list, or tap Status.
For information, refer to GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions.
For subscription activation instructions, visit https://www.siriusxm.com/sxmaviation.
If the Audio Radio ID and/or Data Radio ID
do not display during GDL 69 operation,
contact a Garmin dealer.
4.16 Browse Music Channels
SiriusXM Radio Options
• Channels 0 to 999
Music provides both numeric entry and
channel seek functionality.
• Categories 0 to 63
4.16.1
Audio Category Selection
To filter the list of available channels according to a specific music
type, tap Category.
Current Category
Selection
Current Channel
Selection
Category Key
Active Channel
Indication
4-44
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
4.16.2
Direct Channel Tuning
To enter a specific radio channel by
number, tap Channel.
ASSIGNING CHANNEL PRESETS
Quick Tuning Options
• Six preset groups
• Up to three preset channels per
group
For quick tuning, use presets to store
multiple channels in the unit’s
memory.
To assign a channel preset:
1. Select a channel.
2. Tap Presets until desired
preset group displays.
3. Tap and hold any preset key
for three seconds.
To select a preset:
1. Select a preset group.
2. Tap any preset key.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-45
Multi-Function Display
External Video
The Video page displays live video from up to four mounted
cameras.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Composite or HD video camera input
• Purchased External Video feature enabled on GDU
SD Display
(Control Window Active)
HD Display
INPUT SOURCES
FORMAT
LIMIT
SD
2
HD
2
Two inputs are available for each video
format. If an input source is not available,
“No Video Input Signal” annunciates in
place of a live image.
Camera designations are configured during installation.
PAN & ZOOM
Zooming magnifies the live image up to 10x its range.
Zoom settings apply only to the active camera display.
Panning allows movement of the zoomed image in any direction.
4-46
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Multi-Function Display
4.17 SD Video Setup
SD Display Settings
Selectable display settings are available
for SD video only.
HD display settings are configured at
installation.
• Brightness
• Contrast
• Saturation
4.17.1
Settings Key
To open a control
window, tap Settings.
To return to normal
display mode, tap Full.
SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT
Directional keys allow adjustment of
the active setting. Setting values are
adjustable for each SD source.
Active
Setting
Decrease
Level
Increase
Level
RESTORE DEFAULTS
• Restores the active video display settings
configured at installation
• Requires pilot confirmation
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
4-47
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
4-48
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5
Weather Awareness
WEATHER DISPLAY
5.1
Weather Products ..................................................................................5-3
DATALINK WEATHER
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
5.25
Weather Page Interactions .....................................................................5-6
Weather Product Age ............................................................................5-8
Precipitation ..........................................................................................5-9
Echo Tops............................................................................................5-12
Clouds.................................................................................................5-12
Lightning .............................................................................................5-13
METARs and TAFs................................................................................5-14
Cell Movement ....................................................................................5-15
AIRMETs ..............................................................................................5-16
Center Weather Advisory.....................................................................5-18
SIGMETs ..............................................................................................5-18
County Warnings ................................................................................5-19
Cyclone/Hurricane Track ......................................................................5-19
AIREP/PIREPs ........................................................................................5-20
Surface Analysis...................................................................................5-21
City Forecast........................................................................................5-21
Winds Aloft .........................................................................................5-22
Icing ....................................................................................................5-23
Turbulence ..........................................................................................5-24
Freezing Levels.....................................................................................5-25
TFRs ....................................................................................................5-26
SiriusXM ..............................................................................................5-27
FIS-B Weather......................................................................................5-30
Connext Weather ................................................................................5-34
STORMSCOPE
5.26
5.27
Stormscope Page .................................................................................5-39
Stormscope Setup ...............................................................................5-40
AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
5.28
5.29
5.30
5.31
5.32
Weather Radar Page ............................................................................5-42
Weather Radar Setup...........................................................................5-44
Radar Modes .......................................................................................5-48
Radar Controls ....................................................................................5-52
Radar Alerts.........................................................................................5-56
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-1
Weather Awareness
Weather Display
Weather data displays as overlays on the dedicated weather page,
Map page, and HSI Map. Available functions depend on the active
weather source(s).
Weather Product
Timestamp
Page Orientation
Label
Range Ring
Aircraft Position
WX Feature Detail
Scrollable Legend
Menu Key
Bearing and Distance
from Map Pointer
WX ALT
Common Weather Elements
5-2
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.1
Weather Products
WEATHER DISPLAY
MFD WX
PAGE
MFD WX
POP-UP
TEXT
X, C
X, C
AIRMET (Graphical)
F, X, C
F, X, C
Cell Movement/SCIT
X
X
Center Weather
Advisory
F
F
City Forecast
X
X
WEATHER PRODUCT
AIRMET (Textual)
Cloud Top/IR Satellite
HSI MAP
X
Cyclone Track
X
Echo Tops
X
Freezing Levels/Zero
Degree Isotherm
X
X
X, C
X
X
Icing Potential/SLD
F, X
Lightning (Datalink)
F, X, C
F, X, C
F, X, C
S
S
S
Lightning
(Stormscope)
METAR w/Decoding
F, X, C
NEXRAD/PRECIP
F, X, C
F, X, C
F, X, C
F, X, C
F
AIREP
X
X
PIREP
F, X, C
F, X, C
SIGMET
F, X, C
F, X, C
TAF
Temps Aloft
TFR
190-01717-10 Rev. H
F, X, C
F, X, C
NOTAMS
Surface Analysis
WAYPT
INFO
(ARPT)
X
F, X, C
County Warnings
MFD MAP
PAGE
X
F, X, C
F, X, C
F, X
F
F, X, C
F, X, C
F, X, C
Pilot’s Guide
F, X, C
5-3
Weather Awareness
WEATHER DISPLAY
WEATHER PRODUCT
Turbulence
Weather Radar
(on-board) [1]
Winds Aloft
[1]
MFD WX
PAGE
MFD WX
POP-UP
TEXT
HSI MAP
MFD MAP
PAGE
WAYPT
INFO
(ARPT)
F, X
W
W
F, X, C
Not supported on split screen MFD/EIS.
LEGEND
Connext Product
C
FIS-B Product
F
On-board WX Radar Equipment
W
SiriusXM Product
X
Stormscope Product
S
5-4
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
Datalink Weather
WARNING
DO NOT RELY SOLELY ON DATALINK WEATHER FOR WEATHER
INFORMATION. DATALINK WEATHER PROVIDES A SNAPSHOT IN TIME.
IT MAY NOT ACCURATELY REFLECT THE CURRENT WEATHER
SITUATION.
NOTE
Datalink weather is not intended to replace weather briefings or in-flight
weather reports from AFSS or ATC.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• FIS-B, GSR 56 transceiver, GDL 69/69A, or GDL 69/69A SXM receiver
Datalink weather services are available through FIS-B Weather, SiriusXM Weather,
and Connext WX that transmit from a ground station or satellite.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-5
Weather Awareness
5.2
Weather Page Interactions
ALTITUDE ADJUSTMENT KEYS
Selected
Altitude
Plus and minus keys adjust altitude in increments for
altitude-based weather products.
Selectable altitude values vary by weather service and
product. Includes: Icing, Turbulence, and Winds Aloft
WEATHER ICONS
Tapping any weather icon displays an information banner. When applicable, a
pop-up window displays additional data.
Selected Object
(Cloud Top)
Map Pointer
Weather Icons
(METARs, Fronts,
Lightning, Clouds)
Cloud Top Altitude
and Icon
Bearing and
Distance
Pan Mode Symbol
WX Info Banner Features
• Pan mode symbol
• Bearing and distance to map
pointer from aircraft’s current
position
• Cloud Top altitudes
• Pan location
• Report data
5-6
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
AIRPORT ICONS
Tapping an airport icon displays information about local
weather conditions.
PRODUCT LEGENDS
A scrollable legend provides relevant product colors and symbols via the data link
weather menu page. Definitions are organized by product function.
To view a product legend, tap the Menu key and select Legend.
Product Functions
Scroll Bar
Close Key
Menu Key
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-7
Weather Awareness
5.3
Weather Product Age
NOTE
Data contained within a composite weather product may be older than
its weather product age and should never be considered current.
A timestamp identifies the approximate time of data collection for each weather
product. For quick reference, the age of each active weather product is calculated
and shown in a color-coded side bar on the Weather and Map pages.
TIMESTAMP COLOR DEFINITIONS
Yellow
Weather product is considered stale. Its age is older than
half its expiration time.
A weather product may be yellow when its issue date and
time occurs in the future by more than the complete
expiration time for the requested weather product.
(e.g., some TFRs).
Green
Weather product is considered current. Its age is newer
than half its expiration time.
Tapping the Timestamp window displays time for all green
colored weather products.
Gray
Weather product data is one of the following:
• Expired
• Not received
• Not supported at the selected altitude
“No Data” or “ALT UNAVBL” displays next to the weather
product title.
On PFD:
Timestamps for NEXRAD/PRECIP,
lightning, and TFR products display in
the HSI Setup menu.
5-8
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.4
Precipitation
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM | CONNEXT
5.4.1
NEXRAD
WARNING
NEVER USE NEXRAD WEATHER FOR MANEUVERING IN, NEAR, OR
AROUND AREAS OF HAZARDOUS WEATHER. NEXRAD IMAGES ARE
SNAPSHOTS OF PAST WEATHER DATA. THEY ARE NOT SAFE FOR USE
AS REAL TIME DEPICTIONS OF NEARBY WEATHER ACTIVITY.
NEXRAD weather radar displays a mosaic of precipitation data, colored according to
reflectivity. Composite reflectivity images depict the highest radar energy received
from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. Base reflectivity images depict
radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle.
The precipitation intensity level reflected by each pixel represents the highest level of
composite radar reflectivity data sampled in that location.
A clear understanding of ground-based Doppler weather radar capabilities will allow
you to interpret the NEXRAD weather imagery in the safest way possible. The
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration hosts a description of the
technology on its website: https://www.weather.gov/jetstream/doppler_intro
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-9
Weather Awareness
RADAR DATA ANIMATIONS
To depict trending weather movements over time, an animation
function stitches the last three to six received radar images together in
sequence, from oldest to newest, and replays them on a continuous
loop. Play and stop controls are active when three or more NEXRAD
images are available for playback.
FIS-B NEXRAD
FIS-B NEXRAD is uplinked to the aircraft as two separate weather products: CONUS
and Regional NEXRAD. Both products display individually or simultaneously,
separated by a white hash-marked boundary. CONUS and Regional NEXRAD are
selectable separately via the NEXRAD button on the bottom right of the weather
map. FIS-B NEXRAD does not differentiate between liquid and frozen precipitation
types.
Regional Echo Block
Regional Boundary
CONUS Echo Block
REGIONAL
FIS-B Regional NEXRAD is a high-resolution weather image with a limited range,
centered around each broadcasting ground station. The (high resolution) Regional
NEXRAD pixels are 1.5 minutes (1.5 nautical miles = 2.78 km) wide by 1 minute
(1 nautical miles = 1.852 km) tall. Each weather pixel varies with latitude. Above
60º latitude, pixel block widths double to 3 minutes/nautical mile for regional maps.
Depending on the locations of received FIS-B ground stations, Regional NEXRAD
coverage can extend as far as 250 nm around an aircraft’s position. Aircraft flying at
higher altitudes typically receive data from more ground stations than aircraft flying
at low altitudes.
5-10
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
CONUS
FIS-B CONUS NEXRAD is a large, low-resolution weather image for the entire
continental U.S. CONUS NEXRAD pixels are 7.5 minutes (7.5 nm = 13.89 km) wide
by 5 minutes (5 nautical miles = 9.26 km) wide.
SIRIUSXM NEXRAD PRECIP SOURCE SELECTION
SiriusXM offers NEXRAD radar imagery from CONUS and non-CONUS sources.
Weather menu options are Composite and Base.
Depending on the SXM service and installed GDL
hardware, radar base reflectivity imaging may have
broader coverage within North America or be limited
to only Canada.
SOURCE
DESCRIPTION
Composite (CONUS)
Composite reflectivity image of radar for the
conterminous U.S.
Base
Base reflectivity image. Coverage and availability are
dependent upon subscription.
Precipitation above 52º N may display as mixed precipitation regardless of actual
precipitation type. Precipitation of an unknown type always displays as rain.
5.4.2
Connext
Precipitation products are available for areas around the world. For current coverage
areas and product information, visit www.garmin.com/connext.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-11
Weather Awareness
5.5
Echo Tops
AVAILABLE WITH: SIRIUSXM
Depicts the location, elevation, and
direction of NEXRAD radar echoes.
This information is useful for gauging
storm intensity in a relative sense. A
higher radar echo means a stronger
storm updraft.
Due to similarities in color schemes,
this product is mutually exclusive with
Cloud Tops.
5.6
5.6.1
Clouds
Cloud Tops
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM
Indicates the altitude of the highest
visible portions of a cloud at the time
of measurement.
SXM cloud top altitude data is
estimated from IR satellite imagery.
FIS-B cloud top data is generated by a
computer model and has limited
accuracy compared to actual
conditions.
Due to similarities in color schemes,
this product is mutually exclusive with
Echo Tops.
5-12
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.6.2
IR Satellite
AVAILABLE WITH: CONNEXT
Infrared Satellite weather information is
available for North America and Europe.
• Lighter grays depict colder
temperatures
• Darker grays depict warmer
temperatures
5.7
Lightning
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM | CONNEXT
SXM displays a yellow cross icon to
indicate a strike event occurring
within a two kilometer region.
Strike location is an estimate of its
center. Unlike Stormscope, the icon
does not change shape or color as
data ages.
Only cloud-to-ground strikes are
reported through the Connext
weather service.
FIS-B lightning strikes display as a
lightning bolt.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-13
Weather Awareness
5.8
METARs and TAFs
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM | CONNEXT
METAR and TAF reports provide information on current and forecast conditions.
Colored METAR flags display for all TXi weather sources when a METAR reporting
station is matched with a corresponding TXi navigation database identifier. When
selected, the METAR is decoded and shows above the original METAR text. METARs
are provided only in areas covered by the navigation database currently loaded.
METAR SYMBOLS
VFR:
Ceiling greater than 3,000 ft. AGL and visibility greater than five
miles.
Marginal VFR:
Ceiling 1,000 to 3,000 ft. AGL and/or visibility three to five miles.
IFR: Ceiling 500 to 1,000 ft. AGL and/or visibility one to three miles.
Low IFR:
Ceiling below 500 ft. AGL and/or visibility less than one mile.
Unknown
5-14
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.9
Cell Movement
AVAILABLE WITH: SIRIUSXM
Information derived from NEXRAD displays the location of storm cells within a strong
storm. Cell direction, speed, and storm top altitude is provided with a corresponding
visual storm cell vector (arrow) indication.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-15
Weather Awareness
5.10 AIRMETs
5.10.1
Textual AIRMETs
AVAILABLE WITH:
SIRIUSXM | CONNEXT
The AIRMET overlay draws the geographical boundaries of received AIRMETS on the
dedicated weather page. AIRMETS include advisories of weather that may be
particularly hazardous to single engine, light aircraft and VFR pilots. Tap an AIRMET
graphic area to view the detailed AIRMET report text.
AIRMET TYPES
Icing
• Areas of moderate airframe icing including areal extent
Turbulence
• Areas of moderate turbulence including vertical extent
IFR
• Weather conditions with ceilings <1,000 ft and/or
visibility <3 mi
MTN OBSR
• Widespread mountain obscuration due to clouds,
precipitation, smoke, haze, mist, or fog
Surface Winds
• Sustained surface winds >30 kt and/or potential
non-convective wind sheer below 2,000 ft AGL
5-16
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.10.2
Graphical AIRMETs
AVAILABLE WITH: FIS-B
Graphical AIRMETs (G-AIRMETs) display more weather phenomena than textual
AIRMETs, while eliminating the need to interpret raw text. Updates occur four times
daily.
G-AIRMET SETTINGS
Filtering options allow you to mitigate page clutter. Forecast and filter selections are
accessible from the FIS-B Weather menu.
Forecast Settings:
• Current (Auto) displays active graphical records based on the current UTC.
Function automatically switches from 0 hr to 3 hr forecasts.
• All displays the most recent, non-expired graphical records.
Forecast periods include 0 hr, 3 hr, and 6 hr.
Filter Settings:
• Icing • Turbulence • IFR • MTN OBSCR • Surface Winds • Freezing Level
• Low-level Wind Shear
To view graphical AIRMETs:
1. Home > Weather > FIS-B Weather > Menu.
2. Toggle G-AIRMET on.
3. Tap Settings.
4. Select between Current (Auto) and All Forecasts.
5. Select one or more filters.
6. Return to the FIS-B Weather page.
7. Select any G-AIRMET line to view details.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-17
Weather Awareness
5.11 Center Weather Advisory
AVAILABLE WITH: FIS-B
These advisories communicate en route and terminal weather conditions expected to
occur within the next two hours. Information is valid for up to 2 hours.
5.12 SIGMETs
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM | CONNEXT
The SIGMET overlay draws the geographical boundaries of received SIGMETs on the
dedicated weather page. Convective and non-convective SIGnificant METerological
Information combine in a textual report and display graphically for the observed or
forecast region. The SIGMET text displays when the graphical SIGMET is selected.
Touch the graphical depiction for additional information.
5-18
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.13 County Warnings
AVAILABLE WITH: SIRIUSXM
County warnings are provided for the
counties within the continental United
States. Specific public awareness and
protection alerts such as fires and natural
disasters are included with warnings for
tornadoes, thunderstorms, floods and
flash floods. Filtering options:
• Severe T-Storm
• Tornado
• Flooding
5.14 Cyclone/Hurricane Track
AVAILABLE WITH: SIRIUSXM
Provides hurricane and tropical
storm information, showing
location, forecast track and track
errors as issued by the National
Hurricane Center.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-19
Weather Awareness
5.15 AIREP/PIREPs
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM | CONNEXT
AIREPs are routine, automated reports of in-flight weather conditions such as wind
and temperature. AIREPs display with a green map icon. Selecting the icon displays a
report window.
PIREPs are pilot-generated weather reports that may contain non-forecast adverse
weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and
turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA). Routine display
with a blue map icon and urgent display with an amber icon. Selecting either icon
displays a report window.
5-20
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.16 Surface Analysis
AVAILABLE WITH: SIRIUSXM
Displays high (H) and low (L) pressure
areas at the earth’s surface as well as
frontal locations.
Options for forecast period include:
current, 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours
5.17 City Forecast
AVAILABLE WITH: SIRIUSXM
Four-day forecasts for major U.S. cities, including daily forecast high and low
temperatures, chance of precipitation, and sky conditions.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-21
Weather Awareness
5.18 Winds Aloft
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM | CONNEXT
Indicates wind speed and direction
for the specified altitude.
The wind barb extends outward from
the reporting location dot in the
direction of wind origination.
Reporting altitudes vary depending
on the weather provider.
ALTITUDE RANGE
SXM: Surface to 45,000 ft
FIS-B: 1,000 ft to 53,000 ft
5-22
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.19 Icing
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM
NOTE
Due to the incremental and overlapping nature of the FIS broadcast,
timestamps, regional coverage, and map data availability may vary with
altitude for computer generated FIS-B icing forecasts.
Icing potential is not a forecast, but a presentation of icing potential at the time of
analysis. For FIS-B, the icing timestamp shows the valid time in UTC. For SiriusXM, it
shows the time of data compilation.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence
of relatively large, super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and
freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted as black and pink blocks over the
icing colors.
The Icing potential shows a graphic
view of the current icing conditions.
Categories vary depending on the
configured weather source.
FIS-B and G3 SiriusXM: Trace, Light,
Moderate, Heavy
G4 SiriusXM: Light, Moderate,
Heavy
ALTITUDE RANGE
FIS-B: 2,000 to 24,000 ft
(at 2,000 ft intervals)
Sirius XM: 1,000 to 30,000 ft
FIS-B
190-01717-10 Rev. H
G3 SiriusXM
Pilot’s Guide
G4 SiriusXM
5-23
Weather Awareness
5.20 Turbulence
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM
NOTE
Due to the incremental and overlapping nature of the FIS broadcast,
timestamps, regional coverage, and map data availability may vary with
altitude for FIS-B turbulence forecasts.
Turbulence is classified as light,
moderate, severe or extreme.
Turbulence data is intended to
supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
For FIS-B, the turbulence timestamp
shows the valid time in UTC. For
SiriusXM, it shows the time of data
compilation.
ALTITUDE RANGE
FIS-B: 2,000 to 24,000 ft
(at 2,000 ft intervals)
Sirius XM: 21,000 to 45,000 ft
5-24
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.21 Freezing Levels
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM
Color-coded contour lines indicate
the altitude of the freezing level.
FIS-B freezing levels display as a
G-AIRMET. Updates occur four times
daily.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-25
Weather Awareness
5.22 TFRs
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM | CONNEXT
WARNING
DO NOT EXCLUSIVELY USE DATALINK SERVICES FOR TFR
INFORMATION. TFR DEPICTIONS ON THE GDU MAY NOT BE A
COMPLETE LISTING AND MAY VARY BETWEEN COCKPIT DEVICES.
ALWAYS CONFIRM TFR INFORMATION WITH OFFICIAL SOURCES SUCH
AS FLIGHT SERVICE STATIONS OR AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL.
TFRs identify areas of airspace where aircraft are temporarily restricted from
operating. TFRs are routinely issued for occurrences such as dignitary visits, military
activities, and forest fires. Tapping the TFR graphic on the Weather page brings up
textual details for the selected TFR.
5-26
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.23 SiriusXM
SiriusXM satellites deliver high bandwidth (S-band) data to provide
high-resolution images. Available data is received within a few
minutes after the aircraft satellite receiver comes into view of the
SiriusXM satellite network.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Active SiriusXM Aviation Weather subscription
• Data Radio ID
• Configured GDL 69/69A interface
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• For Icing Potential, Winds Aloft (U.S.), and Turbulence, the valid time displays
instead of product age
• For Freezing Level and Winds Aloft (Canada), the generation time displays
instead of valid time
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-27
Weather Awareness
5.23.1
5-28
SiriusXM Weather Setup
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.23.2
Activating Services
Before SiriusXM Weather is accessed, service must be activated by the SiriusXM
customer service. This is accomplished by providing either one or two coded IDs,
SiriusXM Satellite Weather (data) and SiriusXM Satellite Radio (audio). The coded IDs
are used to send an activation signal, which allows the use of weather and
entertainment products received by the GDL 69/69A.
For subscription activation instructions, visit siriusxm.com.
To complete activation:
1. Contact SiriusXM using the customer service phone number listed on the
website.
2. Provide the customer service agent with your Data ID and Audio ID.
3. Position aircraft within satellite reception area and power unit.
4. Tap Weather > SiriusXM Weather > Menu > Datalink Status.
5. Verify activation. Status page displays Data ID, Subscription Level, and weather
product listings.
6. Tap Menu > Lock activation > OK.
GDL Data ID
Subscription Level
Provided by SiriusXM
Satellite Signal Strength
GDL 69 Status Page
5.23.3
SiriusXM Weather Products
When SiriusXM weather services are
not activated:
• All weather product boxes are
cleared on the GDL 69 Status
page
• A yellow “Activation Required”
message appears at the center
of the page
Service Class refers to the groupings
of weather products available for
subscription.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-29
Weather Awareness
5.24 FIS-B Weather
No pilot action is required to receive FIS-B weather information.
FIS-B weather products include:
• METARS
• TAFs
• PIREPs
• AIRMETs
• SIGMETs
• NOTAMs
• Winds Aloft
• Temperatures Aloft
• Cloud Tops
• TFRs
• Lightning
• Turbulence
• CWA
• NEXRAD (Regional and
CONUS combined
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• UAT receiver (GDL 88, GTX 345)
The FAA provides FIS-B as a Surveillance and Broadcast Service operating on the UAT
(978 MHz) frequency band. FIS-B uses a network of FAA-operated ground-based
transceivers to transmit weather datalink information to the aircraft’s receiver on a
scheduled continuous basis.
The Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B) Weather service is freely available for
aircraft equipped with a capable datalink universal access transceiver (UAT). Ground
stations provide uninterrupted services for the majority of the contiguous U.S.,
Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico, and parts of Alaska. No weather subscription service is
required. For the latest FAA ground station coverage information, visit:
www.faa.gov/nextgen/programs/adsb/
FIS-B weather product update and transmission intervals are published in the SBS
Description Document associated with TSO-C157b. This information is available
electronically at the FAA’s Regulatory and Guidance Library: https://rgl.faa.gov/
5.24.1
FIS-B Data Transmission Limitations
FIS-B broadcasts provide weather data in a repeating cycle which may take several
minutes to completely transmit all available weather data. Therefore, not all weather
data may be immediately present upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition.
LINE OF SIGHT RECEPTION
To receive FIS-B weather information, the aircraft’s datalink receiver must be within
range and line-of-sight of an operating ground-based transceiver. Reception may be
affected by altitude, terrain, and other factors. Per the FAA, much of the United
States has FIS-B In airborne coverage at and above 3,000 feet AGL. Terminal
coverage is available at altitudes below 3,000 feet AGL and is available when flying
near approximately 235 major U.S. airports. Surface coverage allows FIS-B ground
reception at approximately 36 major U.S. airports.
5-30
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
PER FAA TSO-C157B
FIS-B information may be used for pilot planning decisions focused on updating the
pilot's awareness of the dynamic flight environment; including avoiding areas of
inclement weather that are beyond visual range and pilot near-term decisions where
poor visibility precludes visual acquisition of inclement weather. FIS-B weather and
NAS status information may be used as follows:
a. To promote pilot awareness of ownship location with respect to reported
weather, including hazardous meteorological conditions; NAS status indicators
to enhance pilot planning decisions; and pilot near-term decision-making.
b. To cue the pilot to communicate with Air Traffic Control, Flight Service Station
specialist, operator dispatch, or airline operations control center for general and
mission critical meteorological information, NAS status conditions, or both.
FIS-B information, including weather information, NOTAMs, and TFR areas, are
intended for the sole purpose of assisting in long-/near-term planning and
decision making. The system lacks sufficient resolution and updating capability
necessary for aerial maneuvering associated with immediate decisions. In
extreme scenarios, the oldest weather radar data on the display can be up to 15
to 20 minutes older than the display’s age indication for that weather radar
data. Therefore, do not attempt to use FIS-B weather information to maneuver
the aircraft at minimum safe distances from hazardous weather.
FIS-B information must not be used in lieu of a standard preflight briefing.
c. [Displaying FIS-B weather using GDL 88, or GTX 345 Class 1 transceivers]
FIS-B uplink is a subscription-free FIS broadcast managed by FAA SBS. It provides
an FAA approved source for METAR, TAF, WINDS, PIREPs, NEXRAD, AIRMET,
SIGMET, and TFR information, and is subject to the broadcast range limits for
these products.
FIS-B uplink is not an FAA approved source for NOTAMs.
NOTAM 30-DAY LIMITATION
NOTAMs received via FIS-B may not be a complete listing. Active NOTAMs are
removed from the FIS-B data stream 30 days after issuance. Before flight, review all
necessary aeronautical and meteorological information from official sources.
For more information, consult AC 00-63.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-31
Weather Awareness
5.24.2
5-32
FIS-B Weather Setup
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.24.3
Raw Text Reports
Access FIS-B raw text data by tapping the Raw Text Reports key on the ADS-B
Status page. Selecting a FIS-B data link textual product accesses the latest uploaded
data.
To display Raw Text Reports from the
FIS-B Weather Menu, tap:
Datalink Status > Raw Text Reports
Tap Raw Text Reports
for FIS-B Textual Data
5.24.4
FIS-B Ground Reception Status
FIS-B ground station transmission status may be monitored when the UAT transceiver
is powered and the FIS-B weather option is selected. A current report lists
completeness of NOTAM-TFR, G-AIRMET, CWA, and SIGMET data for all received
ground stations.
For the received ground station, the station range field indicates
complete/incomplete status only for those products within the ground station’s
range.
To access the FIS-B Reception
Status page from the FIS-B Weather
menu, tap Datalink Status >
Radio Stations.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-33
Weather Awareness
5.25 Connext Weather
Garmin provides Connext datalink, on-demand weather products
through the Iridium satellite system via a GSR 56 transceiver and
L-band frequencies. An Iridium satellite data subscription service is
required for worldwide Connext weather coverage.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• GSR 56 transceiver
• Data plan
Connext Weather coverage is available throughout most of Europe, Canada, and the
U.S. Additional radar coverage areas are added continuously. For the latest radar
coverage information, visit:
https://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/connext/worldwide-weather/
Various world-wide weather subscription package options provide weather reporting
for most of Europe, Canada, Australia, and the U.S.
5.25.1
Activating Connext Services
To access Connext Weather, visit flyGarmin.com and create a Connext Satellite
Services account. Be ready to provide the GDU ID, airframe information (model, tail
number), and Iridium serial number. Garmin will issue an access code for entry on the
Connext Registration page. If access code and system ID are correct, the airframe
registration details will display.
To complete activation:
1. Move aircraft within satellite range and power unit.
2. Go to MFD home page.
3. Tap Weather > Connext Weather > Menu > Connext Settings >
Datalink Status > Connext Registration > Access Code.
4. Enter the required code, then tap Register to complete the process.
5-34
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.25.2
Deactivating Connext Unit Registration
Specific GDU Connext registration can be deactivated in order for the unit to no
longer make requests to Connext. This does not cancel the subscription. While
viewing the Connext Registration display page, tap Access Code.
Enter an invalid access code to deactivate the Connext registration. Weather requests
will now fail and the system will no longer link to the Connext account.
Connext
Access Code
Registration
Confirmation
Key
Current
Registration
Detail
Connext Registration Page
5.25.3
Connext Weather Product Age
Connext weather product requests are pilot controlled.
Weather products are refreshed at intervals that are defined
and controlled by Connext and its data vendors.
Weather product age is based on the time difference
between when the data was assembled by Connext and
current GPS time. Weather products expire at intervals based
on each product. When the data expires, it is removed from
the display. This ensures that displayed data is consistent with
what is currently provided by Connext Satellite Radio services.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-35
Weather Awareness
5.25.4
5-36
Connext Weather Setup
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.25.5
Connext Data Requests
Connext weather data may be
updated on an on-request basis.
This feature allows the pilot to
download selected weather
products for a specific waypoint,
flight plan, or destination, and the
time frame.
Access is via the Connext Settings
menu.
Coverage Boundary
The pilot can update Connext weather data at any
time regardless of predetermined automatic update
frequency.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-37
Weather Awareness
CONNEXT WEATHER REQUEST CONTROLS
Present Position
Request weather information around aircraft’s present
position. COV diameter determines extent of request.
Destination
Request weather information for the destination airport.
Flight Plan
Request weather information for the active fight plan
route.
Distance
Enter requested weather information for a specified
distance along the active flight plan.
Range: 10 nm to 500 nm
Waypoint
Request weather information for a specified waypoint.
COV Diameter
Define the diameter of coverage.
Range: 10 nm to 500 nm
Request Data
Request weather data at any time. Reset Auto Request
timer (if active) for next request interval.
Auto Request
Select the automatic weather request period.
Options: Off, 5 min, 10 min
Datalink Status
View Iridium satellite datalink status and signal strength.
5-38
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
Stormscope
Stormscope lightning data display on a dedicated weather page
or as overlays on Map page and HSI Map.
5.26 Stormscope Page
WARNING
DO NOT EXCLUSIVELY USE THE LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM FOR
WEATHER AVOIDANCE. THE SYSTEM MAY DISPLAY INACCURATE OR
INCOMPLETE INFORMATION. REFER TO THE LIGHTNING DETECTION
SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• WX-500 Stormscope Weather Mapping Sensor
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Stormscope lightning information cannot display concurrently with a data
link (SiriusXM, Connext, or FIS-B) Lightning weather product
Stormscope Features
• Passive weather avoidance system
• Detects electrical discharges from thunderstorms within 200 nm of current
position
• Plots strike count and relative bearing location every
two seconds
• Heading and distance from aircraft
• Arc and 360º viewing options
For additional information, consult the WX-500 pilot’s guide.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-39
Weather Awareness
5.27 Stormscope Setup
Setup options reside in the setup menu.
Changes in mode selection on the Stormscope
page reflect across all lightning overlays
(Map page, HSI Map).
5.27.1
Stormscope Modes & Symbols
CELL
Cell mode identifies cluster of electrical activity, grouping individual strikes together.
Use Cell mode during heavy storm activity to identify where storm cells are located.
STRIKE
Strike mode plots discharge points in relation to where the individual discharges are
detected. Strike mode displays the initial strikes associated with a building
thunderstorm in relation to where it’s detected.
SYMBOL
TIME SINCE STRIKE (SECONDS)
Less than 6
(lightning bolt indicates initial strike)
Less than 60
Less than 120
Less than 180
5-40
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
STRIKE RATE
Strike Rate reports the approximate number of strikes per minute for a given view
range. It is useful when trying to determine if storm cells are building or decaying.
Strikes occur at a higher rate as a storm
matures. They are less frequent as the storm
dissipates.
To reset the rate value, clear the page of all strikes.
5.27.2
Views
Stormscope provides both arc and 360º views of lightning data.
ARC VIEW
Strike Mode
Cell Mode
Strike Mode
Cell Mode
360º VIEW
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-41
Weather Awareness
Airborne Weather Radar
Weather radar data display on a dedicated weather page or as
overlays on the Map page.
5.28 Weather Radar Page
WARNING
USE WEATHER RADAR TO AVOID SEVERE WEATHER, NOT TO ENTER IT.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• GDU 1060 or full screen MFD on GDU 700P
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available modes and intensity levels depend on the installed radar type
• Not available on GDU 700( ) EIS/MFD
Feature Status
Display
WX Page Label
Scan
Display Range
Weather
Depiction
Aircraft Symbol
ACT Status Field
Intensity
Scale
Radar Controls
Menu Key
Weather Radar Page
5-42
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
RADAR UNITS
Distances on the Weather Radar page display in nautical miles.
DISPLAY ADJUSTMENTS
To change radar display range, adjust the inner control knob.
To adjust tilt and bearing angle, tap and drag the line indicator as necessary, or use
the associated control keys.
INTENSITY SCALE
Each operating mode uses a unique color palette
to depict increasing intensity levels.
Weather
Ground
WARM-UP COUNTDOWN TIMER
A warm-up period initiates upon power up
(GWX 68 only). Duration varies depending on
how long the radar is off. The radar begins
transmitting once warm-up is complete.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-43
Weather Awareness
5.29 Weather Radar Setup
Available setup options are
dependent upon configuration.
With the exception of Sector
Scan, all selections are on/off
only.
5.29.1
Sector Scan
The sector scan option focuses the scan on a smaller segment of the radar sweep.
This is useful when monitoring priority weather targets.
SCAN
INCREMENTS
Horizontal
20º, 40º, 60º, 90º, Full
Vertical
10º, 20º, 30º, Full
The 90º horizontal scan option is
available only for radars with extended
scan capabilities (120º sweep).
5-44
Pilot’s Guide
Increments vary according to scan
type.
Horizontal sector scans center on
the bearing line, vertical sector scans
center on the tilt line.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.29.2
Stabilization
This feature helps stabilize the antenna so the scan is parallel to the ground when
active. When off, the antenna scan is relative to the aircraft lateral axis. Status
displays in the upper right corner of the Radar page.
5.29.3
WATCH
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Not available for third party radars
Use WATCH to determine areas of inaccuracies in displayed intensity from
attenuation while in horizontal scan mode. Adjust tilt to determine the extent of
attenuation in a shaded area. WATCH only displays in horizontal scans.
WATCH Off
190-01717-10 Rev. H
WATCH On
Pilot’s Guide
5-45
Weather Awareness
5.29.4
Weather Alert
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Not available for third party radars
These alerts indicate the presence of heavy
precipitation beyond the current display range
(80 nm to 320 nm from current position).
Red bands on the outer
range ring display at the
approximate azimuth of
severe weather targets.
If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, a weather alert is generated by ground returns.
If a weather alert is detected within +10 degrees of the aircraft heading, an advisory
displays on the MFD in the advisory window.
5.29.5
Altitude Compensated Tilt
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• GWX 70/75 only
This feature adjusts the tilt to compensate for altitude
changes as the aircraft climbs and descends.
Status displays above the radar controls.
5-46
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.29.6
Turbulence Detection
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
• Purchased GWX Turbulence Detection feature enabled on GDU
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• GWX 70/75 only
This feature detects and displays severe turbulence. Status reports as inactive when:
• Current scan range is greater than 160 nm
• Radar is not in weather mode
• Vertical scan is active
Turbulence Off
5.29.7
Turbulence On
Ground Clutter Suppression
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Purchased GWX Ground Clutter Suppression feature enabled on GDU
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• GWX 70/75 only
• Not available for vertical scans
This feature reduces the amount of returns of highly reflective objects on the ground,
while maintaining the intensity and size of weather returns.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-47
Weather Awareness
5.30 Radar Modes
WARNING
DO NOT TRANSMIT WHEN PERSONNEL OR OBJECTS ARE WITHIN
11 FEET OF THE ANTENNA.
CAUTION
PLACE RADAR IN STANDBY MODE BEFORE TAXIING TO PREVENT
DAMAGE TO THE RADAR ASSEMBLY.
5.30.1
Mode Key
Tapping this key opens a list of available mode options.
A confirmation pop-up alerts the pilot
when attempting to scan while on the
ground.
STANDBY
• Parks the antenna at the centerline
• Scan and Gain controls are inactive
• Automatic standby occurs during
power up and landing
Inactive
5-48
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
TEST
• Places transmitter in standby as the
display simulates a radar sweep
• Test data verifies communication
between the weather radar and
display
• Radar pulses do not transmit from the
antenna during this mode
GROUND
• Presents a depiction of terrain similar
to that of a topographical map
• Useful when trying to verify aircraft
position
GROUND MAP
MODE COLOR
GROUND TARGET INTENSITY LEVELS
GWX RADAR
INTENSITY
THIRD-PARTY
RADAR LEVEL
Black
0 dB
0
Light Blue
> 0 dBZ to < 9 dBZ
1
Yellow
9 dBZ to < 18 dBZ
2
Magenta
18 dBZ to < 27 dBZ
3 and above
Blue
27 dBZ and greater
Not used
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-49
Weather Awareness
WEATHER
• Presents an airborne depiction of
precipitation
• Colors represent approximate rainfall
intensity and rates for weather radar
targets
WEATHER
MODE
COLOR
GWX 68 RADAR
APPROXIMATE
RAINFALL RATE
(IN/HR)
APPROXIMATE
INTENSITY
GWX 70 RADAR
THIRDPARTY
RADAR
APPROXIMATE
INTENSITY
RADAR
RETURN
LEVEL [1]
Black
< 23 dBZ
< .01
< 23 dBZ
0
Green
23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ
.01 - 0.1
23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ
1
Yellow
33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
0.1 - 0.5
33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
2
Red
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
0.5 - 2
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
3
Magenta
50 dBZ and greater
2
50 dBZ and greater
4
Turbulence
Detection
White
[1]
5-50
Refer to radar documentation.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
WEATHER
MODE
COLOR
190-01717-10 Rev. H
GWX 75 RADAR
APPROXIMATE
INTENSITY
Black
< 22 dBZ
Green
23 dBZ to < 32 dBZ
Yellow
33 dBZ to < 40 dBZ
Red
41 dBZ to < 48 dBZ
Magenta
49 dBZ and greater
White
Turbulence Detection
Pilot’s Guide
5-51
Weather Awareness
5.31 Radar Controls
Some radars allow independent
sweeps when connected to multiple
displays.
5.31.1
Show Bearing/Tilt
Displays the tilt or bearing line depending on current scan selection. This feature is
useful when making horizontal or vertical scan adjustments.
5.31.2
Bearing
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Not available on RS 181 and RS 811 radars
Directional keys allow fine adjustment of the
bearing line angle. This method is optional to
tapping and dragging.
5-52
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.31.3
Tilt
Use antenna tilt to locate the top and bottom of storm cells and to increase intensity
of ground target returns. One degree of tilt equals 100 feet of altitude per nautical
mile. In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the vertical scan feature along with antenna
tilt to examine the cells. Avoid shadowed areas behind targets.
A typical tilt setup adjusts the bottom of the radar beam to 4º below
parallel with the ground. To adjust the antenna tilt for this typical
setup:
1. Fly the aircraft level.
2. Adjust antenna tilt so ground returns display at a distance equal
to the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000.
When flying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 ft AGL with the typical tilt setup,
avoid target returns at 5 nm. These may be either weather or ground returns that are
2,000 ft or less below the aircraft. Raise the antenna tilt 4º to separate ground
returns from weather returns in flat terrain. Return the antenna to the previous
setting after a few sweeps of the radar. Set the display range to 60 nm for aircraft
flying at 15,000 ft or lower. Monitor ground returns for possible threats.
If flying above 29,000 ft with the typical tilt setup, be cautious of targets 30 nm or
closer. This may indicate a thunderstorm that the aircraft cannot fly over safely.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-53
Weather Awareness
5.31.4
Scan
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• RS 181 and RS 811 radars do not support vertical scan functionality
Horizontal scans provide a visual depiction of weather in front of the aircraft. Vertical
scans focus the radar on a particular vertical target.
HORIZONTAL
For bearing line visibility, tap Show Bearing.
To adjust the horizontal scan bearing:
• Tap and drag the bearing line left or right
Or
• Adjust the angle using the Bearing
control
To adjust vertical angle for the horizontal
scan, tap Tilt and then adjust the angle using
directional keys.
VERTICAL
When vertically scanning with stabilization on, the physical area that the radar is
sweeping may not match the displayed vertical scan. This occurs when the aircraft
pitch is not at 0°. To compensate, the GDU does not draw the unscanned portion.
For tilt line visibility, tap Show Tilt.
To adjust the tilt of vertical scan:
• Tap and drag the tilt line up or down
Or
• Adjust the angle using the Tilt control
To adjust horizontal angle for the vertical scan,
tap Bearing and then adjust the angle using
directional keys.
5-54
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Weather Awareness
5.31.5
Gain
NOTE
Precipitation intensity may not be accurate if the gain is changed.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• For third party radars, this control is active only during ground mode
This feature controls the sensitivity of the radar receiver. Adjustments to receiver
sensitivity automatically change the intensity of radar targets.
Default
Calibration
Directional keys allow sensitivity adjustments.
Tapping Set to Calibrated restores the calibrated
gain setting and returns intensity depictions to
their actual colors.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
5-55
Weather Awareness
5.32 Radar Alerts
A caution message alerts the pilot of a weather radar failure. Scan depictions on
Weather Radar and Map pages do not display.
Weather radar overlay detail is absent from the Map page if heading input is lost.
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE & CONDITION
Alert Type: Caution
RADAR FAULT
Condition
Data contains a fault unrelated to attitude.
Alert Type: Caution (GWX only)
RADAR FAIL
Condition
Weather radar product status is timed out.
Alert Type: Caution (Third-party radars only)
RADAR CONTROLS
DISAGREE
Condition
Radar’s actual state does not match the commanded
state.
Alert Type: Caution (GWX 70/75 and third-party radars)
RADAR ACTIVE
Condition
Radar is in standby, but remains active due to another
interfacing controller.
5-56
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Traffic Awareness
6 Traffic Awareness
TRAFFIC DISPLAY
6.1
6.2
Traffic Page ...........................................................................................6-3
Traffic Setup ..........................................................................................6-5
TRAFFIC TYPES
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
TIS-A .....................................................................................................6-7
TAS/TCAS I ............................................................................................6-9
TCAS II ................................................................................................6-11
ADS-B .................................................................................................6-15
Traffic Alerts ........................................................................................6-20
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
6-1
Traffic Awareness
Traffic Display
The Traffic page displays intruding traffic in relation to the current
position and altitude of the aircraft without clutter from other data.
Collision avoidance and traffic surveillance data display on the Traffic page or as
overlays on the Map page and HSI Map. Synthetic vision traffic depictions display on
PFD when SVT is enabled.
Available Traffic Sources
• TIS-A
• TAS/TCAS I
The availability of functions, alerting
features, and options depend on the
traffic system source.
• ADS-B with or without TCAS
• TCAS II
ADS-B controls are accessible from the Traffic menu. Controls for other traffic
systems are located on the Traffic page.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Symbols depicted depend on traffic source (e.g., TIS-A, TAS, ADS-B)
• Intruding aircraft without altitude reporting capabilities do not display
altitude separation data or climb/descent indications
• Available display ranges and vector types depend on traffic source
6-2
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Traffic Awareness
6.1
Traffic Page
Page Title
Page Orientation
Range Ring Radius
Range Ring
Ownship Icon
Control Keys and
Annunciations
Traffic Page
DISPLAY OBJECT
FUNCTION
• Depicts current aircraft position
Ownship Icon
Page Orientation
Label
Range Rings
Altitude
Separation Value
• Nose of the ownship is the actual ownship location
• Unlike the configured aircraft symbol on map displays,
ownship icon is always a directional arrow
Orientations:
1. Heading up (HDG UP) during normal operation.
2. Track up (TRK UP) if there is no valid heading.
• Ranges vary according to traffic system type
• Outer ring represents selected range
Indicates when an intruder is above or below the ownship.
Value placement is based on intruder location.
• Above traffic symbol if intruder is above
• Below symbol if intruder is below
• Plus or minus sign denotes higher or lower altitude
Vertical Trend
Arrow
• Active when an intruder is climbing or descending at a
vertical speed greater than 500 fpm
Intruding Aircraft
Symbol
Color may be cyan or white depending on configuration.
Actual intruder location varies according to symbol type.
• Tip of directional symbols
• Center of non-directional symbols
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
6-3
Traffic Awareness
INVALID ALTITUDE DEPICTIONS
If an intruder does not have a valid altitude, its symbol displays
without the altitude tag.
OFF SCALE TRAFFIC ALERTS
Off scale (out of range) traffic alerts are depicted as half yellow
symbols on the outermost range ring at the correct bearing.
TRAFFIC OVERLAY STATUS ICONS
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Map is
displaying
traffic.
Overlay icons indicate the status of
displayed traffic on HSI Map, Rotorcraft
PFD VFR Map, and the MFD Map page.
Map is not
displaying
traffic.
TRAFFIC UNITS
PARAMETER
UNITS
Altitude
ft
Distance
nm
Traffic units are always uniform.
System Units page selections do not affect
the traffic display.
If the system units for altitude are set to meters, an
annunciation reminds the pilot that all displayed altitude
values remain in feet.
6-4
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Traffic Awareness
6.2
6.2.1
Traffic Setup
Traffic Test
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• ADS-B, TAS, and TCAS applications only
• Available only when the aircraft is on ground (i.e., standby mode)
• Test pattern depiction is dependent upon the active traffic system
TEST KEY
The test function displays a test pattern on the Traffic page. For
ADS-B, this option is accessible via the Traffic menu.
The system automatically returns to normal operating mode once the test is
complete.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
6-5
Traffic Awareness
6.2.2
Altitude Filtering
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• ADS-B, TAS, and TCAS applications only
Pilot selectable filters limit the display of traffic to a specific altitude range relative to
the altitude of the ownship.
Filter selections apply to both the Traffic page and the traffic overlay on the Map
page.
SELECTION
ALTITUDE RANGE
Normal
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
Above
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
Below
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
Unrestricted
-9,900 ft to 9,900 ft
On a standalone PFD, HSI Map always presents traffic at the Normal filter setting.
On GDU 1060, it uses the same filter selections on MFD.
6-6
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Traffic Awareness
Traffic Types
6.3
TIS-A
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• Aircraft location is within the service volume of a Mode S terminal radar site
• TIS-capable Mode S transponder is interfaced to the GDU
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
For information about TIS-A functions and limitations, consult the AIM.
TIS-A Features
• 2-D graphical depiction of proximate traffic based on data received from
terminal radars
• Track vector depicts intruder trajectory over the ground
• Vertical coverage: +3,500/ -3,000 ft from ownship
• Eight intruder maximum within an 8 nm radius
• Five second update cycle
• Normal and standby mode options
6.3.1
TIS-A Setup Selections
SELECTION
Status
190-01717-10 Rev. H
FUNCTION
Select operating mode. Options are Operate and Standby.
Pilot’s Guide
6-7
Traffic Awareness
6.3.2
TIS-A Traffic Symbols
Traffic information is for advisory use only. The pilot is responsible for identifying and
avoiding traffic.
Non-threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory
TA Off-scale
6.3.3
TIS-A Status Indications
ANNUNCIATION
DESCRIPTION
Data Failed
GDU receives data from the transponder, but a failure
exists in the data stream.
Failed
Transponder failure.
No Data
GDU is not receiving valid data from the transponder.
TA X.X NM ±XX ↕
System cannot determine TA bearing. Intruder
depiction not available. Annunciation includes:
• Distance in nautical miles
• Altitude separation in hundreds of feet
• Altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
6-8
TA OFF SCALE
TA is outside the selected display range.
Traffic Coast x SEC
Intruder depictions are more than six seconds old.
Traffic Removed
Intruder depictions are more than 12 seconds old.
Traffic symbols no longer display.
Unavailable
Transponder not receiving TIS-A data from ground
station.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Traffic Awareness
6.4
TAS/TCAS I
TAS/TCAS I Features
• Airborne traffic system independent of ground radar
• 2-D graphical depiction of traffic relative to aircraft position and altitude
6.4.1
TAS/TCAS I Setup Selections
SELECTION
FUNCTION
Status
Select operating mode. Options are Operate and Standby.
Test
Initiate a test of the traffic system.
Select filter range. Options include:
Altitude Filter
6.4.2
• Normal
• Above
• Below
• Unrestricted
TAS/TCAS I Traffic Symbols
Traffic information is for advisory use only. The pilot is responsible for identifying and
avoiding traffic conflict.
Other Traffic
Proximity Advisory
Traffic Advisory
TA Off-scale
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
6-9
Traffic Awareness
6.4.3
TAS/TCAS I Status Indications
ANNUNCIATION
DESCRIPTION
Data Failed
GDU receives traffic data, but the TAS unit is reporting
a failure.
Failed
Traffic data failure.
No Data
GDU is not receiving valid data from the TAS unit.
TA X.X NM ±XX ↕
System cannot determine TA bearing. Intruder
depiction not available. Annunciation includes:
• Distance in nautical miles
• Altitude separation in hundreds of feet
• Altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
6-10
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Traffic Awareness
6.5
TCAS II
WARNING
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SHOWN ON SYSTEM DISPLAYS IS PROVIDED AS
AN AID IN VISUALLY ACQUIRING TRAFFIC. TRAFFIC AVOIDANCE
MANEUVERS ARE BASED UPON TCAS II RESOLUTION ADVISORIES, ATC
GUIDANCE, OR POSITIVE VISUAL ACQUISITION OF CONFLICTING
TRAFFIC.
NOTE
If the installed TCAS II traffic system is not a GTS 8000, refer to the
applicable documentation for system-specific information.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• GDU software v3.00 and later
• GTS 8000 or third-party TCAS II system
TCAS II Features
• Monitors nearby airspace for aircraft flying with operating transponders
• Issues TAs to assist in visual identification of traffic
• Issues RAs to provide recommended vertical guidance maneuvers to resolve
traffic conflicts
6.5.1
TCAS II Status Indications
TRAFFIC PAGE
ANNUNCIATIONS
SELECTION
TCAS II Self-Test Initiated (TEST)
Test
Traffic and Resolution Advisory (TA/RA)
TA/RA
Traffic Advisory Only
TA Only
TCAS II Standby
STBY
TCAS II Failed
Fail
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
6-11
Traffic Awareness
6.5.2
TCAS II Alerts
When the TCAS II unit issues a TA or RA,”TRAFFIC” appears in the annunciator bar
of the GDU, flashes for 5 seconds and remains until no TAs or RAs are detected.
• RA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciations are white text with red backgrounds
• TA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciations are black text with yellow backgrounds
• If a TA and RA occur simultaneously, only the red and white RA “TRAFFIC”
annunciation displays
If the GDU is not displaying the Traffic page, the system displays a traffic alert
pop-up.
• During a TA event, the system issues a single “Traffic, Traffic” voice alert each
time the system detects a new TA threat
• During an RA event, voice alert(s) provide vertical guidance to resolve the
traffic conflict
• The VSI displays a range of vertical speeds to fly to or avoid as applicable
• Additional voice alerts occur if the RA status changes and when the
aircraft is clear of the conflict
6-12
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Traffic Awareness
TRAFFIC ALERT BANNER
If the traffic system cannot determine the bearing of a traffic or RA, the alert displays
as a traffic alert banner.
Warning Banner
RA X.X ± XX <UP> OR <DN>
• Displays when the system is
unable to determine the
bearing of an RA and
extreme pilot vigilance is
required
• Banner indicates distance in
nm and altitude separation
in hundreds of feet
• If altitude trend is available,
the banner indicates
altitude trend up <UP> for
climbing and down <DN>
for descending traffic
Caution Banner
• Displays when the system is
unable to determine the
bearing of a TA and pilot
vigilance is required
TA X.X ± XX <UP> OR <DN>
• Banner indicates distance in
nm and altitude separation
in hundreds of feet
• If altitude trend is available,
the banner indicates
altitude trend up <UP> for
climbing and down <DN>
for descending traffic
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
6-13
Traffic Awareness
6.5.3
TCAS II Traffic Symbols
Traffic information is for advisory use only. The pilot is responsible for identifying and
avoiding traffic conflict. The TCAS II system categorizes detected traffic into four
groups of increasing collision threat potential. Lowest threat is OT and the highest is
RA.
OT
Other non-threatening traffic.
PA
Traffic is not currently a threat, but is within 6 nm and
±1,200 feet of the own-aircraft altitude.
TA
Indicates traffic is within 20-48 seconds of a potential collision
area.
Off-scale TA
Traffic is beyond the selected map range and the system
displays a half-TA symbol at the edge of the map at the
approximate relative bearing of the TA traffic. If TA traffic
subsequently meets the criteria for an RA, the system issues
an RA.
RA
Indicates traffic is within 15-35 seconds of a potential collision
area.
Off-scale RA
If RA traffic is beyond the selected map range, the system
displays a half-RA symbol at the edge of the map positioned
at the approximate relative bearing to the RA traffic.
6.5.4
TCAS II with ADS-B
NOTE
Aircraft that are surveilled by ADS-B In only will not trigger a TCAS
resolution advisory.
TCAS II interrogates Mode-S transponder data while automatically receiving ADS-B
position and velocity information directly from a comparably equipped aircraft target.
For preciseness, the system correlates between two data sources and the system
displays the traffic information for the source determined to be the most accurate.
Traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the other) is
also displays for the flight crew. This may occur, for example, if another aircraft is
beyond the surveillance range of the TCAS II, but it is still receiving position and
velocity information from other ADS-B equipped aircraft. The traffic correlation
feature improves the accuracy of the traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence
of displaying a single target twice.
6-14
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Traffic Awareness
6.6
ADS-B
ADS-B Features
• Runway and taxiway depiction during SURF mode
(< 2 nm range scale)
• Selectable traffic icons display intruder and vector information
• Customizable motion vectors (type, duration)
• Airborne and surface mode options
• On-scene mode option (rotorcraft only)
6.6.1
ADS-B Setup Selections
SELECTION
FUNCTION
ADS-B Status
Enable automatic mode selection. System selects between
Surface and Airborne depending on the state of the aircraft.
Selecting Off disables the function.
Test
Initiate a test of the traffic system.
Motion Vector
Select motion vector type. Selecting Off removes all motion
vectors from the display.
• Absolute
• Relative
• Off
Vector Duration
Select the amount of time represented by the endpoint.
Options range from 0 seconds to 5 minutes.
A longer duration results in a longer vector.
Select filter range. Options include:
Altitude Filter
190-01717-10 Rev. H
• Normal
• Above
• Below
• Unrestricted
Pilot’s Guide
6-15
Traffic Awareness
6.6.2
ADS-B Traffic Symbols
Traffic Information is for advisory use only. The pilot is responsible for identifying and
avoiding traffic conflict.
6-16
Basic Directional
Proximate Directional
Basic Non-directional
Proximate Non-directional
Basic Off-scale
Selected
Proximate Off-scale
Selected
Directional
(On-Ground)
Non-directional Alerted
Non-directional
(On-Ground)
Off-scale Non-directional
Alerted Traffic
Proximate Directional
(On-Ground)
Directional Alerted Traffic
Proximate
Non-directional
(On-Ground)
Off-scale Directional
Alerted Traffic
Directional Surface
Vehicle
Non-directional Surface
Vehicle
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Traffic Awareness
6.6.3
ADS-B Traffic Applications
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• On-scene mode functionality is available only for rotorcraft
MODE
FEATURES
• Airborne traffic application
AIRB
• Active in the en route environment
(>5 nm and >1,500 ft above the nearest airport)
• Airborne and ground traffic application
SURF
• Active on ground or within the terminal environment
(<5 nm and <1,500 ft above field elevation)
• Runway and taxiway depictions when the zoom scale is
<2 nm (Traffic page only)
• Ground vehicle depictions
• Rotorcraft nuisance alert suppression option
On-scene
• Reduces alerts caused by proximity rotorcraft operating in a
scene environment (e.g., EMS landing zone, news
gathering events)
• Mode activation and control by way of navigator
• Look-ahead time: 3 seconds
• Traffic alarm vertical threshold: 200 ft
• Incremental protected traffic volume: 1,000 ft
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
6-17
Traffic Awareness
6.6.4
Motion Vectors
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Motion vectors display on the Traffic page only
A motion vector is a line extending from the nose of an intruder icon. Its orientation
represents the intruder’s direction and movement. A yellow vector indicates when
traffic meets intruding TA criteria (i.e., closing rate, distance, vertical separation).
MOTION VECTOR TYPES
• Cyan or white vector depending on configuration
• Depicts intruder ground track
• Calculations based on intruder direction and ground speed
Absolute
• Endpoint depicts intruder’s position over the ground at the
end of the selected duration
• Airborne and ground functionality
• Green vector
• Depicts intruder movement relative to the ownship
• Calculations based on track and ground speed of both
intruder and ownship
Relative
• Endpoint depicts intruder’s location relative to the ownship
at the end of the selected duration
• Airborne functionality only
• “Relative Motion - Unavailable” annunciates during
ground operations
6.6.5
ADS-B Status Indications
ANNUNCIATION
DESCRIPTION
Absolute Motion - XX
SEC/MIN
Active motion vector type is absolute.
Failed
ADS data failure.
No Data
GDU is not receiving valid traffic data.
No GPS Position
ADS-B LRU detects that GPS unit is initializing.
Relative Motion - XX
SEC/MIN
Active motion vector type is relative.
Relative Motion UNAVAILABLE
Aircraft is not airborne and the active motion vector
type is relative.
Unavailable
Necessary traffic data not available.
6-18
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Traffic Awareness
6.6.6
ADS-B Traffic Interactions
Selected Traffic
Information
• Registration/call sign
• Vehicle type
• Closure rate
• Track
• Ground speed
Selecting a traffic symbol displays information
about the aircraft in the upper right corner of
the page.
Selections remain active through altitude
filtering, zoom scale, and page changes.
Tapping Next repeatedly steps through
multiple symbols spaced closely together.
• AIRB/SURF eligibility
Selected Traffic
Information
ADS-B/TCAS
Status Indication
Altitude Filter
Setting Indication
AIRB/SURF
Eligibility
Next Key
Traffic Motion
Vector
Selected Traffic
Selected Vector
Type and Duration
Traffic Menu Key
ADS-B Traffic Page
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
6-19
Traffic Awareness
6.7
Traffic Alerts
Traffic alerts occur anytime there is an increase in the number of traffic advisories.
They remain active until the area is clear of all TAs.
Traffic alerts appear as textual
annunciations on the PFD, and as a
pop-up window on the MFD, when
applicable.
Aural traffic alerts are not a function of
the GDU.
MFD Pop-up
ANNUNCIATION
PFD Annunciation
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
TRAFFIC
6-20
Condition
Voice Message
The traffic system reports a
traffic advisory.
Message content depends
on current traffic system
configuration.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
7 Terrain Awareness
TERRAIN CONFIGURATIONS
7.1
7.2
GPS Altitude for Terrain .........................................................................7-2
Database Limitations..............................................................................7-4
TERRAIN DISPLAY
7.3
7.4
7.5
Terrain Page ..........................................................................................7-5
Terrain Setup .........................................................................................7-7
Terrain Proximity....................................................................................7-8
TERRAIN ALERTING
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
Alert Types ..........................................................................................7-13
Terrain-FLTA ........................................................................................7-19
TAWS-B...............................................................................................7-23
External TAWS/HTAWS ........................................................................7-27
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-1
Terrain Awareness
Terrain Configurations
Available Terrain
Configurations
Terrain, obstacle, and wire data
display as overlays on the Terrain
page, Map page, and HSI Map.
Alerting functions are dependent
upon the aircraft type and configured
terrain alerting options.
• (H)Terrain Proximity
• (H)Terrain-FLTA
• TAWS-B
• External TAWS
• TAWS-A
Terrain controls are accessible from the Terrain menu. Map overlay keys are accessible
from the associated map menu.
EXTERNAL TAWS
Depending on system configuration, the GDU may be capable of remotely indicating
TAWS information from the navigator.
7.1
GPS Altitude for Terrain
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. To acquire an accurate 3-D fix
(latitude, longitude, altitude), a minimum of four operating satellites must be in view
of the GPS receiver antenna.
The terrain system uses GPS altitude and position data to:
• Create a 2-D image of surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
aircraft’s position and altitude
• Calculate the aircraft’s flight path in relation to surrounding terrain and
obstacles
• Predict hazardous terrain conditions and issue alerts
7-2
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
7.1.1
GSL Altitude & Indicated Altitude
The GDU converts GPS altitude data to GSL altitude (i.e., the geometric altitude
relative to MSL) for use in terrain functions. All Terrain page depictions and elevation
indications are in GSL.
Variations between GSL altitude and the aircraft’s corrected barometric altitude (or
indicated altitude) are common. As a result, Terrain page altitude data may differ
from current altimeter readings. Both GSL altitude and indicated altitude represent
height above MSL, but differ in accuracy and reliability.
GSL Altitude
Indicated Altitude
• Highly accurate and reliable
geometric altitude source
• Barometric altitude source
corrected for pressure variations
• Does not require local altimeter
settings to determine height
above MSL
• Requires frequent altimeter
setting adjustment to determine
height above MSL
• Not subject to pressure and
temperature variations
• Subject to local atmospheric
conditions
• Affected primarily by satellite
geometry
• Affected by variations in pressure,
temperature, and lapse rate
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-3
Terrain Awareness
7.2
Database Limitations
NOTE
Garmin cross-validates terrain and obstacle data in accordance with
TSO-C151c. However, the information should never be considered
all-inclusive. Database inaccuracies or omissions may exist.
Terrain and obstacle data are not available when the aircraft is operating outside of
the installed database coverage area.
Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from government sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy and completeness of the information. Pilots must
familiarize themselves with the appropriate charts and other data for safe flight.
DATABASE
Terrain
COVERAGE LIMITATIONS
• Not available north of 89º N latitude and south of
89º S latitude
• Coverage areas vary according to database type
• Power line indications for the contiguous United States
and small parts of Canada and Mexico
Obstacle
• Regional definitions may change without notice
• May not contain uncharted obstacles
• May include power lines or only HOT lines depending on
database type [1]
[1]
7-4
HOT lines are power lines that share location with other obstacles identified by the FAA.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
Terrain Display
Unlike the Map page and HSI Map, the Terrain page does not
provide controls for toggling overlays on or off.
7.3
Terrain Page
WARNING
DO NOT USE TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE DATA TO NAVIGATE OR
MANEUVER AROUND TERRAIN. THEY ARE AN AID TO SITUATIONAL
AWARENESS ONLY.
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
All terrain functions require the following components to operate properly.
• Valid 3-D GPS position for terrain and obstacle data display
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
Page Orientation
Label
GSL Altitude
Obstacle
Range Rings
Power Line
Terrain Depiction
Terrain Overlay
Icons
Legend
Terrain Function
Identifier
Menu Key
Terrain Page
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-5
Terrain Awareness
DISPLAY OBJECT
FUNCTION
Page Orientation
Label
Normally, Heading Up orientation.
Changes to Track Up in the event of a heading failure.
GSL Altitude
Displays current GPS height above mean sea level. Pilot
selectable units are available on the System Units page.
Legend
Displays color designations for terrain and obstacle relative
altitude ranges.
Terrain Function
Identifier
Indicates the active terrain function. Includes:
TAWS-A, TAWS-B,
(H)Terrain-FLTA, Terrain Proximity
Terrain
Overlay Icon
Menu Key
Indicates when power lines or obstacles are present at the
current zoom scale.
Automatic removal of obstacle and
power line data occurs at range scales
greater than 10 nm.
Provides access to pilot selectable settings, self-test, and
alert inhibit functions.
AUTOMATIC ZOOM
In the event an alert occurs, the page
automatically zooms to provide the best
depiction of that alerted terrain, obstacle,
or power line.
7-6
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
7.4
Terrain Setup
Tap Menu to access pilot selectable terrain
settings, including self test and alert
inhibit functions.
[1]
TAWS-A only.
SELECTION
360
• Changes view format to a 360º ring
encircling the aircraft (default view)
Arc
• Changes view format to a forward-looking
120º arc
Flight Plan
• Toggles the active flight plan display over
terrain map on or off
Legend
• Toggles the Terrain and Obstacle/Wire
legend on or off
View
Layers
(H)Terrain
Test
(H)Terrain
FLTA
FUNCTION
• Performs terrain alerting system test
• Verifies the validity of required databases
(H)Terrain
Inhibit
• Inhibits the FLTA aural and visual alerts
RP Mode [1]
• Reduces alerting thresholds for low-level
operations
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-7
Terrain Awareness
SELECTION
FUNCTION
Flap Override
• Overrides flap-based FIT alerting while
other FIT alert functions remain in effect
• Inhibits nuisance FIT alerts where flap
extension is not desired
• Inhibits glideslope or glidepath alerts
depending on current state
TAWS-A
• Use to prevent glideslope/glidepath
deviation alerts (e.g., when flying a localizer
backcourse approach)
G/S Inhibit
• Active only for a single approach
GPWS Inhibit
• Performs TAWS alerting system test
TAWS Test
• Verifies the validity of required databases
TAWS-A & B
TAWS Inhibit
[1]
7.5
• Inhibits GPWS audible and visual alerts
(i.e., EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR)
• Inhibits the PDA/FLTA audible and visual
alerts
Rotorcraft only.
Terrain Proximity
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Terrain and obstacle depictions are relative to aircraft altitude
• Obstacle depictions are dependent upon database
• Setup does not provide visual or aural alerts
Terrain Proximity Features
• Non-TSO C151c certified terrain display system
• 2-D graphical representation of surrounding terrain, obstacles, and power lines
relative to aircraft position and altitude
• Declutter automatically removes obstacle and power line data at large ranges
• Continuous monitoring of database validity, GPS and hardware status
• Displays when higher level terrain functions are active
7-8
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
7.5.1
Terrain Elevation Depictions
Color shading depicts terrain elevations relative to the aircraft’s position and altitude.
Colors automatically adjust as the aircraft’s altitude changes.
Red Terrain
Shading
Yellow Terrain
Shading
Black Terrain
Shading
Terrain Depictions, Fixed Wing
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-9
Terrain Awareness
Red
Terrain is more than 250 ft
above the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude +250 ft
Orange Terrain is between 250 ft and 0 ft
above the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft
Yellow below the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude -250 ft
Green
Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Black
Terrain more than 500 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude -500 ft
Red Terrain
Shading
Yellow Terrain
Shading
Black Terrain
Shading
Orange Terrain
Shading
Terrain Depictions, Rotorcraft
7-10
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
7.5.2
Obstacle Elevation Depictions
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Fixed wing aircraft: obstacles more than 2,000 ft below current altitude do
not display
• Rotorcraft: obstacles more than 500 ft below current altitude do not display
• Power line depictions in synthetic vision are currently not available
TOWER OBSTACLES
UNLIGHTED
OBSTACLE
<1,000’
AGL
LIGHTED
OBSTACLE
>1,000’
AGL
<1,000’
AGL
OBSTACLE LOCATION
>1,000’
AGL
FIXED WING
ROTORCRAFT
Red obstacle is
above or within
100 ft below
current altitude.
Red obstacle is at
or above current
altitude.
Yellow obstacle is
between 100 ft
and 1,000 ft below
current altitude.
Yellow obstacle
is within 250 ft
below current
altitude.
White obstacle is
between 1,000 ft
and 2,000 ft below
current altitude.
White obstacle
more than 250 ft
below current
altitude.
WIND TURBINE OBSTACLES
UNLIGHTED
WIND
TURBINE
OBSTACLE
LIGHTED
WIND
TURBINE
OBSTACLE
190-01717-10 Rev. H
WIND TURBINE OBSTACLE LOCATION
FIXED WING
ROTORCRAFT
Red obstacle is above
or within 100 ft below
current altitude.
Red obstacle is at or
above current altitude.
Yellow obstacle is
between 100 ft and
1,000 ft below current
altitude.
Yellow obstacle is
within 250 ft below
current altitude.
White obstacle is more
than 1,000 ft below
current altitude.
White obstacle more
than 250 ft below
current altitude.
Pilot’s Guide
7-11
Terrain Awareness
POWER LINE OBSTACLES
OBSTACLE
POWER LINE OBSTACLE LOCATION
Red power line is above or within 100 ft below current altitude.
Yellow power line is between 100 ft and 1,000 ft below current
altitude.
White power line is between 1,000 ft and 2,000 ft below current
altitude.
OBSTACLE GROUPS
With the exception of power lines, obstacles within close proximity of each other
may display as a group.
• Asterisk indicates that the obstacle belongs to a group
• Relative altitude of the highest obstacle determines color
• Depiction is of the most immediate threat
7-12
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
Terrain Alerting
The behavior of an alerting function is determined at installation. Installer
configurable settings allow:
• Alert suppression for specific runway types
• Gender selection for voice messages
• Volume level
7.6
Alert Types
TERRAIN-FLTA
• Imminent Impact
Available alerting functions depend
on the installed terrain system.
• Reduced Clearance
TAWS-A
• Imminent Impact
• Reduced Clearance
• Premature Descent
• Excessive Descent Rate
• Excessive Closure Rate
• Negative Climb Rate
• Flight Into Terrain
• Excessive Below
Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation
TAWS-B
• Imminent Impact
• Reduced Clearance
• Premature Descent
• Excessive Descent Rate
• Negative Climb Rate
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-13
Terrain Awareness
ALERT TYPE
CONDITION
Imminent
Impact [1]
Aircraft reaches the minimum clearance altitude of any
obstacle (IOI), terrain (ITI), or power line (ILI) in the
projected flight path.
Reduced
Clearance [1]
Aircraft’s vertical flight path is projected to be within the
minimum clearance altitude of an obstacle (ROC), terrain
(RTC), or power line (RLC).
Premature
Descent [2]
Aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path
for the nearest runway.
• Altitude is <700 ft above terrain
• Distance from destination airport is 15 nm or less
Excessive
Descent Rate
Aircraft descends toward terrain at an excessive rate.
Excessive
Closure Rate [3]
Aircraft closes upon terrain at a rate excessive for gear and
flaps in the landing configuration.
Negative Climb
Rate
Aircraft loses altitude following takeoff.
• Altitude is <700 ft above terrain
• Distance from departure airport is 2 nm or less
• Deviation from departure heading is <110º
Flight Into Terrain
Excessive Below
Glideslope or
Glidepath
Deviation
Aircraft is too low with respect to terrain. Based on
landing gear status, flap position, and ground speed.
Aircraft is significantly below the glidepath for the selected
approach.
Active only after departure and when the following
conditions are met.
• Altitude is <1,000 ft AGL
• Gear is configured for landing
• ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach is active
and the unit is indicating vertical navigation
[1]
[2]
[3]
7-14
Alerting inhibited <200 ft AGL within 0.5 nm of approach runway or <125 ft AGL within
1.0 nm of runway threshold.
Alerting inhibited within 0.5 nm of approach runway or <125 ft AGL within 1.0 nm of runway
threshold. Alerting thresholds for final descent are based on current position, speed, and flight
path data.
Alerting inhibited within 5 nm of nearest airport, except when FLTA is not available. In such
cases, “TAWS N/A or TAWS FAIL annunciates and ECR alerting remains active until landing.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
7.6.1
Alerting Thresholds
FLIGHT PHASE
MINIMUM CLEARANCE ALTITUDE
LEVEL FLIGHT
DESCENDING
En Route
700 ft
500 ft
Terminal
350 ft
300 ft
Approach
150 ft
100 ft
Departure
100 ft
100 ft
Height Above Terrain (ft)
EDR THRESHOLDS
Descent Rate
Sink Rate
190-01717-10 Rev. H
“Pull Up”
Pilot’s Guide
7-15
Terrain Awareness
Height Above Terrain (ft)
PDA THRESHOLD
Runway
Threshold
Distance from Destination Airport (nm)
Alerting Area
7-16
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
NCR THRESHOLDS
Height Above Terrain (ft)
Alert triggers: altitude loss, sink rate
Height Above Terrain (ft)
Altitude Loss (ft)
Sink Rate (fpm)
“Don’t Sink”
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-17
Terrain Awareness
7.6.2
Inhibiting TAWS and Terrain-FLTA Alerts
The Terrain Inhibit control is accessible via the terrain
pop-up alert or Terrain page menu.
NOTE
Always use discretion when inhibiting TAWS or Terrain-FLTA alerts.
Re-activate the alert function when appropriate.
TERRAIN INHIBIT FUNCTIONS
INHIBIT
Manually inhibits TAWS or Terrain-FLTA aural and visual
alerts for low altitude approaches or rotorcraft operation.
AUTOMATIC
INHIBIT
Automatically inhibits TAWS and Terrain-FLTA alerts when
the aircraft meets the following approach criteria.
TAWS: • GPS/SBAS approach
• Position inside FAF
TAWS & • Altitude <200 ft above
TERRAIN-FLTA:
runway elevation
• Position <0.5 nm of
approach end or between
each runway end
TAWS-A INHIBIT ANNUNCIATIONS
TAWS-A alert inhibit annunciations appear at the
bottom right of the display.
“FLAP OVRD” does not annunciate if GPWS Inhibit
is already active, as both functions inhibit FIT alerts.
A plus sign indicates multiple alerts.
Terrain Page
Annunciations
7-18
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
7.7
Terrain-FLTA
Terrain-FLTA Features
• Non-TSO C151c certified terrain alerting system
• Aural and visual alerts for potential flight path conflicts involving terrain,
obstacles, or power lines
• FLTA functions: RTC, RLC, ROC, ITI, ILI, and IOI
• Terrain depictions and display overlays
• Cautions and warnings indicate alert severity and threat type
• Textual annunciations on PFD and MFD
• Pop-up alerts on MFD
• Threat location indication on map displays (Map page, HSI Map, Terrain page)
and SVT
• Self-test and alert inhibit functionality. FLTA is active whether synthetic vision is
on or off
• Reduced protection mode (rotorcraft only)
7.7.1
Reduced Protection Mode, Rotorcraft Only
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Rotorcraft only
• Alerting times are significantly less than during normal operating mode
During reduced protection mode, alerting times are significantly less than during
normal operating mode. Use this function only when terrain is within sight.
PFD Annunciation
• Allows rotorcraft-configured systems to operate using
reduced terrain alerting system thresholds
• Suppresses caution alerts during low level operations
and off airport landings while providing warning alert
protection from terrain and obstacles
MFD Annunciation
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-19
Terrain Awareness
7.7.2
Terrain-FLTA Alerts
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition
TER FAIL
Voice Message
Terrain reports a system
failure.
“Terrain System Failure”
The database is missing or
corrupt.
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
TER INHB
Condition
Voice Message
The terrain system reports
that alert inhibit mode is
active.
N/A
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition
TER N/A
Voice Message
No certified GPS position.
Degraded GPS signal.
Aircraft is outside of the
terrain database regional
coverage.
“Terrain System Not
Available”
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Voice Message
Only
7-20
Condition
Voice Message
Terrain system is
transitioning from
unavailable to available.
“Terrain System Available”
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Warning
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance
“Warning, Terrain,
Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact
TERRAIN
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance
“Caution, Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact
TER TEST
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition: Terrain system test is in progress.
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Voice Message
Only
Condition
Voice Message
Terrain system test is okay.
“Terrain System Test
Okay”
Alert Type: Warning
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Obstacle
Clearance
“Warning, Obstacle,
Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact
OBSTACLE
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Obstacle
Clearance
“Caution, Obstacle,
Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-21
Terrain Awareness
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Warning
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Line Clearance
“Warning, Wire, Wire”
Imminent Line Impact
WIRE
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Line Clearance
“Caution, Wire, Wire”
Imminent Line Impact
7-22
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
7.8
TAWS-B
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• TAWS-B feature enablement
• External annunciator for displaying alert information (non-PFD GDUs only)
TAWS-B Features
• Optional TSO C151c Class B terrain alerting system
• All Terrain-FLTA functions plus: premature descent, excessive descent rate,
negative climb rate, and altitude voice callout (500 ft) alerts
7.8.1
TAWS-B Alerts
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Warning
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance
“Terrain, Terrain;
Pull Up, Pull Up”
Or
Imminent Terrain
Impact
PULL UP
Reduced Obstacle
Clearance
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up;
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Obstacle, Obstacle;
Pull Up, Pull Up”
Or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up;
Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
Reduced Line
Clearance
“Wire Ahead, Pull Up;
Wire Ahead, Pull Up”
Or
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Imminent Line Impact
“Wire, Wire;
Pull Up, Pull Up”
Excessive Descent Rate
“Pull Up”
Pilot’s Guide
7-23
Terrain Awareness
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition
Voice Message
An internal TAWS-B audio
failure exists.
TAWS FAIL
A necessary database is
missing or corrupt.
Internal terrain alerting
configuration
is invalid.
“TAWS System Failure”
TAWS-B reports a system
failure.
TAWS INHB
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition: TAWS-B reports inhibit mode active
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition
Voice Message
The GDU is using
backup GPS.
TAWS N/A
The navigation solution is
degraded or the aircraft is
beyond the database
coverage area. TAWS-B
reports that the system is
not available.
“TAWS Not Available”
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Voice Message
Only
7-24
Condition
Voice Message
GPS signal integrity returns
or the aircraft is back
within the database
coverage area. TAWS
transitions from
unavailable to available.
“TAWS Available”
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
ANNUNCIATION
TAWS TEST
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition: TAWS-B system test is in progress
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Voice Message
Only
Condition
Voice Message
Internal TAWS-B system
test is okay.
“TAWS System Test Okay”
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Voice Message
Only
Condition
Voice Message
Aircraft is descending
through 500 ft AGL.
“Five Hundred”
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance
“Caution, Terrain;
Caution, Terrain”
Or
TERRAIN
Imminent Terrain
Impact
“Terrain Ahead;
Terrain Ahead”
Excessive Descent Rate
“Sink Rate”
Premature Descent Alert
“Too Low, Terrain”
“Don’t Sink”
Negative Climb Rate
Or
“Too Low, Terrain”
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-25
Terrain Awareness
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
OBSTACLE
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Obstacle
Clearance
“Caution, Obstacle;
Caution, Obstacle”
Or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
“Obstacle Ahead;
Obstacle Ahead”
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
WIRE
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Line Clearance
“Caution, Wire; Caution,
Wire”
Or
“Wire Ahead; Wire Ahead”
Imminent Line Impact
7-26
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
7.9
External TAWS/HTAWS
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• TAWS/HTAWS function provided by a source external to the GDU
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• TAWS/HTAWS controls are available only on the external TAWS/HTAWS
device
Garmin External TAWS/HTAWS function
• Terrain function relies on an external Garmin GPS device for all TAWS/HTAWS
data [1]
• GDU determines terrain map coloration based on the external GPS position and
GPS altitude
• On PFD: Changes in CDI source selection have no effect on TAWS/HTAWS
alerting functions
[1]
For more information, refer to the applicable GNS 500W series or GTN series pilot’s guide
and/or addendum.
TAWS/HTAWS
SOURCE
TXI FEATURES
• TAWS/HTAWS alert depictions on the Terrain page,
Map page, and in synthetic vision
GTN
• Terrain depictions and display overlays
• Textual annunciations on PFD
• Pop-up alerts on MFD
GNS
Third Party
TAWS
190-01717-10 Rev. H
• Terrain depictions and display overlays
• Textual annunciations on PFD
• GDU display provides only Terrain Proximity
functionality
Pilot’s Guide
7-27
Terrain Awareness
7.9.1
TAWS-A
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• GTN with TAWS-A feature enablement
• Valid flap and landing gear status inputs into the GTN
• Valid radar altimeter
• External annunciator for displaying alert information (non-PFD GDUs only)
TAWS-A Features
• Optional TSO C151c Class A terrain alerting system
• All Terrain-FLTA functions plus: premature descent, excessive descent rate,
negative climb rate, excessive glideslope/glidepath deviation, flap override,
flight into terrain, and altitude voice callout (500 ft) alerts
• Terrain depictions and display overlays
• Textual annunciations on PFD
• Pop-up alerts on MFD
On PFD: Changes in CDI source selection have no effect on TAWS alerting functions.
For more information, refer to the applicable GTN series pilot’s guide.
7-28
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
7.9.2
TAWS-A Alerts
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Warning
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance
“Terrain, Terrain;
Pull Up, Pull Up”
Or
Imminent Terrain
Impact
Reduced Obstacle
Clearance
PULL UP
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up;
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Obstacle, Obstacle;
Pull Up, Pull Up”
Or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up;
Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
Reduced Line
Clearance
“Wire Ahead, Pull Up;
Wire Ahead, Pull Up”
Or
Imminent Line Impact
“Wire, Wire;
Pull Up, Pull Up”
Excessive Descent Rate
“Pull Up”
Excessive Closure Rate
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition
Voice Message
An internal TAWS-A audio
failure exists.
TAWS FAIL
A necessary database is
missing or corrupt.
Internal terrain alerting
configuration
is invalid.
“TAWS System Failure”
TAWS-A reports a system
failure.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-29
Terrain Awareness
ANNUNCIATION
TAWS INHB
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition: TAWS-A reports inhibit mode active
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition
Voice Message
The GDU is using
backup GPS.
TAWS N/A
The navigation solution is
degraded or the aircraft is
beyond the database
coverage area. TAWS-A
reports that the system is
not available.
“TAWS Not Available”
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Voice Message
Only
TAWS TEST
Condition
Voice Message
GPS signal integrity returns
or the aircraft is back
within the database
coverage area. TAWS
transitions from
unavailable to available.
“TAWS Available”
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition: TAWS-A system test is in progress
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Voice Message
Only
7-30
Condition
Voice Message
Internal TAWS-A system
test is okay.
“TAWS System Test Okay”
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Voice Message
Only
Condition
Voice Message
Aircraft is descending
through 500 ft AGL.
“Five Hundred”
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance
“Caution, Terrain;
Caution, Terrain”
Or
Imminent Terrain
Impact
TERRAIN
“Terrain Ahead;
Terrain Ahead”
Excessive Descent Rate
“Sink Rate”
Excessive Closure Rate
“Terrain, Terrain”
Flight Into Terrain
(High Speed or Takeoff)
“Too Low, Terrain”
Flight Into Terrain
(Flaps)
“Too Low, Flaps”
Flight Into Terrain
(Gear)
“Too Low, Gear”
Premature Descent Alert
“Too Low, Terrain”
“Don’t Sink”
Negative Climb Rate
Or
“Too Low, Terrain”
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-31
Terrain Awareness
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
OBSTACLE
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Obstacle
Clearance
“Caution, Obstacle;
Caution, Obstacle”
Or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
“Obstacle Ahead;
Obstacle Ahead”
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
WIRE
Condition
Voice Message
Reduced Line Clearance
“Caution, Wire; Caution,
Wire”
Or
“Wire Ahead; Wire Ahead”
Imminent Line Impact
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
GLIDESLOPE
Condition
Glideslope Deviation
Voice Message
“Glideslope”
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition
Voice Message
Incorrect TAWS
configuration
GPWS FAIL
Radar altimeter unavailable
GPS position unavailable
or degraded
“GPWS System Failure”
Internal TAWS-A audio
failure exists
7-32
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Terrain Awareness
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE, POP-UP, CONDITIONS,
& VOICE MESSAGE
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition
Voice Message
GPWS not available
GPWS N/A
Incorrect TAWS
configuration
Radar altimeter unavailable
N/A
GPS position unavailable or
degraded
Internal TAWS-A audio
failure exists
G/S INHB
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition: TAWS-A reports glideslope inhibit mode active
FLAP OVRD
Alert Type: Advisory
Pop-up Alert: N/A
Condition: TAWS-A reports flap override mode active
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
7-33
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
7-34
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8 Fuel & Engine Indicating System
RECIPROCATING ENGINES
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
EIS Display .............................................................................................8-2
EIS Setup ...............................................................................................8-4
EIS Functions .........................................................................................8-6
Gauges..................................................................................................8-8
Lean Assist Mode ................................................................................8-15
EIS Operations .....................................................................................8-19
Engine Advisories ................................................................................8-21
TURBINE ENGINES
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
EIS Display ...........................................................................................8-22
EIS Setup .............................................................................................8-24
EIS Functions .......................................................................................8-25
Gauges................................................................................................8-26
EIS Operations .....................................................................................8-40
Engine Advisories ................................................................................8-42
ELECTRICAL
8.14
Electrical Gauges .................................................................................8-43
FUEL
8.15
Fuel Computer ....................................................................................8-44
ENGINE ALERTS
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-1
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
Reciprocating Engines
8.1
EIS Display
The EIS displays engine, electrical, and fuel information using
parameter specific indicator types (e.g., analog indicators, digital data
fields, bar graphs, horizontal and vertical bar indicators).
These instruments replace
traditional analog gauges
used for starting the engine
and monitoring performance.
For limitations, consult the
AFM or POH.
Layout varies according to:
• Display type
Single Engine
Multi-engine
• Number of engines in
aircraft
• Number and type of
installed sensors
GDU 700L and GDU 700P present engine
instrumentation on a full-screen dedicated
display when configured for EIS.
GDU 700P
8-2
GDU 700L
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
40%
60%
GDU 700( ) with the EIS/MFD
layout present a split view of
required engine instrumentation
with an MFD function.
This configuration supports
single-engine aircraft.
GDU 700L with EIS/MFD
GDU 1060 presents two
views of engine
instrumentation: a pilot
selectable Engine page on
the MFD, and a vertical
gauge strip which is
always present.
Engine Page
Gauge Strip
• Gauges depicting oil temperature, oil pressure, and fuel
flow
Engine Page
• Pilot selectable user fields
• Graphical depiction of engine CHT/EGT/TIT values [1]
• Menu access key
• Lean Assist mode function key
• Unobstructed compact view of engine information
Gauge Strip
• Resides at the left or right edge of the display [2]
• No selectable features
[1]
[2]
Primary EGT and TIT dependent upon aircraft type.
Location dependent upon configuration.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-3
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.2
EIS Setup
The Menu key provides access
to the fuel computer, engine
and flight hours, engine
advisories, and lean modes. On
GDU 700( ), controls for
customizing system settings
also reside here.
GDU 700( ) setup functions are
accessible from the System
menu. On GDU 1060, they
reside on the MFD System page.
8-4
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
EIS SETUP SELECTIONS
Specify units of measure for fuel computer and pilot selectable
gauges. Selections synchronize across all configured GDUs. [1]
Units
• Distance
• Temperature
• Fuel Computer
• View unit and software information
Status
• Check status of all configured LRUs
Backlight
• Adjust display brightness
Aircraft Log
• View engine and airframe cycle counters
Export Data
Log
• Save logged data to SD card
Lean Mode [2]
[1]
[2]
• Select Lean Mode from popup menu
• Options dependent upon configured engine type
Engine gauge units are not adjustable.
On GDU 1060, this function is accessible from the Engine menu.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-5
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.3
EIS Functions
Graphical Indicator
Propeller Sync
Indicator
Dual Digital Data
Fields
Single Digital Data
Field
Selectable Bar
Graph (EGT)
Fuel Quantity,
Dual Bar
Selectable Bar
Graph (CHT)
Selectable
User Field
Menu Key
Lean Key
Common EIS Display Elements
Graphical
Indicators
Display a graphical presentation and digital readout of the
specified value. [1]
Digital Data Fields
Display a digital readout from the associated sensor. [1]
Includes single or dual input values depending on system
configuration. Placement corresponds to engine location.
Bar Graphs
Provide digital EGT/TIT and CHT cylinder readings. [2]
• CHT and EGT digital values are selectable by cylinder
• After 10 seconds, CHT values default to the hottest
cylinder on each engine
Fuel Quantity
Gauges
Display fuel amounts for the specified fuel tanks. [3]
Horizontal and
Vertical Bar
Indicators
Display instrument information on a single horizontal or
vertical bar. Includes single or dual pointers depending on
engine type. May include digital readout fields depending
on display layout.
8-6
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
Prop Sync
Indicator
Provides a visual reference for synchronizing multi-engine
RPM. This indicator uses inputs received from the left and
right engine tachometer to show a comparison of the
matched RPM and the propeller phase angles between
two engines.
• If RPM for both engines is the same, indicator remains
stationary
• If RPM varies between engines, the indicator rotates in
direction of the faster engine
The speed at which the indicator rotates is determined by
the RPM differential between the two engines.
Selectable User
Field
Opens a menu of the selectable data fields available for
display. The type of parameters available for selection is
determined during installation.
A white border differentiates selectable user fields from
non-selectable digital data fields.
Enables or disables Lean Assist mode.
• To enable mode and change the name on the key label,
tap Lean
Lean/Monitor Key
• To exit mode and return the graph to its normal
temperature monitoring mode, tap Monitor
Lean Assist mode is required for all engine leaning
operations.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Limits are configured according to system design or the AFM/POH. They are not pilot
selectable.
Primary EGT and TIT indications are dependent upon aircraft type.
Fuel gauges are configured and calibrated during installation.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-7
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.4
Gauges
For aircraft equipped with a starting vibrator, the RPM reading is not accurate
during engine cranking. For aircraft that measure engine RPM using P lead
sensors, the reading may momentarily fluctuate when selecting operation on a
single magneto.
8.4.1
Gauge Types
Gauge format varies depending on GDU type and configuration. Indicators
appearing as round gauges on one display may appear as a vertical or horizontal bar
on another. Exceptions include the tachometer and manifold pressure gauges which
are always round.
Fuel Flow
Gauges
The following items are not
obstructed by pop-up alerts or
menu functions.
• Primary engine
indications
Menu
• Gauge strip
Dedicated EIS Display
LABEL
UNITS
FUNCTION
RPM
RPM
• Engine tachometer
MAN
inHg, psi
• Engine manifold pressure
Fuel or Fuel
Pressure
psi, bar
FF
gph, lt/hr,
PPH,
kg/hr
CARB or CARB
Temperature
ºC, ºF
• Blue arc indicates temperature range where
carburetor icing is likely to occur (-15 to 5ºC)
Oil or Oil
Pressure
psi, HPa,
bar
• Oil pressure
Oil or Oil
Temperature
ºC, ºF
8-8
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel flow
• Carburetor air temperature
• Oil temperature
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
LABEL
UNITS
FUNCTION
• Cylinder head temperature for hottest cylinder
(bar indicator) [1]
CHT
ºC, ºF
• Graphical representation of CHT for each
cylinder [2]
• Hottest cylinder and cooling rate indications
• Selectable temperature values on full EIS
layouts [3]
• Graphical representation of exhaust gas
temperature for each cylinder [2]
EGT
ºC, ºF
• Peak EGT
• Selectable temperature values [4] [5]
• Average exhaust gas temperature for engine
(Primary EGT) [6]
TIT
ºC, ºF
• Turbine inlet temperature
IAT
ºC, ºF
• Inlet air temperature
CDT
ºC, ºF
• Compressor discharge temperature
IAT CDT Diff
ºC, ºF
• IAT, CDT, and IAT/CDT temperature differential
Fuel or
Main Fuel
lb, lt, gal,
kg
• Current fuel quantity in main tanks
Tip Fuel
lb, lt, gal,
kg
• Current fuel quantity in tip tanks
Aux Fuel
lb, lt, gal,
kg
• Current fuel quantity in auxiliary tanks
Bus Volts
V
• Bus voltage
Bat Volts
V
• Battery voltage
ALT AMPS or
ALT %
A, %
BAT Amps
A
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
• Alternator load
• Battery load
EIS gauge strip only.
Due to limited space, not all cylinders display on EIS/MFD layouts.
GDU 700( ) or GDU 1060 Engine page.
Graph labels are dependent upon aircraft configuration (e.g., “E” indicates Primary EGT; “T”
indicates TIT).
EIS gauge strip presents Primary EGT (if installed) or hottest of the individual EGTs.
Range and units are dependent upon configuration.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-9
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.4.2
Markings & Indications
Gauge range indications are color coded in accordance with their specified operating
limits. Units of measure, limits, and gauge colors are configured during installation.
• Amber radial line or arc denotes a caution range
• Red minimum/maximum line or arc denotes a limitation
NON-SAFE RANGE INDICATIONS & ALERTING
Alert Suppression
The following gauges do not
alert when the tachometer
indicates less than 100 RPM and
the aircraft is on ground.
• Fuel flow
• Fuel pressure
• Manifold pressure
• Oil pressure
To attract attention, engine gauges
change appearance when a parameter
is within a caution or warning alert
band. These non-safe range indications
remain active while the gauge is within
the alerted range.
For alerting purposes, gauges are split
into two groups: engine power and
engine performance. Alerting functions
differ for each group.
Pointer Color
Change
Pointer Color
Change
Solid
Highlight
Flashing
Highlights
Power Gauge
GROUP
Performance Gauge
GAUGE
FUNCTION
Engine
Power
Manifold
Pressure
Tachometer
Fuel Flow
• Pointer changes color to reflect non-safe
operating status.
• Pointer changes color to reflect non-safe
operating status.
Engine
Performance
Oil Pressure [1]
Oil Temperature
Primary EGT
CHT
CDT
Amps/Volts
Fuel Pressure
Fuel Quantity
[1]
[2]
8-10
• Readout field turns solid amber or red
depending on alert type.
• Gauge label, readout field, and units
(if displayed) flash amber or red
depending on alert type.
• ACK key flashes (GDU 700( ) only).
• All flashing indications turn solid once the
pilot acknowledges the alert. [2]
To minimize the number of nuisance alerts, oil pressure gauges do not flash when within the
caution band.
Alerts automatically acknowledge after 10 seconds on GDU 1060.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
FUEL GAUGE LABEL
The fuel quantity gauge label reflects the aircraft’s fuel tank configuration.
For aircraft with both main and
auxiliary fuel tanks, this gauge
is labeled “Main Fuel.”
Main and Auxiliary
Fuel Tanks
190-01717-10 Rev. H
No Auxiliary
Fuel Tanks
Pilot’s Guide
8-11
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
BAR GRAPH INDICATIONS
Each bar graph contains the following components.
• Dynamic chart depicting cylinder temperature status
• Digital temperature reading of the highlighted cylinder
• Limit markings
The size of each graph varies according to aircraft type (i.e., single or twin engine
aircraft and the number of cylinders per engine) and gauge configuration (i.e., TIT or
primary EGT).
Selected Cylinder
Number
Digital Readout
(Selected Cylinder
Temperature)
Currently Selected
POH Specified Limit
Markings
Selector advances
from left to right.
Gauge Type
Indicator [1]
(Primary EGT or TIT)
Cylinder Number
[1] Presence and type dependent upon configuration.
SYMBOL
8-12
INDICATION
MEANING
Cyan CHT/EGT
Highlight
Currently selected cylinder
Amber CHT Highlight
Hottest cylinder (automatically selected)
Single Blue CHT Arrow
CHT is cooling at a rate faster than 30°F
(16.7°C) per minute
Double Blue CHT
Arrow
CHT is cooling at a rate faster than 60°F
(33.3°C) per minute
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.4.3
Gauge Interactions
TEMPERATURE VALUES
The EIS graphically displays CHT and EGT data for each cylinder.
Graduations are scaled and sized during installation.
Tapping the a graph manually advances the selector to the next temperature value
(e.g., CHT, EGT, Primary EGT, or TIT).
• CHT selections revert to auto mode after 10 seconds of inactivity
• EGT values are not selectable during lean assist operations
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-13
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
SELECTABLE USER FIELDS
These fields allow you to select engine and fuel parameters for display on the EIS.
Available user fields and selectable parameters are determined during installation.
Tapping any user field opens a list of available engine parameters and their current
values. Selecting a parameter displays its value on the EIS and closes the menu.
• Fields may be modified to display alternate data at any time
• Several parameter units are pilot adjustable
KEY
EST Fuel
Remaining
DISPLAYS
• Estimated amount of total fuel remaining [1] [3]
Fuel Used
• Total fuel used since last update to estimated fuel remaining
quantity [1] [3]
Range
• Total range based on remaining fuel and current ground
speed [1] [3]
Endurance
(HH+MM)
• Fuel endurance time in hours+minutes [1]
Fuel at
Destination
• Estimated fuel amount at current flight plan destination
[1] [2] [3]
Endurance
at DEST
• Remaining fuel endurance time (hours+minutes) at
destination [1] [2]
Flight/Engine
Hours
• Total flight and engine hours [5]
Efficiency
• Fuel efficiency [3]
Outside Air
TEMP (ISA)
• Degrees deviation from the International Standard
Atmosphere model [4]
Outside Air
TEMP (SAT)
• Outside static air temperature [4]
Outside Air
TEMP (TAT)
• Outside total air temperature [4]
CHT DIFF
• Difference between hottest and coldest CHT for each
engine [6]
EGT DIFF
• Difference between hottest and coldest EGT for each
engine [6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
8-14
Values are based on fuel computer calculations.
Requires an active flight plan from the navigator.
Parameter units are pilot selectable.
Units are independent of PFD units.
Engine hours accumulate when an engine is running. Flight hours accumulate when the
aircraft is in air.
Units are dependent upon configuration.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.5
Lean Assist Mode
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• For specific engine leaning procedures and temperature targets, consult the
AFM
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Lean mode availability is dependent upon aircraft configuration and engine
instrumentation
Selectable lean modes allow you to identify peak EGT/TIT temperatures and
temperature differential values associated with the leaning process.
Available mode selections are listed in the Lean Mode menu.
8.5.1
Lean Mode Key
Tapping the Lean key once places the EIS in Lean Assist mode.
To return to normal operating mode, tap Monitor.
When Lean Assist mode is active:
• EGT graph features are not selectable
• Engine menu is not available
• Monitor key displays in the navigation bar
• Mode type annunciates at the bottom of the display
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-15
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.5.2
Peak Temperature Indications
During Lean Assist mode, the system waits for the EGT or TIT to peak, and then
decrease by a minimum of 6ºF. When this occurs:
• The corresponding temperature bar on the graph turns white.
• A white saddle indicates the maximum temperature value recorded for the
sensor. In cases where the system waits for the last engine cylinder to peak,
violet saddles indicate the maximum temperature of all other peaked
cylinders.
• The “PEAK” annunciation and temperature value display in white at the top
of the graph. After three seconds, this field reverts to the current operating
temperature.
• A numeric field displays the difference between the peak and current
operating temperatures. This value changes to reflect all subsequent
temperature fluctuations. A negative value denotes an operating
temperature lower than the maximum recorded value. A positive value
denotes a temperature increase greater than the previously detected peak.
• Saddle position and deviation values automatically adjust to reflect any
increases in peak temperature.
ROP LEAN
ANNUNCIATION
ROP LEAN
MODE
Rich of Peak
Lean
FUNCTION
• Indicates the first engine cylinder to
reach peak EGT during the leaning
process
Difference
between peak
and current EGT
Saddle
(EGT Peak)
Cylinder #1
First to Peak
(Second Engine)
Cylinder #2
First to Peak
ROP Lean
(Twin Engine Aircraft)
8-16
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
LOP LEAN
ANNUNCIATION
LOP LEAN
MODE
Lean of Peak
Lean
FUNCTION
• Indicates the last engine cylinder to
reach peak EGT during the leaning
process
Difference between
peak and current
EGT
Saddles (EGT Peak)
Cylinder #5
Last to Peak
Cylinder #6
Last to Peak
(Second Engine)
LOP Lean
(Twin Engine Aircraft)
EGT LEAN
ANNUNCIATION
EGT LEAN
MODE
Primary EGT
Lean
FUNCTION
• Indicates the peak temperature of
the primary EGT during the leaning
process
• Available only when Primary EGT is
the configured gauge type
Difference
between peak
and current EGT
Primary EGT
Peaked
(Second Engine)
Primary EGT
Peaked
EGT Lean
(Twin Engine Aircraft)
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-17
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
TIT LEAN
TIT leaning is available for turbocharged aircraft configured for single or dual TIT
measurements.
ANNUNCIATION
TIT LEAN
TIT 1 LEAN
MODE
Turbine Inlet
Temperature
Lean
Turbine Inlet
Temperature
Lean First
Peak
FUNCTION
• Indicates the peak TIT during the
leaning process
• Available only on single
turbocharger aircraft
• Indicates the first temperature
sensor to reach peak TIT
• Available only on single engine
aircraft equipped with dual
turbochargers
• Function resembles ROP Lean
TIT 2 LEAN
Turbine Inlet
Temperature
Lean Second
Peak
• Indicates the second temperature
sensor to reach peak TIT
• Available only on single engine
aircraft equipped with dual
turbochargers
• Function resembles LOP Lean
Difference between
peak and current TIT
TIT Peaked
TIT Lean
Second TIT Peaked
Second TIT Lean
8-18
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.6
EIS Operations
PHASE
OF FLIGHT
OPERATION
Customize system settings
Initial Setup
Set fuel full and tab capacity levels
Set engine advisories
Calibrate fuel flow
Preflight
En Route
Post Flight
8.6.1
Add fuel
Lean the engine
Monitor gauges
Record engine and flight hours
Initial Setup
Initial setup operations include:
• Customizing system settings
• Setting fuel tabs
• Setting engine advisories
• Calibrating fuel flow
For convenience, flight and engine
hours display at startup.
CUSTOMIZE SYSTEM SETTINGS
Specify all necessary EIS settings. Customization options reside in either the System
page (GDU 1060) or the System menu (GDU 700( )).
SET FUEL FULL AND TAB CAPACITY
Specify estimated fuel full and tab values using the controls in the fuel computer.
SET ENGINE ADVISORIES
Specify engine advisory parameters and limit values.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-19
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
CALIBRATE FUEL FLOW
NOTE
If the calculated adjustment factor exceeds the 10 percent fuel flow
calibration limit, contact your dealer for support.
Calibrate fuel flow using the controls provided in the fuel computer. Re-calibration is
recommended following the first flight or any time there is a significant difference
between the estimated remaining fuel quantity and the actual amount of fuel in the
tanks.
1. Fuel aircraft to a known level (i.e., the bottom of the tabs inside each fuel
filler port).
2. Tap EST Fuel Remaining and enter the amount of fuel on board.
NOTE: This value must be at least 5 liters (2 gallons) greater than the previous
estimated fuel on board amount.
3. Burn no less than 10 percent of usable fuel. Burning more than 10 percent will
yield a more accurate calibration.
4. Refuel to the previously entered level.
5. Tap EST Fuel Remaining and enter the amount of fuel on board.
6. Tap Calibrate FFlow.
7. Enter the amount of actual fuel used. Note the adjustment value.
8. Tap Update Calibration.
9. Confirm the request.
10.Acknowledge the pop-up message.
8.6.2
Preflight
ADD FUEL
Update the remaining fuel quantity whenever fuel is added to the aircraft.
1. Fuel the aircraft.
2. Enter the appropriate fuel amount using the fuel computer.
8.6.3
En Route
LEAN THE ENGINE
1. Select the preferred leaning function from the Lean Mode menu.
2. Tap Lean.
3. Monitor the temperatures graph for reference peak events and lean the mixture
accordingly.
8-20
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.6.4
Post Flight
RECORD ENGINE AND FLIGHT HOURS
Document total engine and flight time. This information is necessary for logging and
maintenance purposes. Engine and flight hours are viewable on the associated page.
8.7
Engine Advisories
Specify values at which the system will advise of certain engine parameters. The
system issues an advisory message when an engine gauge exceeds its specified value.
These messages are acknowledged in the same manner as system advisories.
Available selections are based on aircraft configuration.
• CHT Cooling Rate
• High/Low Bus Voltage
• EGT Differential
• High/Low Oil Temperature
• High CHT
• Low Endurance [1]
• High TIT
• Low Estimate Fuel Remaining [1]
• High/Low Battery Voltage
[1]
Actual amounts are based on fuel computer calculations and an active flight plan.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-21
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
Turbine Engines
8.8
EIS Display
The EIS displays engine, electrical, and fuel information using
parameter specific indicator types (e.g., analog indicators, digital data
fields, dynamic markings, horizontal and vertical bar indicators).
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• GDU 700P configured for turboprop EIS only
• GDU 1060 with turboprop EIS display
These instruments replace traditional analog
gauges used for starting the engine and
monitoring performance. For limitations,
consult the AFM or POH.
Layout varies according to display type and
the number and type of installed sensors.
GDU 700P presents engine instrumentation
on a full-screen dedicated display when
configured for EIS.
GDU 700P
8-22
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
GDU 1060 presents two
views of engine
instrumentation: a pilot
selectable Engine page on
the MFD, and a vertical
gauge strip which is
always present.
Engine Page
Engine Page
Gauge Strip
• Expanded information for configured secondary engine
gauges
• Pilot selectable user fields
• Menu access key
• Unobstructed compact view of primary engine information
Gauge Strip
• Resides at the left or right edge of the display [1]
• No selectable features
[1]
Location dependent upon configuration.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-23
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.9
EIS Setup
The Menu key provides access
to the fuel computer, engine
and flight hours, and engine
advisories. On GDU 700P,
controls for customizing system
settings also reside here.
GDU 700P setup functions are
accessible from the System
menu. On GDU 1060, they
reside on the MFD System page.
Specify units of measure for fuel computer and pilot selectable
gauges. Selections synchronize across all configured GDUs. [1]
Units
• Distance
• Temperature
• Fuel Computer
• View unit and software information
Status
• Check status of all configured LRUs
Backlight
• Adjust display brightness
Aircraft Log
• View engine and airframe cycle counters
Exceedances
• View and acknowledge exceedance advisories
Export Data
Log
• Save logged data to SD card
[1]
8-24
Engine gauge units are not adjustable.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.10 EIS Functions
Graphical Indicator
Horizontal Bar
Indicators
Electrical Gauge
Fuel Used
Indicator
Text Lamp
Selectable
User Field
Single
Horizontal
Bar Indicator
Dual Digital Data
Fields (Selectable)
EST Fuel
Remaining
Indicator
Common EIS Display Elements
Graphical
Indicators
Display a graphical presentation and digital readout of the
specified value. If configured, these gauges may be
accompanied by a text lamp. [1]
Digital Data
Fields
Display a digital readout from the associated sensor. [1]
Includes single or dual input values depending on system
configuration.
Fuel Quantity
Gauges
Display fuel amounts for the specified fuel tanks. [2]
Horizontal
and Vertical
Bar Indicators
Display instrument information on a single horizontal or vertical
bar. Includes single or dual pointers depending on engine type.
May include digital readout fields depending on display layout.
Selectable
User Field
Opens a menu of the selectable data fields available for display.
The type of parameters available for selection is determined
during installation. A gray border differentiates selectable user
fields from non-selectable digital data fields.
[1]
[2]
Limits are configured according to system design or the AFM/POH. They are not pilot
selectable.
Fuel gauges are configured and calibrated during installation.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-25
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.11 Gauges
8.11.1
Gauge Types
Gauge labels are customizable to match aircraft configuration. Labeling presented in
the following table may differ from actual labeling on the unit.
LABEL [1]
UNITS
FUNCTION
NG
%, RPM
• Engine gas producer speed
NP
%, RPM
• Propeller RPM
TRQ
%, psi, ft-lb • Engine torque
Engine TEMP
ºC, ºF
Fuel or Fuel
Pressure
psi, bar
gph, lt/hr,
PPH,
kg/hr
• Fuel flow
FF
Oil or Oil
Pressure
psi, HPa,
bar
• Oil pressure
Oil or Oil
Temperature
ºC, ºF
Fuel or
Main Fuel
lb, lt, gal,
kg
• Current fuel quantity in main tanks
EST Fuel RMNG
lb, lt, gal,
kg
• Estimated fuel based on pilot entered value
and fuel flow
Tip Fuel
lb, lt, gal,
kg
• Current fuel quantity in tip tanks
Aux Fuel
lb, lt, gal,
kg
• Current fuel quantity in auxiliary tanks
Bus Volts
V
• Bus voltage
Bat Volts
V
• Battery voltage
ALT/Gen AMPS
or ALT/Gen %
A, %
BAT Amps
A
• Turbine engine temperature
[1]
8-26
• Typically inter turbine temp (ITT) or exhaust gas
temp
• Fuel pressure
• Oil temperature
• Alternator/generator load
• Battery load
Actual gauge labels are dependent upon installer setup.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
CABIN ALTITUDE/RATE
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• GFC 600 autopilot configured to provide cabin altitude
• Displays cabin altitude from the GFC 600 autopilot
• GDU calculates cabin rate based on received altitude
• Units (FT, FT/Min or MT/Min) are determined by the
System Units
• Beneficial for TXi installs in pressurized aircraft
• Available as a user-selectable field on MFD Engine page
DIGITAL FUEL TOTALIZER
This gauge displays the fuel totalizer calculation from the fuel computer (estimated
fuel remaining). It is available in two formats:
• a user-selectable field on MFD Engine page
• a non-selectable gauge on the EIS gauge strip
Selectable User Field
Non-selectable Gauge
MFD Engine Page
GDU 1060/700( )
EIS Gauge Strip
GDU 1060 only
The estimation of fuel remaining is based on the pilot input of fuel onboard
along with the measurement of fuel flow.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-27
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
SUNRISE TURBINE GAUGES
These truncated round gauges have fewer graduations, allowing room for more
gauges on the display. Labels may vary based on configuration.
Gas Generator Turbine Speed
(N1, NG)
• RPM or % RPM values
Torque
Engine Temperature
• Units are °F or ºC
Propeller RPM
• Units are %, ft-lb, or psi
• RPM or % RPM values
• Displays up to four
whole numbers
Propeller RPM Minimum Threshold
Depending on aircraft, sensor type, and configuration, this gauge may be
configured with a minimum threshold value. During start and shutdown, RPM
values below this threshold display as a series of dashes (---). Values above the
threshold display as normal.
8-28
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
NON-SAFE RANGE INDICATIONS & ALERTING
Alert Suppression
To avoid nuisance alerts while the
parameters are in typical ranges
for the engine state, flashing is
suppressed for fuel pressure, oil
pressure, and oil temp when the
engine is off or starting.
To attract attention, engine gauge
display markings (bands, radials,
limitations) change appearance when a
parameter is within a caution or
warning alert band. These non-safe
range indications remain active while
the gauge is within the alerted range.
Warning
Caution
Pointer Color
Change
Solid
Highlight
Pointer Color
Change
Solid
Highlight
Dynamic Gauge
Solid
Highlight
Pointer Color
Change
Solid
Highlight
Pointer Color
Change
Horizontal Bar Indicator
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-29
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
TEXT LAMPS
Text lamps are available for the
following sunrise gauges:
• Torque
• ITT
• NG
If configured, sunrise gauges may be
accompanied by a text lamp. These
windows display a single abbreviated
message when the related system is in
operation.
These fields appear at the top left of the
gauge.
• NP
• Fuel Flow
• Oil Temperature
• Oil Pressure
Text color and behavior (i.e., solid or flashing)
are dependent upon configuration.
Starter lamps may display a timer.
When the system is inactive, the window
is empty.
TEXT
MEANING
Text color and behavior
(i.e., solid or flashing) are
dependent upon configuration.
START
Starter on
IGN
Ignition on
BETA
Reverse thrust
When the starter lamp is configured, GDU uses the photocell for display
brightness during engine start. This is to ensure EIS visibility as power is drawn to
start the engine.
8-30
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.11.2
Timers
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Timer type, quantity, and availability are dependent upon configuration
• Maximum allowable exceedance time (or grace period) dependent upon
configuration
Timers are available for the
following gauges:
• Torque
• Prop RPM
• NG/N1
• Turbine Engine Temperature
• Oil Temperature
Timers indicate the amount of time
remaining in the allowable grace period
for operation above a limit.
If configured, timers appear at the
bottom right of the gauge, adjacent to
the parameter field.
Timer exceedances are viewable in the
System Logs.
• Oil Pressure
• Fuel Pressure
A single gauge may contain multiple timers running simultaneously.
Timer fields always display the parameter with the shortest time remaining. The
other timers continue to count down. If a timer expires, the system generates an
exceedance log entry for the parameter.
Timers:
• Exceedance
• Engine start/cooldown
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-31
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
EXCEEDANCE TIMERS
Exceedance timers indicate the maximum allowable
time that the parameter can operate at an elevated
level. This grace period is configured by the installer
during initial setup. Depending on the parameter
type, the time limit may be based on aircraft or
engine manufacturer specifications.
Exceedance Timer Behaviors
• Timer begins counting once the indicated parameter exceeds its threshold
• Timers reset/disappear if the parameter falls below the threshold prior to
expiration
• Exceedance recording begins when the timer expires (i.e., once grace period
ends)
• Exceedances without a grace period cause the system to record a log entry
upon going above the threshold and does not display a timer
Exceedance timers are very useful for recording temperature exceedances during
engine starts. For more information about exceedance logging, refer to
section 1.30.
8-32
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
.
Within Range
Timer does not display during
normal operating conditions
Above Threshold
Timer displays once the
parameter exceeds threshold.
Automatic countdown begins.
Approaching Time Limit
Timer begins to flash during
the last 5 seconds of the
configured grace period.
Warning/Expired
Timer changes color once it
reaches zero. It flashes in unison
with the alerted gauge pointer,
value, and label, indicating a
warning condition. Exceedance
recording begins.
While the timer counts down, attempt to remedy the exceeding parameter by
managing aircraft systems or reducing engine power.
The exceedance timer feature is useful for managing engine and aircraft systems
within safe operating limits. The feature relies on the installer to configure specific
aircraft/engine data and it is possible not all operating limitations are entered into the
EIS system. The pilot in command is responsible to know and abide by all published
limitations and operating ranges in the POH/AFM.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-33
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
ENGINE START/COOLDOWN TIMERS
• Availability dependent upon
configuration
• Start timer counts up from zero
when the starter engages
• Starter cooldown timer changes to
blue and counts down from zero if
the starter engages then
disengages without a successful
engine start
• May display as a text lamp with a
sunrise gauge or as a
user-selectable field on the MFD
Engine page (depending on
configuration)
On MFD: The start timer is available as a user select gauge on the Engine page.
When the starter is active:
• Label changes to show that the starter is “Engaged”
• Timer begins counting up from zero to indicate the
amount of time that the starter has been active
When the starter is inactive, the gauge displays underscores.
When the starter switches from active to inactive, but the
engine is OFF:
• Timer text turns blue and the label changes to show the
starter is in “Cooldown”
• Timer counts down from zero (negative value) to indicate
the time since the starter was turned off
When the starter goes from active to inactive, and the engine is
in the RUNNING or STARTING state, the annunciation changes
to “Ready.”
8-34
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.11.3
Counters
NOTE
Do not reboot the GDU during flight unless operational procedures dictate.
Doing so may register an additional engine or airframe cycle. Contact a
Garmin dealer to adjust counters to match other tracking records.
Counter Types
• Engine and flight hours
• Takeoffs and Landings
• Starts and Shutdowns
(based on engine data)
Counters record various cycle data
(e.g., takeoffs/landings, engine and
flight hours). These fields always display
the counter type with the higher value
(e.g., if the number of starts is higher
than the number of shutdowns, the
number of starts displays).
Counter values are viewable in the
System Logs.
ENGINE & AIRFRAME CYCLE COUNTERS
Types include: Takeoffs and Landings; Starts and Shutdowns (based on engine data)
Turbine engine components are
life limited by hours of operation
and the number of cycles. In the
past, aircraft operators would
typically record the number of
flight hours and operations in a
paper logbook. GDU records this
information automatically.
• Takeoffs/landings increment based
on GPS, air data, or the weight on
wheels discrete
• System records parameters
separately on individual counters
• Higher counter value always displays
(e.g., if the number of starts is higher
than the number of shutdowns, the
field displays the number of starts)
GDU stores and displays the information in the aircraft log.
Home > System > Logs > Aircraft Logs
ENGINE AND FLIGHT HOURS
The system records engine and flight hours. These parameters
may display as a user-selectable field. They are also viewable in
the aircraft log.
For convenience, engine and flight hours
also display on the startup screen.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-35
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.11.4
Dynamic Markings and Indications
NOTE
It is the responsibility of the pilot in command to know and abide by all
published limitations and operating ranges in the POH/AFM.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
The dynamic gauge feature relies on the installer to configure specific aircraft/engine
data. It is possible that not all operating limitations are entered into the EIS system.
Dynamic Gauge Markings
Knowing what you need to know
The EIS system is useful for
managing engine and aircraft
systems within safe operating
limits. Dynamic gauges further
assist the pilot by presenting only
the gauge limits and markings
appropriate for the current aircraft
conditions. This allows for easier
gauge interpretation as well as
increased safety and efficiency.
Dynamic gauge range markings change
to accommodate non-safe range and
alerting parameters. For example, torque
gauge markings change based on
propeller RPM, while temperature
markings change based on engine
operating conditions.
COLOR INDICATIONS
Colors are in accordance with their specified operating limits. Units of measure,
limits, and gauge colors are configured during installation.
• Amber radial line or arc denotes a caution range
• Red minimum/maximum line or arc denotes a limitation
8-36
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
MARKING SETS
Dynamic markings modify the standard gauge by showing only the pertinent
information during a particular flight situation.
The system uses four types of marking sets.
Standard
Configured by the installer to
match the existing ITT gauge
in the aircraft.
If for any reason the system
cannot determine the correct
markings to show, the gauge
defaults to the standard set.
Starting
Once the system determines
that the engine is starting, the
gauge changes to show the
starting temperature limits.
In this example, the absolute
maximum temperature is absent
and the highest red line limit
indicates starting maximum
temperature.
Running
Alerted
Once the system determines
that the engine is running,
the gauge changes to show
the cruise red line limit.
Alerting behavior changes
based on the active marking
set.
Starting limit indications are
absent.
Unlike analog gauges, which require you to memorize limitations or interpret
multiple markings, dynamic gauges present only the limitations applicable to
specific situations or flight conditions.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-37
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
GAUGE PREVIEW
You may generate a report detailing the different dynamic marking states for each
individual gauge. This information is unique to the aircraft and its configuration.
Gauge Report
Use this report to familiarize yourself with the different marking states that are
possible with each gauge. To obtain a report, contact your dealer for assistance.
8-38
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.11.5
Gauge Interactions
SELECTABLE USER FIELDS
These fields allows selection of engine and fuel parameters for display on the EIS.
Available user fields and selectable parameters are determined during installation.
Tapping any user field opens a list of available engine parameters and their current
values. Selecting a parameter displays its value on the EIS and closes the menu.
• Fields may be modified to display alternate data at any time
• Several parameter units are pilot adjustable
KEY
EST Fuel
Remaining
DISPLAYS
• Estimated amount of total fuel remaining [1] [3]
Fuel Used
• Total fuel used since last update to estimated fuel remaining
quantity [1] [3]
Range
• Total range based on remaining fuel and current ground
speed [1] [3]
Endurance
(HH+MM)
• Fuel endurance time in hours+minutes [1]
Fuel at
Destination
• Estimated fuel amount at current flight plan destination
[1] [2] [3]
Endurance
at DEST
• Remaining fuel endurance time (hours+minutes) at
destination [1] [2]
Flight/Engine
Hours
• Total flight and engine hours [5]
Efficiency
• Fuel efficiency [3]
Outside Air
TEMP (ISA)
• Degrees deviation from the International Standard
Atmosphere model [4]
Outside Air
TEMP (SAT)
• Outside static air temperature [4]
Outside Air
TEMP (TAT)
• Outside total air temperature [4]
Cabin
Altitude/Rate
• Cabin altitude and calculated cabin rate [6] [7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Values are based on fuel computer calculations.
Requires an active flight plan from the navigator.
Parameter units are pilot selectable.
Units are independent of PFD units.
Engine hours accumulate when an engine is running. Flight hours accumulate when the
aircraft is in air.
Units are dependent upon configuration.
Requires cabin altitude data from GFC 600. Rate calculations performed by GDU.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-39
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.12 EIS Operations
PHASE
OF FLIGHT
OPERATION
Customize system settings
Initial Setup
Set fuel full and tab capacity levels
Set engine advisories
Calibrate fuel flow
8.12.1
Preflight
Add fuel
En Route
Monitor gauges
Post Flight
Record aircraft log and exceedance data
Initial Setup
Initial setup operations include:
• Customizing system settings
• Setting fuel tabs
• Setting engine advisories
• Calibrating fuel flow
CUSTOMIZE SYSTEM SETTINGS
Specify all necessary EIS settings. Customization options reside in either the System
page (GDU 1060) or the System menu (GDU 700( )).
SET FUEL FULL AND TAB CAPACITY
Specify estimated fuel full and tab values using the controls in the fuel computer.
SET ENGINE ADVISORIES
Specify engine advisory parameters and limit values.
8-40
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
CALIBRATE FUEL FLOW
NOTE
If the calculated adjustment factor exceeds the 10 percent fuel flow
calibration limit, contact your dealer for support.
Calibrate fuel flow using the controls provided in the fuel computer. Re-calibration is
recommended following the first flight or any time there is a significant difference
between the estimated remaining fuel quantity and the actual amount of fuel in the
tanks.
1. Fuel aircraft to a known level (i.e., the bottom of the tabs inside each fuel
filler port).
2. Tap EST Fuel Remaining and enter the amount of fuel on board.
NOTE: This value must be at least 5 liters (2 gallons) greater than the previous
estimated fuel on board amount.
3. Burn no less than 10 percent of usable fuel. Burning more than 10 percent will
yield a more accurate calibration.
4. Refuel to the previously entered level.
5. Tap EST Fuel Remaining and enter the amount of fuel on board.
6. Tap Calibrate FFlow.
7. Enter the amount of actual fuel used. Note the adjustment value.
8. Tap Update Calibration.
9. Confirm the request.
10.Acknowledge the pop-up message.
8.12.2
Preflight
ADD FUEL
Update the remaining fuel quantity whenever fuel is added to the aircraft.
1. Fuel the aircraft.
2. Enter the appropriate fuel amount using the fuel computer.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-41
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.12.3
En Route
MONITOR GAUGES
Monitor all dynamic gauges as limitations may change based on flight conditions.
MONITOR FOR ENGINE EXCEEDANCE ADVISORIES
Acknowledge any exceedance advisories occurring in flight and upon landing.
Always operate the aircraft in accordance with the POH.
8.12.4
Post Flight
RECORD AIRCRAFT LOG DATA
Document total engine and flight time. If configured, record the number of engine
and flight cycles. This information is necessary for logging and maintenance
purposes.
EXPORT DATA LOGS
Export flight data and engine exceedance logs to an SD card for later analysis.
8.13 Engine Advisories
Specify values at which the system will advise of certain engine parameters. The
system issues an advisory message when an engine gauge exceeds its specified value.
These messages are acknowledged in the same manner as system advisories.
Available selections are based on aircraft configuration.
• High/Low Battery Voltage
• Low Endurance [1]
• High/Low Bus Voltage
• Low Estimate Fuel Remaining [1]
• High/Low Oil Temperature
[1]
8-42
Actual amounts are based on fuel computer calculations and an active flight plan.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
Electrical
APPLICABLE TO PISTON &
TURBINE AIRCRAFT
8.14 Electrical Gauges
To accommodate more complex electrical
systems, electrical gauges allow up to six
parameters to display on three dedicated rows.
These may include: • main generator • standby
alternator • multiple buses • batteries
Markings and gauge titles are dependent upon
configuration.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-43
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
Fuel
APPLICABLE TO PISTON &
TURBINE AIRCRAFT
CAUTION
ENSURE THAT ESTIMATED FUEL QUANTITY VALUES IN THE FUEL
COMPUTER ARE ACCURATE BEFORE FLIGHT. FUEL QUANTITY GAUGE
INDICATIONS MAY NOT PROVIDE THE ACCURACY REQUIRED FOR
DETERMINATION OF ON BOARD FUEL DURING FLIGHT.
8.15 Fuel Computer
The fuel computer calculates and displays fuel parameter values when a flight plan is
active in a connected and compatible navigator. Calculations are based on GPS
ground speed, the pilot specified destination airport, estimated fuel remaining, and
inputs received from the engine fuel flow sensor. Fuel parameters are available for
display on the EIS in a selectable user field. They include:
• Aircraft endurance
• Efficiency
• Endurance at destination
• Fuel at destination
• Fuel used
• Range
SELECTION
FUNCTION
EST Fuel
Remaining
Opens a keypad for specifying the estimated fuel remaining
value. The fuel computer bases its calculations on the value
entered here.
To account for added fuel and maintain accurate fuel flow
measurements over time, always update this value upon
refueling.
This keypad provides additional controls for specifying preset
fuel values.
Calibrate
FFLOW
Opens the Fuel Flow Calibration page. Controls for calibrating
the fuel flow meter reside here.
This key remains inactive until a new value is entered for
EST Fuel Remaining.
8-44
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
Points About Estimated Fuel Remaining Data
• Based on estimated fuel remaining value entered by the pilot
• Initial value automatically reduced based on current fuel flow
• Not limited to the capacity of the aircraft fuel system
• Preset keys for “full” and “tabs” aid in fuel data entry
Fuel range rings are a pilot-selectable map overlay indicating an estimate of
remaining flight distance based on fuel onboard, fuel consumption rates, and
current ground speed.
The map depicts two separate rings: an outer yellow ring displaying total
endurance range, and an inner dashed green ring displaying range to reserve
fuel. These rings offer the pilot additional situational awareness regarding fuel
remaining and endurance.
8.15.1
Preset Fuel Quantities
The fuel computer stores preset fuel amounts for estimated full and tab amounts. For
the operating limitations of a specific aircraft, consult the POH.
SELECTION
FUNCTION
Full
Sets the fuel remaining value to the specified full amount.
Tab
Sets the fuel remaining value to the specified tab amount.
Set Full/Tabs
Opens the Set Fuel Tabs menu. Select the appropriate data
entry key and enter the estimated fuel amounts. These values
vary according to aircraft type.
Fuel Full Capacity: Specify the tank full amount.
Fuel Tab Capacity: Specify a tank tab amount.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-45
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
8.15.2
Fuel Flow Calibration
A calibration function compares the estimated fuel used amount (calculated by the
system) with the actual fuel used amount (determined by the pilot upon refueling).
The system calculates a fuel flow correction factor based on these inputs. This
adjustment value is applied to future fuel flow calculations.
Calibrating the fuel flow meter
helps ensure the accuracy of all
fuel computer calculations.
Estimated Fuel
Used Amount
Actual Fuel Used
Key
Adjustment Value
Update Calibration
Key
SELECTION
FUNCTION
Actual Fuel
Used
Allows you to specify the actual amount of fuel used since the
last adjustment to the EST Fuel Remaining quantity.
Update
Calibration
Updates the current calibration value. Confirming the request
re-calibrates the fuel flow meter and saves the new calibration
value.
8-46
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
Engine Alerts
APPLICABLE TO PISTON &
TURBINE AIRCRAFT
NOTE
Engine warnings require immediate action.
ACKNOWLEDGE ALERT KEY (GDU 700( ) ONLY)
•
•
•
•
•
Flashes yellow and black when an engine caution is present
Flashes red and white when an engine warning is present
Engine alerts display as textual annunciations on the PFD
Disappears once alert is acknowledged
GDU 1060: All engine cautions and warnings automatically
acknowledge after 10 seconds
Tapping the ACK key acknowledges the condition and suppresses all flashing alert
indications (i.e., annunciation, gauge). It does not remove the annunciation from the
display. Alert annunciations and non-safe range indications remain active (solid) for
as long as the gauge is within the alerted range.
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE, CONDITIONS, AND NOTES
Alert Type: Warning
Condition
ENGINE
Note
An engine parameter
indicates a red alerting
range (low or high).
Requires immediate action.
Alert Type: Caution
Condition
An engine parameter indicates a yellow alerting range
(low or high).
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
8-47
Fuel & Engine Indicating System
REMOTE ENGINE ANNUNCIATIONS
GDU 700( )/1060: Engine alerts annunciate on the PFD when the unit is connected
to a GDU 700( ) configured for EIS.
Engine Annunciator on PFD
EXTERNAL ENGINE ALERT LAMPS
An external lamp is required if the only EIS display is installed outside the pilot’s
primary field of view. This lamp illuminates any time an engine alert is active. It turns
off once the alert is acknowledged.
8-48
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
9
Abnormal Operations
BACKUP INSTRUMENTS
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Display Backup ......................................................................................9-2
Backup Battery ......................................................................................9-9
AHRS & ADC Failures...........................................................................9-14
HSI Failure Modes ................................................................................9-21
Emergency Descent Mode ...................................................................9-25
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-1
Abnormal Operations
Backup Instruments
9.1
Display Backup
FUNCTIONAL LIMITATIONS
• Applicable to pilot side units only
• Only pilot or center units trigger backup mode when offline
• Not available in single TXi display installations
• Display backup mode supports a limited set of EIS gauges
Display backup mode
occurs under these
three conditions
• Loss of communication with
a GDU that displays EIS or
PFD data
When transitioning, priority is given to
primary gauges first. All menu items
and lean controls are disabled in this
mode. An optional external toggle
switch allows manual activation of
backup mode.
• Pilot activation through
on-screen selection or toggle
switch
• AHRS or ADC fault caused by
miscompare or missing data
(this only triggers backup
mode when the unit is
configured as a standby PFD)
TCAS II RAs
When a GDU 1060 is in display backup mode and providing PFD/MFD/EIS functions,
the format of the PFD narrows and the VSI is too small to depict RA bands.
To view TCAS II RAs, tap Full on the PFD to expand it to 80%.
9-2
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
9.1.1
Standby PFD Display Options
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
Additional standby PFD functionality is available in installations that include:
• Dual external ADAHRS sensors: one external ADAHRS; one internal AHRS
connected to an ADC
• Two pilot side GDU 700P units: one configured as a dedicated PFD, the other
configured as either MFD, EIS, or MFD/EIS
• Non-PFD GDU configured as standby PFD
During display backup, the standby PFD allows you the option of continuing backup
PFD mode or returning to the unit's previous display mode (MFD, EIS, or MFD/EIS).
This option is available only if display backup is triggered by an AHRS or ADC data
miscompare or by pilot activation.
DISPLAY BACKUP KEY
This key remains available during display backup for as long as the GDUs are in
communication with each other. It is not available during display backup if only the
standby PFD is operational.
To return the standby PFD to its
previous display mode:
1. Push the Power key.
2. Deselect Display Backup.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-3
Abnormal Operations
9.1.2
Composite Display Backup Mode
When a GDU 700P enters a PFD/EIS composite display backup mode, certain aspects
of the normal PFD layout change to accommodate the display of EIS data.
PFD when in composite display backup mode:
• A limited, 90° field of view HSI replaces the Standard HSI or HSI Map
• CDI source selection key replaces air temperature and wind data fields
• Attitude background defaults to a blue over brown artificial horizon display
(non-SVT)
Removed from display in composite mode:
• Air temperature field
• Clock/timer field
• Wind data fields
• PFD Menu key
• Advisory key
Unchanged from display in composite mode:
• Airspeed
• Barometric altitude
• Attitude
Unavailable PFD functions operating in composite mode:
• Changing airspeed references
• Setting BARO or RA Minimums
• Selection of AHRS or ADC sources
• Manual adjustment of backlight levels
• Viewing external LRU status
9-4
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
Non-SVT Horizon
CDI Source
Select Key
HSI with Limited
field of View
Primary Engine
Instruments
GDU 700P Composite Display in Backup Mode - Reciprocating Engines
HSI with Limited
field of View
Primary Engine
Instruments
GDU 700P Composite Display in Backup Mode - Turboprop Engines
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-5
Abnormal Operations
DISPLAY BACKUP MODES
9-6
Normal Mode EIS
PFD/MFD
Display Failure
Backup Display Mode
Backup Display Mode
Display Failure
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
EIS GAUGE REVERSION
A
A
B
C
GDU 700P Gauges
GDU 1060
Gauge Strip
A
Gauges display with little or no change.
B
Gauges transfer depending on priority and open gauge slots.
C
Gauges simplify and transfer, depending on available display area.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-7
Abnormal Operations
TURBOPROP GAUGE AREAS
A
B
A
C
B
B
GDU 700P Gauges
9-8
GDU 1060
Gauge Strip
A
Gauges display with little or no change.
B
Gauges transfer depending on priority and open gauge slots.
C
Does not transfer to display backup.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
9.2
Backup Battery
FUNCTIONAL LIMITATIONS
• Applicable to GDU 700( ) only
• During backup battery mode, display brightness is set for minimum sunlight
readability
Battery Supported LRUs
• Backup GPS
• GDU 700( )
• GEA 110
• GMU 44
• GTP 59
• Integrated ADAHRS
GBB 54 Features
• Lithium-ion battery unit
• Integrated heater ensures performance in low temperatures
• Charged by GDU during normal operations
• Status indications denote battery state and availability
• Pop-up alerts with estimated time remaining
• System advisories with timer display
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-9
Abnormal Operations
GBB 54
Icon not present when backup
battery is at full charge.
Battery Icon
GBB 54 Backup Battery
9-10
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
9.2.1
Battery Status Indications
Status indications include a battery icon and timers.
BATTERY ICON
• Displays when the GBB 54 is powering the GDU, battery charge state is
insufficient, or a battery fault exists
• Displays in the annunciator bar and on External LRUs page
• Removed when the battery is at full charge
ICON
Absent [1]
STATE
Charged
Charging/Warming Up
CONDITION
• Backup battery at full charge
(>30 minutes) and available for use.
• Battery has less than 30 minutes
remaining charge. [2]
• Battery temperature is below -20ºC.
[2] [3]
Discharging
• GDU on backup battery power.
15 to 30 minutes remaining.
Discharging/Caution
• GDU on backup battery power.
0 to 15 minutes remaining.
Discharging/Warning
Unavailable/Error
• GDU on backup battery power for
longer than 30 minutes. Loss of
power may be imminent. [4]
• Charge state uncertain (i.e., GDU
switches to backup battery power
before battery reaches full charge).
• Battery error. Backup battery power
is unavailable.
• Capacity test is overdue.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
A green check on the External LRUs page denotes LRU availability.
Aircraft power is required.
The warm up process can take up to 30 minutes.
A total power loss occurs when aircraft power fails and the backup battery is unavailable or
depleted.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-11
Abnormal Operations
BATTERY TIMERS
Battery timers alert the pilot of:
• Transitions from aircraft power to backup battery power
• Total time on battery power
TIMER
ALERT TYPE
CONDITION
Elapsed time on battery
power (count-up)
Advisory
Aircraft is in flight.
60 second countdown
Pop-up
Aircraft is on ground or in an
unknown state.
Automatic Unit Shutdown
To prevent battery depletion, the unit automatically powers off once the 60 second
countdown timer expires.
Tapping Stay On cancels the automatic
shutdown sequence, allowing the unit to
continue operation on backup battery power.
9-12
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
9.2.2
Battery Alerts
Caution messages alerting to backup battery status may display while in flight.
On GDU 700L, these alerts are shortened to accommodate space limitations.
ANNUNCIATION
Backup battery in
use. Estimated time
remaining:
15 minutes.
ALERT TYPE & CONDITION
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
GDU on backup battery power, discharging for
15 minutes.
Alert Type: Caution
Pop-up Alert: Yes
Condition
Backup battery has
low charge or fault.
See flight manual
for operating
limitations.
Battery is charging. Estimated charge is below 30 minutes.
GDU detects a battery fault or warning state.
Loss of communication.
Battery power output failure.
Capacity test failure or testing overdue.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-13
Abnormal Operations
9.3
AHRS & ADC Failures
The AHRS uses aiding data from the GPS navigator, air data computer, and
magnetometer to provide accurate attitude data. Failure of these inputs may cause
attitude data to become unavailable. Additional annunciations indicate current
alignment and calibration status.
AHRS Alignment Annunciation
AHRS/MAG Calibration Status
Annunciation
Heading Failure Warning
ADC and AHRS Annunciations
(Dual AHRS and/or ADC
Installations Only)
In dual AHRS/ADC installations, use the onside AHRS/ADC during normal
operations and the offside AHRS/ADC only when necessary. Under normal
conditions, sensor assignment should be as follows.
Pilot PFD: AHRS 1, ADC 1
Co-pilot PFD: AHRS 2, ADC 2
Standby PFD (pilot side): AHRS 2, ADC 2
9-14
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
9.3.1
AHRS and ADC Sensor Selection
The pilot is provided AHRS/ADC source selection controls when dual ADC or AHRS
sensors are configured.
SELECT SENSORS ON PILOT/CO-PILOT PFD
Default Selection
(Active)
AHRS and ADC selection keys reside on
the Sensors page of the PFD menu.
Alternate attitude or air data sources
annunciate on the PFD. Default
selections do not annunciate.
Alternate Selection
(Active)
SELECT SENSORS ON A STANDBY TXI PFD
By default, the pilot side standby PFD
uses ADC 2 and AHRS 2 data when the
unit transitions to backup PFD mode.
This occurs during any one of the
following conditions.
• Primary PFD failure
• Miscompare state
Default Selections
(Active)
Pilot Selected
Sensors (Active)
190-01717-10 Rev. H
• No compare state
Standby PFD allows you to specify
alternate data sources if the default
selections are not preferred.
Pilot’s Guide
9-15
Abnormal Operations
PFD
MFD (Standby PFD)
During backup
PFD mode, sensor
select options
remain available.
Display Failure
Sensor Options
Available
Standby PFD Sensor Options
9-16
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
AHRS/ADC SENSOR SELECTION ANNUNCIATIONS
ANNUNCIATION
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
SINGLE TXI PFD
“ON ADC 2” or
“ON AHRS 2”
(black text on white)
Pilot selected ADC 2 or
AHRS 2 as the sensor
source.
Pilot’s PFD
TWO TXI PFDS
“ON ADC 1” or
“ON AHRS 1”
(black text on yellow)
Standby PFD (pilot side)
Co-pilot’s PFD
“ON ADC 2” or
“ON AHRS 2”
(black text on yellow)
Pilot’s PFD
“ON ADC 2” or
“ON AHRS 2”
(black text on white)
Standby PFD (pilot side)
9.3.2
GDU is in display backup
mode.
Pilot changed sensor
source from the default
setting.
Sensor source is the
default setting (sensor 2).
AHRS Operating In Reversionary Mode
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS output, while AHRS is operating
in normal mode. If the air data input fails, while the AHRS is operating in backup
No-GPS mode, PFD attitude and heading data are invalid.
9.3.3
GPS Failure
Two GPS inputs may be provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the
inputs fails, the AHRS uses the remaining GPS input, and an advisory message
informs the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS continues to provide attitude and
heading information to the PFD as long as true airspeed data is available and valid.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-17
Abnormal Operations
9.3.4
AHRS Alerts
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE & CONDITION
Alert Type: Warning
HDG FAIL
Condition
Invalid heading.
Alert Type: Caution
AHRS ALIGN: Keep
Wings Level
Condition
AHRS is aligning. Appears during AHRS initialization.
Alert Type: Caution
CALIBRATE
AHRS/MAG
Condition
AHRS calibration is incomplete.
Service required. Contact a Garmin dealer for support.
Alert Type: Caution (Dual TXi PFD only)
Condition
PFD is using opposite-side ADC data.
Alert Type: Advisory (Single TXi PFD only)
ON ADC <#>
Condition
PFD is using ADC data from ADC 2.
Alert Type: Advisory (Dual TXi PFD only-Standby PFD only)
Condition
PFD is using ADC data from ADC 2.
Alert Type: Caution (Dual TXi PFD only)
Condition
PFD is using opposite-side AHRS data.
ON AHRS <#>
Alert Type: Advisory (Single TXi PFD only)
Condition
PFD is using AHRS data from AHRS 2.
9-18
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
ANNUNCIATION
ALERT TYPE & CONDITION
Alert Type: Advisory (Dual TXi PFD only-Standby PFD only)
ON AHRS <#>
Condition
PFD is using AHRS data from AHRS 2.
Alert Type: Caution
ATTITUDE
Condition
Flight dynamics monitor detects a possible discrepancy in
AHRS outputs.
LRU FAILURE EFFECT ON AHRS OPERATION
LRU
ADC
GPS Navigator
Magnetometer
GPS and
Magnetometer
190-01717-10 Rev. H
CONDITION
AHRS OUTPUT
ADC input fails during normal
mode.
Valid attitude and heading
information (no interruption).
ADC input fails while AHRS is
in NO-GPS mode.
Attitude and heading fails.
GPS inputs fail. AHRS
continues to operate in
No-GPS mode (ADC and
magnetometer required).
Valid attitude and heading
information (no interruption).
Magnetometer input fails
while aircraft is on the
ground. AHRS transitions to
back-up mode without
magnetometer.
Valid attitude information
(no interruption). Heading
displays using GPS track data.
Magnetometer input fails
while aircraft is in the air.
AHRS transitions to no
magnetometer mode.
Valid attitude information
(no interruption). Invalid
heading information. Display
enters reversionary track
mode.
Magnetometer and GPS
inputs fail.
Attitude and heading fails.
Pilot’s Guide
9-19
Abnormal Operations
9.3.5
Miscompare & No Compare
AHRS/ADC SENSOR COMPARISON
The GDU continuously monitors and compares sensor data when more than one
AHRS or ADC is present. A miscompare state occurs when the difference between
two or more sensor outputs is above the predefined threshold.
MISCOMPARE THRESHOLDS
PARAMETER
CONDITION
VALUE
Altitude
All
200 feet
Heading [1]
All
6º
Both <35 kts
Inhibited
Either or both ≥35 kts,
and both <80 kts
10 kts
Either ≥80 kts
7 kts
Lateral Acceleration
All
0.2G
Normal Acceleration
All
0.2G
Pitch Attitude
All
5º
Pitch Attitude Rate
All
1º
Roll
All
6°
Roll Rate
All
3º
Indicated Airspeed
[1]
Depends upon configuration.
MISCOMPARE ANNUNCIATIONS
Miscompares generate a caution annunciation over the affected PFD instrument(s).
Indicated airspeed,
“IAS” annunciates
below the airspeed
pointer.
Pitch and/or roll,
“ATTITUDE”
displays on the
pitch scale.
Altitude, “ALT”
annunciates below
the barometric
altitude pointer.
Heading, “HDG”
annunciates below
the current heading.
In addition to miscompare monitors, the GDU provides an independent flight
dynamics monitor that compares computed cross heading, vertical accelerations, and
roll angles against reported values generated by the AHRS. If there is a disagreement
between the flight dynamics monitor and the AHRS parameters, the “ATTITUDE”
caution annunciates.
9-20
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
NO COMPARE ANNUNCIATIONS
A no compare monitor determines when data to the second ADC or AHRS source is
unable to be used for comparison.
No compares generate an
advisory annunciation over the
affected instrument(s) driven by
ADC and AHRS units.
9.4
HSI Failure Modes
NOTE
TAWS/terrain alerting is unavailable in the absence of a certified GPS
source.
The HSI continues to display limited navigation information during magnetometer
and GPS failures. If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to backup
No-Magnetometer mode and continues to output valid attitude information.
If the aircraft is airborne, the PFD heading output reverts to GPS track. Magnetic
heading is replaced by GPS track information and HSI compass card orients to GPS
track. The following TXi system conditions exist:
• SVT turns off and automatically re-enables when heading is restored
• Map orientations change from HDG UP to TRACK UP
• When heading is restored orientations change back to HDG up
• When heading fails heading bug remains
• GDU continues driving autopilot heading error output using track in place of
heading
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-21
Abnormal Operations
“HDG FAIL” annunciates when there is
an AHRS heading data failure.
If the magnetometer fails, the HSI
compass card indicates GPS track. The
numeric heading value turns magenta
to indicate GPS track is displayed.
HSI with
Magnetometer Failure
If both the magnetometer and GPS
units fail:
• HSI reverts to a
non-directional CDI
• Numeric heading display is
removed
• Use the selected course
control to manually control
OBS
HSI with GPS and
Magnetometer Failures
9-22
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
9.4.1
GPS Failure
WARNING
DO NOT USE PROJECTED POSITION DATA AS THE ONLY MEANS OF
NAVIGATION.
When dead reckoning mode is active on the GPS navigator:
• System flags all external outputs dependent on GPS position data
• Map page reports “No GPS Position”; overlays are not available
• DR Mode annunciates on HSI, replacing ENR or OCN
• Traffic and Stormscope data continue to display on their respective pages
• Charts are available for display on the dedicated MFD page, but the ownship
is no longer geo-referenced on the chart
• Terrain functionality not available
• CDI not available
Dead Reckoning
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-23
Abnormal Operations
9.4.2
Backup GPS
Each GDU is equipped with a backup GPS receiver. When the optional Garmin
backup GPS antenna is connected, and if all the certified GPS sources are lost, the
system provides 2-D GPS position information from the backup GPS. No pilot action
is required to enable the use of backup GPS data.
Only one GDU in a multi-GDU installation requires a connected backup GPS antenna.
The system automatically cross-fills backup GPS data between GDUs.
Backup GPS data is used only to provide non-safety critical functions and only after
the failure of all certified GPS position sources. Backup GPS data is only provided
when a valid GPS position is received from an airborne certified GPS source that is
subsequently lost. The system always utilizes time from the backup GPS when no
other source is available, even prior to receipt of GPS time from a certified GPS
source.
Backup GPS data provides:
• Ownship position on the moving map
• GPS track display
• Waypoint bearing/distance information
• Ground speed
• Wind calculations
When backup GPS is in use:
• Yellow “BACKUP GPS” annunciation displays on all geo-referenced maps
• Navigation using backup GPS is not provided
• Map overlays for Stormscope, traffic, terrain, and obstacles are disabled
• Traffic page continues to display data from TIS-A and TCAS sources
Functions inhibited with backup GPS:
• Bearing pointer on Waypoint Info page
• Chart geo-referencing
• SVT
• GPS altitude displays
• GPS navigation status field
• TAWS/terrain alerting
• Terrain page display
9-24
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
9.5
Emergency Descent Mode
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• GDU 700( )/1060 PFD
• GFC 600 autopilot configured for EDM
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Availability dependent upon configuration
While EDM can assist in workload
reduction, it is the responsibility of
the pilot in command to know
and follow all published POH/AFM
normal and emergency
procedures.
9.5.1
GDU offers an Emergency Descent Mode
(EDM) that assists pilots of pressurized
aircraft in the event of cabin
depressurization.
EDM Activation
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• EDM must be armed in order for activation to occur
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
The manner in which activation occurs (manual or automatic) is dependent upon
configuration. For manual activation, GDU must be configured with an emergency
descent switch.
The system begins monitoring cabin pressure once EDM is armed.
EDM is considered armed when:
• Autopilot is active
• Aircraft is above 15,000 ft MSL
Once armed, activation may occur manually or automatically.
• Manual activation. Pilot triggers EDM by enabling the dedicated switch
(if configured).
• Automatic activation. If the aircraft experiences decompression and cabin
altitude increases beyond the threshold configured for the aircraft, the
system automatically triggers EDM.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-25
Abnormal Operations
Once triggered, a pop-up warning
displaying a timer appears on the PFD.
Emergency descent occurs once the
timer expires. This delay may range from
10 to 60 seconds. If manually activated,
you may skip the delay and active EDM
immediately by pressing the emergency
descent switch a second time.
During emergency descent:
• Autopilot enters HDG lateral mode
• Aural alert “Emergency Descent,
Emergency Descent” repeats every
20 seconds
• HDG bug on PFD sets to 90° to left
HDG = 90º left turn
• Simultaneously:
• Autopilot enters IAS mode
• PFD sets airspeed bug at VMO and
altitude preselect bug to 15,000 ft
IAS = VMO
15,000 ft
• Aircraft descends at VMO
• Autopilot captures altitude hold
mode at 15,000 ft
If available, the pilot may reduce power and deploy speed brakes to increase the
rate of descent and reduce the time needed to reach a lower altitude. Ensure
that all actions are in accordance with the POH.
9-26
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
EDM ACTIVE INDICATIONS
ANNUNCIATION
STATE
During EDM, airspeed and altitude
bugs are locked and unchangeable.
The active state annunciates in the
upper left corner of the PFD.
Active
Override or
Inhibit Mode
Selected Airspeed
Locked
EDM Active
Annunciation
Selected Altitude
Locked
Airspeed
Bug
Locked
Altitude
Bug
Locked
EDM Selected Data Lockout
9.5.2
EDM Inhibit
Tapping Inhibit EDM prevents automatic activation once the delay timer expires.
During inhibit mode:
• Automatic activation remains inhibited for a duration of 5 minutes
• An advisory message with timer counts down the remaining
minutes/seconds
• Inhibit state annunciation appears beneath the autopilot banner
Inhibit Advisory
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Inhibit Annunciation
Pilot’s Guide
9-27
Abnormal Operations
Once the 5 minute inhibit timer expires,
the same pop-up warning appears
regardless of whether EDM was
triggered automatically or by the pilot.
IF
THEN
Pilot triggers EDM and then chooses to
inhibit.
Automatic activation remains enabled.
EDM is triggered automatically and the
pilot chooses to inhibit.
Manual activation remains available for
as long as the aircraft is above 15,000 ft
and the autopilot is engaged. [1]
The 5 minute inhibit timer expires and
activation conditions are still present.
EDM automatically triggers again.
Pilot loses consciousness after enabling
the inhibit function.
Once the 5 minute inhibit timer expires,
EDM automatically activates in order to
bring the aircraft to a safer altitude.
[1]
9-28
Dependent upon configuration.
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Abnormal Operations
9.5.3
EDM Override
To deactivate EDM, disengage the autopilot. You may do this multiple ways:
On PFD: Tap Menu > Test > AP Disconnect.
On GMC 605: Push the AP bezel key.
On the yoke: Push the AP DISC button.
Activating autopilot will override EDM and return the autopilot to normal operation.
In this state:
• EDM does not automatically reactivate until arming conditions are cleared
• An advisory message alerts you to re-pressurize the cabin and reset the
autopilot
• Override state annunciation appears beneath the autopilot banner
Override Advisory
Override Annunciation
AUTO EDM
This key allows you to manually enable or disable automatic
activation. During system power up, this function is active by
default.
When the function is off, manual activation of EDM is still
available.
To reset EDM automatic activation following an override:
1. Descend below 15,000 ft.
2. Disengage and then re-engage the autopilot.
OR
1. Open the PFD Setup menu.
2. Toggle Auto EDM off and on.
Disabling the Auto EDM function may be desired if current cabin conditions are
causing erroneous activation of EDM. This can occur when:
• Cabin altitude is above the configured threshold
• GDU reports incorrect cabin altitude
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
9-29
Abnormal Operations
9.5.4
EDM Active Discrete Output
Active Discrete Output &
Engine Torque Control
On the Socata TBM 850, the
discrete output may be connected
to the engine torque limiter. In
such case, turning on EDM would
energize the torque limiter circuit,
resulting in overtorque protection
while the aircraft is in emergency
descent mode.
PFD provides a discrete output that
allows synchronization of EDM with
other systems in the aircraft.
• When EDM is on, the discrete
output is active.
• When EDM is off, the output is
inactive.
Use of the active discrete output is
airframe and installation specific.
This capability is dependent upon
installation and should not be
relied upon to maintain the
engine within torque limits.
It is the full responsibility of the
pilot-in-command to operate the
aircraft and engine within the
limitations defined in the
POH/AFM.
9-30
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Qualification
10 Qualification
NOTE
The procedures described in this section are not authorized for completion
during flight. All tasks must be performed while the aircraft is on the
ground.
10.1 Glove Qualification
The touchscreen uses capacitive touch technology to sense the proximity of skin to
the display. A glove creates a barrier between the skin and the display glass,
potentially reducing the ability of the display to detect touches.
This procedure qualifies a specific glove for use with the touchscreen. Due to
differences in finger size, glove size, and touchscreen between the GDU 700( ) and
GDU 1060 units, the qualification procedure is specific to the pilot/glove and GDU
combination. Multiple units must be evaluated individually.
GLOVE SELECTION CONSIDERATIONS
• Thinner gloves perform better than thicker gloves.
• Leather gloves, and gloves designed specifically for use with capacitive
touchscreen devices, are often found to be acceptable.
• To improve touchscreen sensitivity while wearing gloves, use the pad of your
finger instead of the tip during touch interactions.
GLOVE QUALIFICATION GUIDANCE
• Checklist 1 contains the tasks required to qualify a glove.
• Checklist 2 contains tasks that are not required to qualify a glove, but may
limit how some functions are accessed while wearing a glove.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
10-1
Qualification
GLOVE QUALIFICATION STEPS
Complete only the tasks for the capabilities relevant to the installed GDU(s).
1.
Sit in the pilot’s seat.
2.
Start the GDU in normal mode.
3.
Perform the tasks listed in each checklist, tapping each key with a non-gloved
finger. It is not necessary to record any results for this step.
4.
Repeat step 3 using a gloved hand.
5.
For each task, determine whether the touchscreen response is the same or
worse than without the glove.
6.
Record the results in the applicable column. Items that may cause the
operation to be worse include, but are not limited to:
• Multiple attempts to select a key
• Unintentional selection of adjacent key(s)
• Excessive force on the touchscreen to select a key
7.
If all applicable tasks produce the same response with and without a glove,
the pilot may use the glove in flight.
GLOVE QUALIFICATION PROCEDURE
Pilot:
Glove Description:
Circle the applicable TXi GDU and system function(s).
1060
10-2
700L
700P
/ PFD
MFD
EIS
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Qualification
CHECKLIST 1
REQUIRED TASKS
TASK
OPERATION WITH GLOVE
(CIRCLE ONE)
PFD
Change the current CDI source.
Same
Worse
Tap HDG
Same
Worse
Change AP HDG REF setting.
Same
Worse
Close control menu.
Same
Worse
Tap Barometric Setting Control
Same
Worse
Toggle STD BARO key on and off.
Same
Worse
Close
Same
Worse
Menu
Same
Worse
Minimums
Same
Worse
BARO
Same
Worse
Same
Worse
Enter
Same
Worse
Back
Same
Worse
HSI Setup
Same
Worse
Bearing Pointers
Same
Worse
Toggle Bearing Pointer 1 on and off.
Same
Worse
Back
Same
Worse
PFD Setup
Same
Worse
Clock/Timer
Same
Worse
Enable clock/timer.
Same
Worse
Exit PFD Setup.
Same
Worse
Type a minimums altitude value.
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
10-3
Qualification
OPERATION WITH GLOVE
(CIRCLE ONE)
TASK
Close menu.
Same
Worse
Clock/Timer Control
Same
Worse
Enable timer mode (if necessary).
Same
Worse
Start and stop timer.
Same
Worse
Close control menu.
Same
Worse
Advisory
Same
Worse
Close advisory panel.
Same
Worse
Home
Same
Worse
Waypoint Info
Same
Worse
Airport
Same
Worse
Tap WP Identifier key.
Same
Worse
Type a new airport identifier.
Same
Worse
Enter
Same
Worse
MFD
Add each of the following waypoints in the same manner.
KPRC
Same
Worse
LOTKE
Same
Worse
Home
Same
Worse
Engine
Same
Worse
Advance selector through each EGT/TIT
cylinder.
Same
Worse
Toggle Lean Mode key on and off.
Same
Worse
Menu
Same
Worse
Engine Advisories
Same
Worse
Type a temperature value for the
High Oil TEMP advisory.
Same
Worse
EIS
For GDUs with integrated EIS only.
10-4
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Qualification
OPERATION WITH GLOVE
(CIRCLE ONE)
TASK
Enter
Same
Worse
Return temperature value to its previous setting.
Same
Worse
Back
Same
Worse
Engine & Flight Hours
Same
Worse
Back
Same
Worse
Exit menu.
Same
Worse
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Pilot’s Guide
10-5
Qualification
CHECKLIST 2
NON-REQUIRED TASKS
OPERATION WITH GLOVE
(CIRCLE ONE)
TASK
PFD
Menu
Same
Worse
HSI Setup
Same
Worse
Enable HSI Map.
Same
Worse
Exit menu.
Same
Worse
With one finger on the map, swipe up to zoom
in, swipe down to zoom out.
Same
Worse
Open the Map page.
Same
Worse
With two fingers on the map, stretch to zoom
in, pinch to zoom out.
Same
Worse
With one finger on the map, swipe in any
direction to pan.
Same
Worse
Menu
Same
Worse
Map Setup
Same
Worse
Drag to the bottom of the Map tab list.
Same
Worse
LAT/LON Lines
Same
Worse
Exit menu.
Same
Worse
MFD
EIS
None.
10-6
Pilot’s Guide
190-01717-10 Rev. H
190-01717-10 Rev. H
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising